Sew Motor Eurodriver

Edition
Drive System for Decentralized Installation

10/2001
System Manual
10523510 / EN
SEW-EURODRIVE
Contents
1
1 Important Notes................................................................................................. 6
1
2
2 System Description........................................................................................... 7
2.1 SEW-EURODRIVE Company Group........................................................ 7 2
2.2 Drive System for Decentralized Installation .............................................. 9 3
3
kVA n 3 Technical Data and Dimension Drawings..................................................... 13 4
f 3.1 MOVIMOT® Nameplates, Type Designation .......................................... 13
i
P Hz 3.2 MOVIMOT® Motor Data for IEC Configuration ....................................... 15 45
3.3 MOVIMOT® Motor Data for UL Configuration
(Motor according to NEMA) .................................................................... 16
56
3.4 MOVIMOT® Inverter Data ....................................................................... 17
3.5 Integrated RS-485 Interface.................................................................... 20
3.6 4Q Operation in Motors with Mechanical Brake...................................... 21
3.7 4Q Operation with Integrated BW.. Braking Resistor.............................. 23
67
3.8 Dimension Sheet Foot-Mounted MOVIMOT® ........................................ 24
3.9 Dimension Sheet Flange-Mounted MOVIMOT® .................................... 25 8
7
3.10 MOVIMOT® Options ............................................................................... 26
3.11 MOVIMOT® with Factory-Installed Options ............................................ 34 9
3.12 MOVIMOT® Retrofit Sets ........................................................................ 35 8
3.13 MOVI-SWITCH® Type Designation and Combination Options............... 37 10
3.14 MOVI-SWITCH® Operating Principle...................................................... 38 9
3.15 MOVI-SWITCH® Features ...................................................................... 39
11
3.16 MOVI-SWITCH® Technical Data ........................................................... 39
3.17 Dimension Sheet Foot-Mounted MOVI-SWITCH®.................................. 40 10
3.18 Dimension Sheet Flange-Mounted MOVI-SWITCH® ............................. 41 12
3.19 MOVI-SWITCH® Plug Connector ........................................................... 42 11
3.20 MOVI-SWITCH® with MLK11A Option Installed ..................................... 44 13
3.21 Fieldbus Interfaces.................................................................................. 45
3.22 Options for MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces....................................................... 59 12
3.23 MF.../Z.3. Field Distributors..................................................................... 62 14
3.24 MF.../Z.6. Field Distributor ...................................................................... 64
3.25 MF.../MM../Z.8. Field Distributor ............................................................. 67
3.26 AC Motors with Plug Connector (for Z.8 Field Distributor)...................... 73
15
13
3.27 Connection Technology for Field Distributors ......................................... 76
3.28 Fieldbus Interfaces and Field Distributors with Integrated MQ.. Control. 82 16
14
3.29 Hybrid Cables ......................................................................................... 84
4 Project Planning.............................................................................................. 87 17
4.1 Project Planning Process........................................................................ 87 15
4.2 Decentralization Concepts ...................................................................... 92
4.3 Project Planning Examples – Decentralized Systems ............................ 97 18
4.4 Single Applications with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples.............. 103 16
4.5 Group Drives with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples....................... 106 19
4.6 Installation Planning under EMC Aspects............................................. 109
17
5 MOVIMOT® Safety Notes .............................................................................. 112
5.1 Additional Safety Notes for Field Distributors ....................................... 113
20
18
21
19
22
System Manual – Drive System for Decentralized Installation
3
Contents
6 Unit Design .................................................................................................... 114

6.1 MOVIMOT® Basic Unit (Inverter) .......................................................... 114
6.2 Fieldbus Interfaces................................................................................ 117
6.3 Field Distributors ................................................................................... 121
7 Mechanical Installation................................................................................. 125
7.1 MOVIMOT® Geared Motors.................................................................. 125
7.2 MOVIMOT® Retrofit Sets ...................................................................... 127
7.3 MLU..A / MLG..A / MLK11A Option ...................................................... 133
7.4 Fieldbus Interfaces................................................................................ 134
8 Electrical Installation .................................................................................... 137
8.1 MOVIMOT® Installation Guidelines ...................................................... 137
8.2 Additional Installation Instructions
for Fieldbus Interfaces, Field Distributors ............................................. 139
8.3 Connection of MOVIMOT® Basic Unit .................................................. 142
8.4 Connection of MLU11A / MLU21A Option ............................................ 143
8.5 Connection of MLG11A / MLG21A Option............................................ 143
8.6 Connection of MBG11A Option............................................................. 144
8.7 Connection of MWA21A Option ............................................................ 144
8.8 Connection of AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A ............................................ 145
8.9 Connection RS-485 Bus Master ........................................................... 145
8.10 Connection of MDG11A Option ............................................................ 146
8.11 Connection with PROFIBUS ................................................................. 147
8.12 Connection with InterBus (Copper Line) ............................................... 154
8.13 Connection with InterBus (Fiber Optic) ................................................. 166
8.14 Connection with DeviceNet................................................................... 172
8.15 Connection with CANopen.................................................................... 180
8.16 Connecting Inputs/Outputs (I/O) of MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces................ 188
8.17 Connection of Pre-Fabricated Cables................................................... 192
9 MOVIMOT® Startup ....................................................................................... 194
I
9.1 Important Notes for Startup................................................................... 194
0
9.2 Description of MOVIMOT® Control Elements ....................................... 195
9.3 Startup with Binary Control (Control via Terminals).............................. 196
9.4 Startup with MBG11A or MLG11A Option ............................................ 198
9.5 Operating MBG11A and MLG..A Options ............................................. 200
9.6 Startup with MWA21A Option (Speed Control Module) ........................ 201
9.7 Startup with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A ............................................... 204
10 Communications Interfaces ......................................................................... 207
I
10.1 Startup with PROFIBUS........................................................................ 207
0 10.2 Function of PROFIBUS Interface.......................................................... 211
10.3 Startup with InterBus (Copper Line)...................................................... 218
10.4 Function of InterBus Interface (Copper Line)........................................ 224
10.5 Startup of InterBus (Fiber Optic) ........................................................... 230
10.6 Function of InterBus Interface (Fiber Optic).......................................... 236
10.7 Startup with DeviceNet ......................................................................... 243
10.8 Function of DeviceNet Interface............................................................ 247
10.9 Startup with CANopen .......................................................................... 257
10.10 Function of CANopen Interface............................................................. 261
10.11 Startup with RS-485 Master.................................................................. 268
10.12 Function with RS-485 Master................................................................ 270
10.13 MOVILINK® Unit Profile (Coding of Process Data)............................... 275
10.14 Sample Program with Fieldbus ............................................................. 278
10.15 Startup of Field Distributor .................................................................... 280
10.16 MFG11A Keypad for MF.. Fieldbus Interface ....................................... 285

4
Contents
1
11 MOVIMOT® and Bus Diagnostics ................................................................ 287
1
11.1 MOVIMOT® Status LED ....................................................................... 287
11.2 MOVIMOT® List of Faults ..................................................................... 288 2
11.3 MOVIMOT® Diagnostics via MDG11A Option ...................................... 289 2
11.4 Fieldbus Diagnostics via MF.. Diagnostics Interface ............................ 291 3
12 Inspection and Maintenance of MOVIMOT® .............................................. 294
3
12.1 Inspection and Maintenance Intervals .................................................. 294 4
12.2 Motor Inspection and Maintenance....................................................... 295
12.3 Inspection and Maintenance of Brake................................................... 297
12.4 Approved Ball Bearing Types ............................................................... 301 45
12.5 Working Air Gap, Brake Braking Torque............................................... 301
13 MOVI-SWITCH® Safety Instructions ............................................................ 302 56
14 MOVI-SWITCH® Unit Design......................................................................... 303 67

14.1 Sample Nameplate, Type Designation ................................................. 304
8
7
15 Mechanical Installation of MOVI-SWITCH® ................................................. 305 9
8
16 Electrical Installation of MOVI-SWITCH® .................................................... 306

10
16.1 Description of Control Signals (M12 Connection) ................................. 306 9
16.2 MOVI-SWITCH® Connection ............................................................... 306 11
16.3 MOVI-SWITCH® with BGW Brake Control ........................................... 307 10
16.4 Connection with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11 ........................................... 309
16.5 Connection with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11 and BGW .......................... 310
12
16.6 Connection Example 2 x MOVI-SWITCH® with MF.. 11
Fieldbus Interface ................................................................................. 311 13
®
17 Startup of MOVI-SWITCH ............................................................................ 313
I 12
17.1 Startup Information ............................................................................... 313 14
0 17.2 Starting the Motor ................................................................................. 313
17.3 Monitoring ............................................................................................. 313
17.4 Startup with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A ............................................... 314 15
13
18 MOVI-SWITCH® Diagnostics ........................................................................ 316
16
14
17
15
19 Inspection and Maintenance of MOVI-SWITCH® ........................................ 317
19.1 Inspection and Maintenance Intervals .................................................. 317
19.2 Inspection and Maintenance Work of the Motor ................................... 318 18
19.3 Inspection and Maintenance of Brake................................................... 320 16
19.4 Approved Bearing Types ...................................................................... 324
19.5 Working Air Gap, Brake Braking Torque............................................... 324 19
17
20 Appendix........................................................................................................ 325
20.1 Statement of Conformance for MFD2x DeviceNet Interface ................ 325 20
20.2 Statement of Conformance for MFD3x DeviceNet Interface ................ 334 18
21 Revisions Index............................................................................................. 343 21
22 Index............................................................................................................... 344 19
22
5
1
1 Important Notes
Warnings and Always follow the warnings and safety instructions in this publication!
Safety
Instructions
Electrical hazard
Possible effects: Serious or fatal injury.
Immediate danger
Possible effects: Serious or fatal injury.
Dangerous situation
Possible effects: Minor injury.
Harmful situation
Possible effects: Damage to equipment or surroundings.
Application hints and useful information.
Following these instructions is required for fault-free operation and fulfillment of any
warranty claims. Read these instructions carefully before you start working with the
drive!
These operating instructions contain vital servicing information and should be kept in
close proximity to the drive.
Additional • MOVIMOT® Catalog

Applicable • Geared motors catalog
Documentation
• If MOVIMOT® is used for emergency stops, the supplemental documentation
"Safe shutdown for MOVIMOT®" must be observed.
Disposal This product consists of:

• Iron
• Aluminium
• Copper
• Plastic
• Electronic components
All components should be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations!
6 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

SEW-EURODRIVE Company Group 2
1
2 System Description
2.1 SEW-EURODRIVE Company Group 2
SEW … an SEW-EURODRIVE is a leader in electric drive technology in the global market. Its
introduction worldwide presence, extensive product program, and broad range of services make 3
SEW the ideal partner for mechanical and plant engineering in solving demanding drive
requirements.
SEW develops, manufactures and distributes drives and components from mechanical 4
engineering, electrical engineering and electronics sectors, based on long-standing
experience in drive technology.
5
The company's headquarters are located in Bruchsal (Germany). Components of
SEW's high-quality drive modules are manufactured in plants located in Germany,
France, the United States, Brazil, and China. Customized drive systems are assembled 6
from warehoused components in assembly plants in over 30 industrial countries
worldwide, providing very short delivery times and constant high quality. Distribution,
consultation, customer service and spare parts service from SEW can also be found in 7
more than 50 countries.
8
The SEW Product • Geared motors, gear units, and motors 9

Range – Helical gear units / geared motors
– Parallel shaft helical gear units / geared motors
– Helical-bevel gear units / geared motors 10
– Helical-worm gear units / geared motors
– Spiroplan® right-angle geared motors 11
– Planetary geared motors
– Industrial gear units
– Low backlash gear units / geared motors 12
– Brake motors
– Drives for trolley drive systems
– Geared torque motors 13
– Pole-changing geared motors
14
• Electronically controlled drives with
– MOVITRAC® frequency inverters 15
– MOVIDRIVE® drive inverters
– MOVIDYN® servo controllers
– Technological and communications options for inverters 16
– Asynchronous AC motors and AC geared motors
– Asynchronous and synchronous servomotors and geared servomotors
– Synchronous and asynchronous linear motors 17
• Components for decentralized installation 18

®
– MOVIMOT geared motors with integrated frequency inverter
– MOVI-SWITCH® geared motors with integrated switching and protection function 19
– Field distributors, fieldbus interfaces
20
21
22
System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation 7
2 SEW-EURODRIVE Company Group
• Mechanical variable speed drives

– VARIBLOC® wide V-belt variable speed geared motors
– VARIMOT® friction disc variable speed geared motors
• Explosion-proof drives in accordance with ATEX 100a
• Services
– Technical consultation
– Application software
– Training seminars
– Comprehensive technical documentation
– Worldwide customer support and service

Drive System for Decentralized Installation 2
1
2.2 Drive System for Decentralized Installation
The drive system for decentral installation is based on MOVIMOT® geared motors and 2
MOVI-SWITCH®. Field distributors bus interfaces, and pre-fabricated cables round off
the product range.
Decentral Drive Decentral drive units are characterized by: 3
Units • Integration of electronics and mechanics (mechatronics)
• Integrated full protection for motor and electronics 4
• Uniform interface for control and installation
• Rugged and compact design 5
• Service-friendly connector technology.
Optimum combination of components ensures that all requirements of the conveyor 6
technology sector are met and uniform wiring topology is implemented.
7
Overview of
Components for
Decentral 8
Installation
9
MLU..A MLG..A MBG11A MWA21A MDG11A
10
VITOO
MO
LS
MFG11A 11
MLK11A
MOVIMOT ® MF...
MWS21A
12
13
14
DT/DV.../IS DT/DV.../ASA4 DT/DV.../APG1
15
MOVI-SWITCH ®
16
MF.../Z.3 MF.../Z.6. MF.../MM.../Z.8. 17

05133AXX
MLU..A
MLG..A
24 V supply
Speed control module and 24 V
DT/DV.../IS AC motor with integrated
IS plug connector
18
supply DT/DV.../ASA4 AC motor with ASA4 plug connector
MBG11A Speed control module DT/DV.../APG4 AC motor with APG4 plug connector
MWA21A Setpoint converter MF.../Z.3. Field distributor 19
MDG11A Diagnostic unit MF.../Z.6. Field distributor with maintenance switch
MLK11A AS-i binary slave MF.../MM.../Z.8. Field distributor with maintenance switch
MF.. Fieldbus interfaces and integrated MOVIMOT® inverter
MFG11A Speed control module in bus 20
housing (Handheld terminal)
MWS21A Fieldbus diagnostics kit
21
22
2 Drive System for Decentralized Installation
MOVIMOT® MOVIMOT® is the synthesis of an individual geared motor and a perfectly tuned
frequency inverter. The compact, infinitely variable-speed drive requires only slightly
more space than the standard geared motor. All requisite control, protection, and
monitoring functions are integrated in the frequency inverter.
MOVIMOT® enables system drives with two directions of rotation, single-mode
positioning with two speeds, selectable acceleration, delay and continuous speed
adjustment.
03027BXX
MOVI-SWITCH® The second drive unit for decentral installation is the geared motor MOVI-SWITCH® with
integrated electronic switching and protection features. The drive features fixed speed
and one direction of rotation with an integrated electronic star point switching the motor
on or off via 24 V control signal. It does not require any control cabinet space and is
protected against thermal overload and short-circuit by integrated electronics.
03026AXX

Drive System for Decentralized Installation 2
1
Energy Systems for plant-specific power supply with optimum fieldbus connection of a machine
Distribution and module are offered also.
Data Link 2
Fieldbus Interfaces The fieldbus interfaces are based on a connection module and plug-in bus electronics.
Fieldbus interfaces are available for common fieldbuses such as PROFIBUS DP, 3
InterBus, and DeviceNet and CANopen. Besides allowing for bus connection of
MOVIMOT® or MOVI-SWITCH® drive units, the fieldbus interfaces also allow the
connection of sensors and actuators to the bus. Depending on the configuration, the 4
connection is implemented via terminals or standardized M12 connectors. The
connections are equipped with LEDs and a diagnostics interface that provide a local
visual indication of unit status and data communication on the bus for service purposes. 5
10
11
04323AXX
12
Field Distributor Field distributors streamline the connections of the drives with supply voltage, control
supply voltage and fieldbus. They are based on bus interface technology with additional 13
connection technology for the supply voltage.
The field distributors reduce project planning expenses, installation and commissioning 14
time to a minimum.
15
16
17
18
19
20
04324AXX
21
22
2 Drive System for Decentralized Installation
Pre-fabricated The system is rounded off by customized hybrid cables that combine the power supply,
System Cables control supply voltage and communications line in one sheath. EMC problems are
prevented by using optimal shielding and impedance. In addition, this type of cable
reduces the number of cable entries and associated installation costs.
Commissioning time and later maintenance expenses are also reduced through
increased use of connection systems that feature pre-fabricated cables. The totality of
all components and corresponding connection systems provides system engineers with
an optimal system for straightforward implementation of flexible and cost-efficient
systems.
04325AXX

kVA n
MOVIMOT® Nameplates, Type Designation f 3
i
P Hz
1
3 Technical Data and Dimension Drawings
3.1 MOVIMOT® Nameplates, Type Designation 2
Motor Nameplate
(Example) 3
SEW-EURODRIVE Bruchsal / Germany 4
Typ KA77 DT 90L4 BMG MM15 MLU 3~ IEC 34
Nr. 010012345.6.00.00 IM B3
KW 1,5 / 50 HZ cosϕ 0,99
50Hz V 380-500 A 3,50 5
60Hz V 380-500 A 3,50
r/min 22/1400 IP 54 Kl F
Bremse V 230 Gleichrichter
kg 73 Ma 665
Nm 20
Nm i 64,75 :1 6
Schmierstoff Made in Germany 184103 3.14
7
05113AXX
KA 77 DT 90L4 BMG/MM15/MLU 8
1)
Additional feature Inverter
9
MOVITRAC® frequency inverter
10
Additional feature Motor (brake)
Motor size, number of poles 11
Motor series 12
Gear unit size2)
13
Gear unit series2)
14
1) only factory-installed options are listed on the nameplate.
2) Detailed information about geared motor combinations can be found in the catalog "MOVIMOT Geared
Motors" 15
16
MLU..
MM15
17
18
19
20
KA77 DT 90L4BMG
21
04145BXX
22
kVA n
3 f MOVIMOT® Nameplates, Type Designation
i
P Hz
Inverter
Nameplate
(Example)
50457AXX
MM 15 B – 503 – 00
Design (00 = Standard)
Connection type (3 = 3-phase)
Connection voltage
(50 = 380...500 VAC)
(23 = 200...240 VAC)
Version B
Motor power (15 = 1.5 kW)
MOVIMOT® series

kVA n
MOVIMOT® Motor Data for IEC Configuration f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.2 MOVIMOT® Motor Data for IEC Configuration
2
8
MM03 - MM15 MM20 - MM30
04005AXX
9
280 – 1400 1/min 댴 3 x 380 – 500 V (400 V) 10

Type Pn Mn nn In1 cosϕ Jmot MBmax m
[kW] [Nm] [1/min] [A] -4
[10 kgm ] 2 -4
[10 kgm ] 2
[Nm] [kg] [kg] 11
without with brake
brake
DT71D4/.../MM03 0.37 2.52 1400 1.3 0.99 4.61 5.51 5 8.6 11.4 12
DT80K4/.../MM05 0.55 3.75 1400 1.6 0.99 6.55 7.45 10 11.5 14.2
DT80N4/.../MM07 0.75 5.1 1400 1.9 0.99 8.7 9.6 10 13.1 15.8 13
DT90S4/.../MM11 1.1 7.5 1400 2.4 0.99 25 30.4 20 17.6 27.5
DT90L4/.../MM15 1.5 10.2 1400 3.5 0.99 34 39.4 20 19.6 29.5
DV100M4/.../MM22 2.2 15.0 1400 5.0 0.99 53 59 40 30.5 40.5
14
DV100L4/.../MM30 3.0 20.5 1400 6.7 0.99 65 71 40 33 43
15
290 – 2900 1/min 쑶 3 x 380 – 500 V (400 V)
Type Pn Mn nn In1 cos ϕ Jmot MBmax m
16
[kW] [Nm] [1/min] [A] [10-4 kgm2] [10-4 kgm2] [Nm] [kg] [kg]
without with brake 17
brake
DT71D4/.../MM05 0.55 1.81 2900 1.6 0.99 4.61 5.51 5 8.6 11.4
DT80K4/.../MM07 0.75 2.47 2900 1.9 0.99 6.55 7.45 10 11.5 14.2 18
DT80N4/.../MM11 1.1 3.62 2900 2.4 0.99 8.7 9.6 10 13.1 15.8
DT90S4/.../MM15 1.5 4.95 2900 3.5 0.99 25 30.4 20 17.6 27.5 19
DT90L4/.../MM22 2.2 7.25 2900 5.0 0.99 34 39.4 20 21.0 31.0
DV100M4/.../MM30 3.0 9.9 2900 6.7 0.99 53 59 40 30.5 40.5
20
Thermal classification F standard for the drives 21
22
kVA n
3 f MOVIMOT® Motor Data for UL Configuration (Motor according to
i NEMA)
P Hz
3.3 MOVIMOT® Motor Data for UL Configuration (Motor according to NEMA)
MM03 - MM15 (380 - 500 V) MM22 - MM30 (380 - 500 V)

MM03 - MM07 (200 - 240 V) MM11 - MM22 (200 - 240 V)
04007AXX
280 – 1700 1/min 댴 3 x 380 – 500 V (460 V)

Type Pn Pn Mn nn In1 cos ϕ Jmot MBmax m
[HP] [kW] [Nm] [1/min] [A] [10-4 kgm2] [10-4 kgm2] [Nm] [kg] [kg]
without brake with brake
DT71D4/.../MM03 0.5 0.37 2.08 1700 1.1 0.99 4.61 5.51 5 8.6 11.4
DT80K4/.../MM05 0.75 0.55 3.09 1700 1.4 0.99 6.55 7.45 10 11.5 14.2
DT80N4/.../MM07 1 0.75 4.2 1700 1.7 0.99 8.7 9.6 10 13.1 15.8
DT90S4/.../MM11 1.5 1.1 6.2 1700 2.1 0.99 25 30.4 20 17.6 27.5
DT90L4/.../MM15 2 1.5 8.4 1700 3 0.99 34 39.4 20 19.6 29.5
DT100M4/.../MM22 3 2.2 12.4 1700 4.3 0.99 53 59 40 30.5 40.5
DT100L4/.../MM30 5 3.7 20.7 1700 5.8 0.99 65 71 40 33 43
280 – 1700 1/min 댴댴 3 x 200 – 240 V (230 V)

Type Pn Pn Mn nn In1 cos ϕ Jmot MBmax m
[HP] [kW] [Nm] [1/min] [A] [10-4 kgm2] [10-4 kgm2] [Nm] [kg] [kg]
without brake with brake
DT71D4/.../MM03 0.5 0.37 2.08 1700 2.2 0.99 4.61 5.51 5 8.6 11.4
DT80K4/.../MM05 0.75 0.55 3.09 1700 2.9 0.99 6.55 7.45 10 11.5 14.2
DT80N4/.../MM07 1 0.75 4.2 1700 3.5 0.99 8.7 9.6 10 13.1 15.8
DT90S4/.../MM11 1.5 1.1 6.2 1700 4.7 0.99 25 30.4 20 19.0 29.0
DT90L4/.../MM15 2 1.5 8.4 1700 6.2 0.99 34 39.4 20 21.0 31.0
DT100M4/.../MM22 3 2.2 12.4 1700 8.2 0.99 53 59 40 30.5 40.5
Thermal classification F standard for the drives

kVA n
MOVIMOT® Inverter Data f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.4 MOVIMOT® Inverter Data
IEC configuration with connection voltages of 380...500 VAC 2
MOVIMOT® Type MM 03B- MM 05B- MM 07B- MM 11B- MM 15B- MM 22B- MM 30B-
503-00 503-00 503-00 503-00 503-00 503-00 503-00
3
Part number 823 022 6 823 023 4 823 024 2 823 025 0 823 026 9 822 953 8 822 954 6
Apparent output power at SN 1.1 kVA 1.4 kVA 1.8 kVA 2.2 kVA 2.8 kVA 3.8 kVA 5.1 kVA
Vin = 380...500 VAC 4
Connection voltages Vin 3 x 380 VAC / 400 VAC /415 VAC /460 VAC /500 VAC
Permitted range Vin = 380 VAC -10 % ... 500 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency fin 50 Hz ... 60 Hz ± 10% 5
Supply voltage rated current Iin 1.3 AAC 1.6 AAC 1.9 AAC 2.4 AAC 3.5 AAC 5.0 AAC 6.7 AAC
(at Vin =400 VAC)
6
Output voltage Voutp 0...Vin
Output frequency foutp 2...100 Hz
Resolution
Operating point
0.01 Hz
400 V at 50 Hz / 100 Hz
7
Rated output current IN 1.6 AAC 2.0 AAC 2.5 AAC 3.2 AAC 4.0 AAC 5.5 AAC 7.3 AAC
Motor power PMot 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW 8
PWM frequency 41) / 8 / 12 / 162) kHz
Current limit Imax Motor operating mode: 160 % at 댴, 150 % at 쑶 9
regenerative mode:160 % at 댴, 150 % at 쑶
External braking resistor Rmin 200 Ω 100 Ω
Interference immunity Meets EN 61800-3 10
Interference Meets EN 61800–3 and class A limit to EN 55011 and EN 55014
Ambient temperature ϑamb -25° C...40 °C (PN reduction: 3 % IN per K up to max. 60 °C)
Climatic category 3 K3
11
Enclosure IP54, IP55, IP65 (optional, to be specified with order)
(motor-dependent)
12
Operating mode DB (EN 60149-1-1 and 1-3)
Type of cooling (DIN 41 751) Convection cooling
Altitude h ≤ 1000 m (PN reduction: 1 % per 100 m starting at an altitude of 1000 m, see also the 13
section on "Electrical Installation – Installation Instructions")
External electronics supply Tl. 24 V V = +24 V ± 25 %, EN61131-2, residual ripple max. 13 %
IE ≤ 250 mA (typ. 180 mA at 24V) 14
Starting current: 1 A
3 binary inputs Potential-free via opto-coupler, PLC-compatible (EN 61131-2)
Ri ≈ 3.0 kW, IE ≈ 10 mA, sampling time ≤ 5 ms 15
Signal level +13 V...+30 V = "1" = contact closed
-3 V...+5 V = "0" = contact open
Control functions Tl. R CW/Stop
16
Tl. L CCW/Stop
Tl. f1/f2 "0" = setpoint 1 / "1" = setpoint 2
Output relays Tl. K1a Response time ≤ 10 ms
17
Contact data Tl. K1b 24 VDC / 0.6 ADC / DC11 according to IEC 337-1
Signaling function Contactor for ready signal
18
Contact closed:
– with applied voltage (24 V + supply)
– if no fault was detected
– after self-test phase concluded (after switch-on)
19
Serial interface Tl. RS + RS-485 (see page 20)
Tl. RS - 20
1) Factory setting
2) 16 kHz PWM frequency (low-noise): If DIP-SWITCH S1/7 = ON, the devices operate with 16 kHz PWM frequency (low-noise) and
incrementally switch back to a lower clock frequency as a function of the heat sink temperature. 21
22
kVA n
3 f MOVIMOT® Inverter Data
i
P Hz
UL configuration with connection voltages of 380 – 500 VAC

MOVIMOT® Type MM 03B- MM 05B- MM 07B- MM 11B- MM 15B- MM 22B- MM 30B-
503-00 503-00 503-00 503-00 503-00 503-00 503-00
Part number 823 022 6 823 023 4 823 024 2 823 025 0 823 026 9 822 953 8 822 954 6
Apparent output power at SN 1.1 kVA 1.4 kVA 1.8 kVA 2.2 kVA 2.8 kVA 3.8 kVA 5.1 kVA
Vin = 380 – 500 VAC
Connection voltages Vin 3 x 380 VAC / 400 VAC / 415 VAC / 460 VAC / 500 VAC
Permitted range Vin = 380 VAC -10 % ... 500 VAC +10 %
Supply frequency fin 50 Hz – 60 Hz ± 10 %
Supply voltage rated current Iin 1.1 AAC 1.4 AAC 1.7 AAC 2.1 AAC 3.0 AAC 4.3 AAC 5.8 AAC
(at Vin = 460 VAC)
Resolution 0.01 Hz
Operating point 460 V at 60 Hz
Motor power PMot 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.7 kW
0.5 HP 0.75 HP 1.0 HP 1.5 HP 2 HP 3.0 HP 5 HP
PWM frequency 41) / 8 / 12 / 162) kHz
Current limit Imax Motor operating mode:160 % at 댴
Regenerative mode:160 % at 댴
Interference immunity Meets EN 61800-3
Interference Meets EN 61800–3 and class A limit to EN 55011 and EN 55014
Ambient temperature ϑamb -25 °C...40 °C (PN reduction: 3 % IN per K up to max. 60 °C)
Enclosure IP54, IP55, IP65 (optional, to be specified with order)
(motor-dependent)
Altitude h ≤ 1000 m (PN reduction: 1% per 100 m starting at an altitude of 1000 m, see also the
section on "Electrical Installation – Installation Instructions")
External electronics supply Tl. 24 V V = +24 V ± 25 %, EN 61131-2, residual ripple max. 13 %
IE ≤ 250 mA (typ. 180 mA at 24 V)
Starting current: 1 A
Ri ≈ 3.0 kW, IE ≈ 10 mA, sampling time ≤ 5 ms
Signal level +13 V...+30 V = "1" = contact closed
Tl. L CCW/Stop
Contact data Tl. K1b 24 VDC / 0.6 ADC / DC11 according to IEC 337-1
Contact closed:
Tl. RS -
1) Factory setting
incrementally switch back to a lower clock frequency as a function of the heat sink temperature.

kVA n
MOVIMOT® Inverter Data f 3
i
P Hz
1
UL configuration with connection voltages of 200 – 240 VAC
MOVIMOT® Type MM 03B- MM 05B- MM 07B- MM 11B- MM 15B- MM 22B-
233-00 233-00 233-00 233-00 233-00 233-00
2
Part number 823 259 8 823 260 1 823 261 X 823 262 8 823 263 6 823 264 4
Apparent output power at SN 1.0 kVA 1.3 kVA 1.7 kVA 2.0 kVA 2.9 kVA 3.4 kVA 3
Vsupply = 200 – 240 VAC
Connection voltages Vin 3 x 200 VAC / 230 VAC / 240 VAC
Permitted range Vin = 200 VAC -10 % ... 240 VAC +10 % 4
Supply frequency fin 50 Hz – 60 Hz ± 10 %
Supply voltage rated current Iin 2.2 AAC 2.9 AAC 3.5 AAC 4.7 AAC 6.2 AAC 8.2 AAC
(at Vin = 230 VAC) 5
Output frequency
Resolution
foutp 2...100 Hz
0.01Hz
6
Operating point 230 V at 60 Hz
Rated output current IN 2.5 AAC 3.3 AAC 4.2 AAC 5.7 AAC 6.9 AAC 9.0 AAC 7
Motor power PMot 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW
0.5 HP 0.75 HP 1.0 HP 1.5 HP 2 HP 3.0 HP
PWM frequency 41) / 8 / 12 / 162) kHz 8
Current limit Imax Motor operating mode:160 % at 댴댴
Regenerative mode:160 % at 댴댴
External braking resistor Rmin 27 Ω
9
Interference Meets EN 61800–3 and class A limit to EN 55011 and EN 55014 10
Ambient temperature ϑamb -25 °C...40 °C (PN reduction: 3 % IN per K up to max. 60 °C)
Enclosure IP54, IP55, IP65 (optional, to be specified with order) 11
(motor-dependent)
12
Altitude h ≤ 1000 m (PN reduction: 1 % per 100 m starting at an altitude of 1000 m, see also the
section on "Electrical Installation – Installation Instructions") 13
External electronics supply Tl. 24 V V = +24 V ± 25 %, EN61131-2, residual ripple max. 13 %
IE ≤ 250 mA (typ. 180 mA at 24 V)
Starting current: 1 A 14
Ri ≈ 3.0 kW, IE ≈ 10 mA, sampling time ≤ 5 ms
Signal level +13 V...+30 V = "1" = contact closed 15
Tl. L CCW/Stop 16
Contact data Tl. K1b 24 VDC / 0.6 ADC / DC11 according to IEC 337-1 17
Contact closed:
18
19
Tl. RS -
1) Factory setting 20
21
22
kVA n
3 f Integrated RS-485 Interface
i
P Hz
3.5 Integrated RS-485 Interface
RS-485 interface
Standard RS-485 to EIA standard (with integrated dynamic terminating resistor)
Baud rate 9,600 baud
31,250 baud (in connection with fieldbus interfaces MF..)
Start bits 1 start bit
Stop bits 1 stop bit
Data bits 8 data bits
Parity 1 parity bit, supplementing to even parity
Data direction Unidirectional
Operating Asynchronous, half-duplex
mode
Timeout 1s
interval
Cable length max. 200 m at RS-485 operation with 9,600 baud
max. 30 m with transmission rate: 31,250 baud 1))
Number of • Max. 32 stations (1 bus master2) + 31 MOVIMOT®) broadcast and group addresses are
stations possible
• 15 MOVIMOT® individually addressable
1) Transmission rate 31,250 baud is automatically detected when operating with fieldbus interface MF…
2) External controller or MBG11A, MWA21A or MLG..A option

kVA n
4Q Operation in Motors with Mechanical Brake f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.6 4Q Operation in Motors with Mechanical Brake
• The brake coil is used as a braking resistor in 4Q operation. 2
• No external braking resistor may be connected.
• Braking voltage is generated inside the unit and, therefore, independently of supply 3
voltage.
Resistance and
4
Assignment of
Motor Brake Resistance of brake coil1)
Brake Coil
MOVIMOT® with input voltage MOVIMOT® with input voltage
5
380 – 500 VAC 200 – 240 VAC
DT71 BMG05 277 Ω (230 V) 69.6 Ω (110 V) 6
DT80 BMG1 248 Ω (230 V) 62.2 Ω (110 V)
DT90 BMG2 216 Ω (230 V) / 54.2 Ω (110 V) 54.2 Ω (110 V)
DV100/DT100 BMG4 43.5 Ω (110 V) 27.3 Ω (88 V)
7
1) Nominal value measured between red (terminal 13) and blue (terminal 15) connections at 20°C,
temperature-dependent fluctuations in the range of -25% / +40 % are possible. 8
Regenerative MOVIMOT® with input voltage 380 – 500 VAC 9

Load Capacity of
Brake Coil 10
20.000
[J] (1)
11
15.000
12
(2)
10.000 13
(3)
14
5.000 (4)
15
0 16
10 100 1.000 10.000
[c/h] 17
03509BXX
[c/h] Cycles per hour 18

(1) BMG2/BMG4 (110 V)
(2) BMG2 (230 V)
(3) BMG1 (230 V)
(4) BMG05 (230 V) 19
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f 4Q Operation in Motors with Mechanical Brake
i
P Hz
MOVIMOT® with input voltage 200 – 240 VAC
20.000 (1)
[J]
15.000
10.000
(2)
(3)
5.000
0
1 10 100 1.000 10.000
[c/h]
03508BXX
[c/h] Cycles per hour

(1) BMG2 (110 V), BMG4 (88 V)
(2) BMG1 (110 V)
(3) BMG05 (110 V)

kVA n
4Q Operation with Integrated BW.. Braking Resistor f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.7 4Q Operation with Integrated BW.. Braking Resistor
• Braking resistor is integrated as standard in the terminal box of MOVIMOT® for 2
motors without mechanical brake.
• 4Q operation is recommended for applications with low regenerative energy.
3
• The resistor is self-protecting (reversible) against regenerative overload by abruptly
going to high resistance and no longer accepting any more energy.
• The inverter then switches off and signals an overvoltage fault (fault code 07). 4
Assignment of 5
Internal Braking
MOVIMOT® MOVIMOT® type Braking resistor
Resistors
with input voltage MM03..MM15 BW1 6
380–500 VAC
MM22..MM30 BW2
with input voltage
200–240 VAC
MM03..MM07 BW3 7
MM11..MM22 BW4
8
Regenerative
Load Capacity of
Braking BW2 BW1
9
Resistors BW4 BW3
1200 600
10
[J] (1)
1000 500 11
800 400 (2) 12

(3)
600 300 13
400 200 14
200 100 15
0 0
0 10 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
16
[c/h]
04842AXX 17
(1) Braking ramp 10 s
(2)
(3)
Braking ramp 4 s
Braking ramp 0.2 s
18
[c/h] Cycles per hour
19
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f Dimension Sheet Foot-Mounted MOVIMOT®
i
P Hz
3.8 Dimension Sheet Foot-Mounted MOVIMOT®
(5)
04828BXX
(1) 3 x 400 VAC DT71D DT80.. DT90..MM1. DT90L MM22 DV100M DV100L
(2) 3 x 230 VAC DT71D DT80.. – DT90.. DV100M –
a (B) 90 100 125 (4) 125 (4) 140 140
b (A) 112 125 140 140 160 160
c (HA) 5 10 8 8 12 12
e (BB) 115 125 152 152 170 170
f (AB 144 149 176 176 188 188
(3)
G (AC) 145 145 197 (3) 197 (3) 197 197
G1 (AD) 165 165 198 199 201 201
G2 110 110 110 117 117 117
h (H) 71 80 90 90 100 100
i (C+E) 75 90 106 106 123 123
k (L) 232 292 323 323 371 401
m (BA) 32 28 32 32 35 35
n (AA) 31 33 32 32 38 38
s (K) 7 9 9 9 12 12
st 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5
2x M16x1.5 2x M16x1.5 2x M16x1.5 4x M16x1.5 4x M16x1.5 4x M16x1.5
w1 (C) 45 50 56 56 63 63
xB 64 64 85 85 85 85
x 182 182 182 230 230 230
y 140 140 140 175 175 175
x9 –3 –3 11.5 –2 –2 –2
d (D) 14 19 24 24 28 28
l (E) 30 40 50 50 60 60
l11 (E-EB-
4 4 5 5 5 5
ED)
l12 (EB) 22 32 40 40 50 50
t (GA) 16 21.5 27 27 31 31
u (F) 5 6 8 8 8 8
(1) For drives with connection voltages of 380 – 500 VAC

(3) Fan cover flattened at bottom
(4) Deviates from IEC
(5) Keep air intake open

kVA n
Dimension Sheet Flange-Mounted MOVIMOT® f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.9 Dimension Sheet Flange-Mounted MOVIMOT®
2
(3) 7
10
04831BXX
(1) 3 x 400 VAC DFT71D DFT80.. DFT90..MM1. DFT90L MM22 DFV100M DFV100L
11
(2) 3 x 230 VAC DFT71D DFT80.. – DFT90.. DFV100M –
a1 (P) 160 160 200 200 250 200 250 200 250 200 250
12
b1 (N) 110 110 130 130 180 130 180 130 180 130 180
c1 (LA) 10 10 12 12 15 12 15 12 15 12 15
e1 (M) 130 130 165 165 215 165 215 165 215 165 215 13
f1 (T) 3.5 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4 3.5 4 3.5 4
Fig. 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2
G (AC) 145 145 197 197 197 197 14
G1 (AD) 165 165 198 199 201 201
G2 110 110 110 117 117 117
i2 (R+E) 30 40 50 66 50 66 60 60
15
k (LB+R+E) 232 292 323 323 371 401
KM (LB) 202 252 273 257 273 247 311 341
16
s1 (S) 9 11 11 14 11 14 11 14 11 14
st 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5
2x M16x1.5 2x M16x1.5 2x M16x1.5 4x M16x1.5 4x M16x1.5 4x M16x1.5
17
xB 64 64 85 85 85 85
x 182 182 182 230 230 230
y 140 140 140 175 175 175 18
x9 –3 –3 11.5 –2 –2 –2
d (D) 14 19 24 24 28 28
l (E) 30 40 50 50 60 60 19
l11 (E-EB-ED) 4 4 5 5 5 5
l12 (EB) 22 32 40 40 50 50
t (GA) 16 21.5 27 27 31 31
20
u (F) 5 6 8 8 8 8
(1) For drives with connection voltages of 380 – 500 VAC 21

(3) Keep air intake open
22
kVA n
3 f MOVIMOT® Options
i
P Hz
3.10 MOVIMOT® Options

24VDC Power The MLU..A option is mounted in a screwed cable gland of MOVIMOT® and allows for
Supply MLU..A operating a MOVIMOT® including one option with a maximum current requirement of 70
mA (MBG11A, MWA21A) without external 24 V auxiliary supply.
Technical Data
For MOVIMOT® with connection For MOVIMOT® with connection
voltages of 380 – 500 VAC voltages of 200 – 240 VAC
Option MLU11A MLU21A
Part number 823 383 7 823 387 X
Input voltage 380... 500 VAC ± 10 % 200... 240 VAC ± 10 %
Output voltage 24 VDC ± 25 % 24 VDC ± 25 %
Output power max. 6 W max. 6 W
Enclosure IP 65 IP 65
Ambient temperature -25...60 °C -25...60 °C
40
L1 (YE MLU11A / BN MLU21A)

L2 (YE MLU11A / BN MLU21A)
24 (RD)
107
(BU )
60
03194BXX

kVA n
MOVIMOT® Options f 3
i
P Hz
1
Setpoint Adjuster The MLG..A option is mounted in a screwed cable gland of MOVIMOT® and allows for
with 24 VDC adjusting the drive speed in a range from -100 % ... +100 % fa max (potentiometer f1) and
Power Supply for supplying the inverter with 24 VDC auxiliary voltage. 2
MLG..A
Technical Data 3
For MOVIMOT® with connection For MOVIMOT® with connection
voltages of 380 – 500 VAC voltages of 200 – 240 VAC
4
Option MLG11A MLG21A
Part number 823 384 5 823 388 8
Input voltage 380... 500 VAC ± 10 % 200... 240 VAC ± 10 %
5
Output voltage 24 VDC ± 25 % 24 VDC ± 25 %
Output power max. 6 W max. 6 W 6
Setpoint resolution 1% 1%
Serial interface1) RS-485 for connecting a MOVIMOT® inverter
7
Enclosure IP 65 IP 65
Ambient temperature -25...60 °C -25...60 °C
1) With integrated dynamic terminating resistor
8
40 9
10
L1 (YE MLG11A / BN MLG21A)

11
L2 (YE MLG11A / BN MLG21A)
24V (RD)
(BU) 12
RS+ (OG)
107
RS- (GN)
13
14
15
60
16
03195BXX
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Setpoint Adjuster • Setpoint adjuster MBG11A has two buttons and a display. They allow remote speed
MBG11A adjustment in the range from -100 %… +100 % fmax (potentiometer f1).
• Up to 31 MOVIMOT® inverters can be controlled at the same time (broadcasting).
Technical Data
Option MBG11A
Part number 822 547 8
Input voltage 24 VDC ± 25 %
Current requirements approx. 70 mA
Setpoint resolution 1%
Serial interface1) RS-485 for connection of up to 31 MOVIMOT® inverters
(max. 200 m, 9,600 baud)
Enclosure IP 65
Ambient temperature -15...60 °C
1) with integrated dynamic terminating resistor
70
38
(1) (1)
MBG11A
88 mm
60 mm
(2) (2)
28 mm
M4
90
(1) (1)
RS+
24V
RS-
56 mm
68 mm
03196BXX
(1) drilled holes on the rear

(2) retaining openings for M4 screws

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
Setpoint • Setpoint converter MWA21A converts an analog setpoint and control signals in an
Converter RS-485 protocol.
MWA21A • This allows for remote control of MOVIMOT® from the switch cabinet. 2
• Up to 31 MOVIMOT® inverters can be controlled at the same time (broadcasting).
3
Technical Data
Option MWA21A
4
Input voltage 24 VDC ± 25 % 5
Serial interface1) RS-485 for connection of up to 31 MOVIMOT® inverters
(max. 200 m, 9,600 baud)
6
unidirectional communication
Cycle time: 100 ms
Analog input 0...10 V / 2...10 V, Ri ≈ 12 kΩ 7
0...20 mA / 4...20 mA, Ri ≈ 22 Ω
Setpoint resolution of the analog input 8 bit (± 1 bit)
8
Signal level of binary inputs +13 V ...+30 V = “1”
- 3 V ...+5 V = “0”
Enclosure IP 20 9
1) With integrated dynamic terminating resistor
10
11
12
MWA21A
1 24V 13
2 24V
75
3
4 R
5 L 14
6 10V
7 +
8 -
9 15
10
11 RS+
12 RS-
16
74
17
22,
5
03197AXX
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Diagnostic Unit The unit shows operating status, output current, terminal status and, in case of a fault
MDG11A condition, the fault code of a MOVIMOT®. The selection is performed using the
button, the other arrow key has no function.
Technical Data
Option MDG11A
Serial interface RS-485 for connection of one MOVIMOT® inverter with
control via terminals
Enclosure IP 65
70
38
MDG11A
90
RS+
24V
RS-
03607AXX

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
MOVIMOT® Plug
Connectors
2
6
../AVT1 ../ASA3
04149BXX
7
The following optional plug connectors are available for MOVIMOT®:
8
Plug connector SEW order Manufacturer designation
designation Description
For power ASA3 Harting Han® 10 ES pin insert
9
(extension housing with 2 clips)
For RS-485 AVT1 Round plug connector M12 x 1
4-wire plug (male), B-coded 10
Please observe: The corresponding female connectors are not included in the
shipment. 11
Possible • MM.../ASA3 12
Combinations • MM.../AVT1
• MM.../ASA3/AVT1 13
Connector Pin 14
Assignment
15
MOVIMOT ® 16
24V RS+ RS- L1 L2 L3
17
1 2 3 4 5
18
4 3
1 2
19
6 7 8 9 10
AVT1
ASA3 20
05124AXX
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Pre-fabricated The pre-fabricated cable with socket is used for connecting MOVIMOT® with AVT1 plug
Cables for AVT1 connector and MF.../Z.1. fieldbus interfaces or a commercially available controller (RS-
Plug Connector 485 master).
44
∅ 5.5
(1) (2)
04073BXX
(1) Nameplate
(2) Shielded cap nut with vibration resistance
Cable quality Part number
Helu cable SUPER-PAAR-TRONIC-C-PUR 5 meters: 0815 592 5
10 meters: 0815 593 3
Socket
Assignment
PIN Core color Assignment
1 brown +24 V
2 yellow RS-
1 2
3 white GND
4 3
4 green RS+
04074AXX Shield on cap nut

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
Dimension Sheet
ASA3, AVT1 Plug
Connector 54 2
U X9
3
ASA3
AVT1 4
V
G1
W
5
X
8
2
9
10
Y
11
46
x 12
04066BXX
G1 W X9 X Y U V 13
DFT71..BMG/MM.. 165 113 -3 182 140 40 40
DFT80..BMG/MM.. 165 113 -3 182 140 40 40 14
DFT90..BMG/MM.. 198 146 11.5 182 140 40 40
DFV100..BMG/MM.. 201 148 -2 230 175 56 38.5
15
16
Possible Plug The following positions are possible for the ASA3 and AVT1 plug connectors:
Connector Plug connector ASA3 AVT1 ASA3 + AVT1
Positions 2 17
X (normal) + X (normal)
X (normal) X (normal)
Possible 2+2
positions
2 2
X (normal) + 2 18
2 + X (normal)
19
20
x
05024AXX
21
22
kVA n
3 f MOVIMOT® with Factory-Installed Options
i
P Hz
3.11 MOVIMOT® with Factory-Installed Options

The following options can be installed upon request (assembled and wired for
operation):
• Local 24 VDC supply (MLU..A)
• Local setpoint adjuster with 24 VDC supply (MLG..A)
• AS-i binary slave (MLK11A)
• Profibus (MFP..) fieldbus interface
• InterBus (MFI..) fieldbus interface
• DeviceNet (MFD..) fieldbus interface
• CANopen (MFO..) fieldbus interface
• Hybrid cable for connection between MF.../Z.3. or MF../.6. field distributor and
MOVIMOT®
– KPFA 1.5 m
– KPFB 3m
Important The options can be installed in the following positions:

Ordering • Position "2"
Information
• Position "X" (normal)
50377AXX
An ordering example can be found in the section "MOVIMOT® Nameplates, Type

Designations" on page 13.

kVA n
MOVIMOT® Retrofit Sets f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.12 MOVIMOT® Retrofit Sets
In principle it is recommended to purchase factory pre-fabricated MOVIMOT® systems. 2
In exceptional cases, a retrofitting may also be done by the customer.
Requirement: Only the following (brake) motors may be retrofitted:
3
• Motor nominal voltage 220 – 240/380 – 415 VAC, 50 Hz
• Brake nominal voltage 230 VAC with MM03 – 15
4
110 VAC with MM22/30
No retrofit sets are available for UL devices.
5
1400 1/min
6
Power / kW Motor + Retrofit set part number = MOVIMOT®
0.37 DT71 D4 826 614 X (MM03, 댴) DT71 D4/.../MM03
0.55 DT80 K4 826 615 8 (MM05, 댴) DT80 K4/.../MM05
7
0.75 DT80 N4 826 616 6 (MM07, 댴) DT80 N4/.../MM07
1.1 DT90 S4 826 617 4 (MM11, 댴) DT90 S4/.../MM11 8
1.5 DT90 L4 826 618 2 (MM15, 댴) DT90 L4/.../MM15
2.2 DV100 M4 826 619 0 (MM22, 댴) DV100 M4/.../MM22
9
3.0 DV100 L4 826 620 4 (MM30, 댴) DV100 L4/.../MM30
10
2900 1/min
11
Power / kW Motor + Retrofit set part number = MOVIMOT®
0.37 – – –
12
0.55 DT71 D4 826 621 2 (MM05, 쑶) DT71 D4/.../MM05
0.75 DT80 K4 826 622 0 (MM07, 쑶) DT80 K4/.../MM07
1.1 DT80 N4 826 623 9 (MM11, 쑶) DT80 N4/.../MM11 13
1.5 DT90 S4 826 624 7 (MM15, 쑶) DT90 S4/.../MM15
2.2 DT90 L4 826 625 5 (MM22, 쑶) DT90 L4/.../MM22 14
3.0 DV100 M4 826 626 3 (MM30, 쑶) DV100 M4/.../MM30
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f MOVIMOT® Retrofit Sets
i
P Hz
Scope of Delivery Scope of delivery of retrofit set MM03 – MM15 (Parts C – I are supplied assembled):
MOVIMOT®
Retrofit Sets
A
D
I
B
C H
F H
01082DXX
A Terminal box gasket D Connection cable with right-angle plug G 4 screws

B 4 screws E Cover with inverter H 2 screws
C Terminal box F Terminal board I PE screws
Scope of delivery of retrofit set MM22 – MM30 (Parts C – I are supplied assembled):
C
B H
F
H
G
02661BXX
A Terminal box gasket E Cover with inverter G 4 screws

B 4 screws F Terminal board with connection cable H 2 screws
C Terminal box I PE screws

kVA n
MOVI-SWITCH® Type Designation and Combination Options f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.13 MOVI-SWITCH® Type Designation and Combination Options
2
9
03168AXX
10
Sample Type
Designation
R 27 DT 71D4 /BMG /TF /Z /MSW /MLK 11
With factory installed MLK11A option
12
MOVI-SWITCH®
13
Motor option Heavy fan
Motor option Thermistor sensor

14
(standard with MOVI-SWITCH®)
Motor option Brake

15
Motor size and number of poles 16

Motor series
17
Gear unit size1)
18
Gear unit series1)
19
1) Detailed information about geared motor combinations can be found in the catalog "Geared Motors"
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f MOVI-SWITCH® Operating Principle
i
P Hz
Possible The following MOVI-SWITCH® AC motors and AC brake motors can be combined with
Combinations all possible types of gear units, designs, and configurations in accordance with the
selection tables in the "Geared Motors" catalog.
Size Power [kW]
2-pole 4-pole 6-pole 8-pole
DT71D..(BMG)/TF/MSW 0.55 0.37 0.25 0.15
DT80K..(BMG)/TF/MSW 0.75 0.55 0.37 -
DT80N..(BMG)/TF/MSW 1.1 0.75 0.55 0.25
DT90S..(BMG)/TF/MSW 1.5 1.1 0.75 0.37
DT90L..(BMG)/TF/MSW 2.2 1.5 1.1 0.55
DV100M..(BMG)/TF/MSW - 2.2 - 0.75
DV100L..(BMG)/TF/MSW 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.1
3.14 MOVI-SWITCH® Operating Principle

• MOVI-SWITCH® is a drive with integrated electronic On/Off switch for one direction
of rotation and integrated full motor protection.
• Current flow in the motor is switched on or off by switching the star point with solid
state power components.
MOVI-SWITCH ®
BMK
& (1)
Run
OK
24V
0V
U2 V2 W2
U1 V1 W1
4 3 AVS1
1 2 (2)
3 4
2 1
0V RUN 24V OK L1 L2 L3
03169BXX
(1) = Brake control system

(2) = M12 connector (standard coding)

kVA n
MOVI-SWITCH® Features f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.15 MOVI-SWITCH® Features
Motor Voltage • From 380 – 500 V, 50 / 60 Hz, motor winding only in 댴 connection 2
Brake Voltage • = Motor voltage / or 3

• = Motor voltage
4
Control Supply • 24 VDC in accordance with EN 61 131-2
Voltage
5
Control • With control voltage 24 VDC via M12 connector, identical for motors with and without
brake
6
Switching • On/Off with star bridge connection for one direction of rotation (CW or CCW,
Function switchable via phase swapping) 7
Direction of • CW or CCW (only externally switchable) 8

Rotation
Thermal Motor • Integrated evaluation of PTC thermistor (TF), logically connected with enable signal 9
Protection
Brake Control • A special brake rectifier (BGW) is used in conjunction with brake motors that takes 10
System over brake control.
• The power supply of the brake coil consists of supply voltage, preferably by supplying
the rectifier with power using one phase and the motor star point.
11
• The BGW rectifier implements quick release (BGE principle) of the brake and quick
application (switch-off on the DC side) of the brake. 12
3.16 MOVI-SWITCH® Technical Data 13

MOVI-SWITCH®
Power supply voltage (Signal: 24 V) V24 V 19 V...30 V 14
I24 V < (50 mA + IOK)
I24 V < 2.5 A (at short-circuit output)
Control input (Signal: RUN) 15
Circuit state RUN VRUN(OFF) 0...5 V, IRUN < 2 mA
VRUN(ON) 15...30 V, IRUN < 15 mA
Temperature monitoring
16
Circuit state PTC (TF) ROFF > 3,990 Ohm
RON < 1,650 Ohm
17
Module protection Temperature shutdown 89 to 100 °C
Temperature hysteresistyp. 5 K
Output (Signal OK)
18
Checkback signal Ready for operation (high) VOK > (V24V - 3 V)
Checkback signal Overtemperature(low) high-resistance (Ileak < 2 mA)
Current for checkback signal IOK 0 to 0.65 A 19
Short-circuit current IOK 0.7 to 2.4 A
Power connection
Line current In motor 0.5 to 7 A 20
Line voltage range Vn motor 380 V to 500 V (+/- 10 %), f = 48 to 62 Hz
Interference meets EN 50081 Part 1 and EN 55011 limit B 21
Interference immunity meets EN 50082 Part 2
22
kVA n
3 f Dimension Sheet Foot-Mounted MOVI-SWITCH®
i
P Hz
3.17 Dimension Sheet Foot-Mounted MOVI-SWITCH®
(4)
04846BXX
DT71D DT80.. DT90.. DV100M DV100L

a (B) 90 100 125 (2) 140 140
b (A) 112 125 140 160 160
c (HA) 5 10 8 12 12
e (BB) 115 125 152 170 170
f (AB) 144 149 176 188 188
G (AC) 145 (1) 145 197 (1) 197 197
G1 (AD) 149 149 182 183 183
h (H) 71 80 90 100 100
i (C+E) 75 90 106 123 123
k (L) 232 292 323 371 401
m (BA) 32 28 32 35 35
n (AA) 31 33 32 38 38
s (K) 7 9 9 12 12
st 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5
1x M16x1.5 1x M16x1.5 1x M16x1.5 3x M16x1.5 3x M16x1.5
1x(3) 1x(3) 1x(3) 1x(3) 1x(3)
w1 (C) 45 50 56 63 63
xB 64 64 85 85 85
x 115 115 115 147 147
y 140 140 140 175 175
x9 64 64 98,5 79 79
y1 25 25 25 25 25
d (D) 14 19 24 28 28
l (E) 30 40 50 60 60
l11 (E-EB-ED) 4 4 5 5 5
l12 (EB) 22 32 40 50 50
t (GA) 16 21.5 27 31 31
u (F) 5 6 8 8 8
(1) Fan cover flattened at bottom

(2) Deviates from IEC
(3) Plug connector M12, 4-pole
(4) Keep air intake open!

kVA n
Dimension Sheet Flange-Mounted MOVI-SWITCH® f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.18 Dimension Sheet Flange-Mounted MOVI-SWITCH®
2
6
(1)
7
10
11
04847BXX
DFT71D DFT80.. DFT90.. DFV100M DFV100L

a1 (P) 160 160 200 200 250 200 250 200 250
12
b1 (N) 110 110 130 130 180 130 180 130 180
c1 (LA) 10 10 12 12 15 12 15 12 15
13
e1 (M) 130 130 165 165 215 165 215 165 215
f1 (T) 3.5 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4 3.5 4
Fig. 2 2 2 1 2 2 14
G (AC) 145 145 197 197 197
G1 (AD) 149 149 182 183 183
i2 (R+E) 30 40 50 66 60 60 15
k (LB+R+E) 232 292 323 371 401
KM (LB) 202 252 273 257 311 341
s1 (S) 9 11 11 14 11 14 11 14
16
st 4x M25x1.5 4x M25x1.5
1x M16x1.5 3x M16x1.5
1x plug connector M12 1x plug connector M12 17
xB 64 64 85 85 85
x 115 115 115 147 147
y 140 140 140 175 175
18
x9 64 64 78.5 79 79
y1 25 25 25 25 25
19
d (D) 14 19 24 28 28
l (E) 30 40 50 60 60
l11 (E-EB-ED) 4 4 5 5 5 20
l12 (EB) 22 32 40 50 50
t (GA) 16 21.5 27 31 31
u (F) 5 6 8 8 8 21
(1) Keep air intake open!
22
kVA n
3 f MOVI-SWITCH® Plug Connector
i
P Hz
3.19 MOVI-SWITCH® Plug Connector
../ASA3
04969AXX
The following plug connectors are available for MOVI-SWITCH®:

Plug connector SEW designation Manufacturer designation
Description
For power ASA3 (optional) Harting Han® 10 ES pin insert
(extension housing with 2 clips)
I/O communication AVS1 Standard round plug connector M12 x 1
(standard with MOVI-SWITCH®) 4-wire plug (male), standard coded
Please observe: The corresponding female connectors are not included in the
shipment.
Possible • MSW.../AVS1 (standard)

Combinations • MSW.../ASA3
• MSW.../ASA3/AVS1
Connector Pin
Assignment
MOVI-SWITCH ®
MOVI-SWITCH ®
24V OK 0V RUN L1 L2 L3
1 2 3 4 5
4 3
1 2
6 7 8 9 10
AVS1 ASA3
05125AXX

kVA n
MOVI-SWITCH® Plug Connector f 3
i
P Hz
1
Dimension Sheet
MOVI-SWITCH®
54
with ASA3 and 2
AVS1 U X9
ASA3 3
AVS1
V
4
G1
W
5
7
M N
X
8
O
2
9
W1
3 10
Y
11
x 46
12
04970AXX
G1 M N O U V W W1 X9 X Y
13
DFT71..BMG/MSW 149 14 50 27.5 40 40 113 112 64 115 140
DFT80..BMG/MSW 149 14 50 27.5 40 40 113 112 64 115 140
DFT90..BMG/MSW 182 14 50 27.5 40 40 146 144 78.5 115 140 14
DFV100..BMG/MSW 183 30 80 11 56 38.5 148 147 79 147 175
15
Possible Plug The following positions are possible for the ASA3 and AVS1 plug connectors: 16
Connector Plug connector ASA3 AVS1 ASA3 + AVS1
Positions 2
x (normal) x (normal)
x (normal) + x (normal) 17
2+2
Possible
2 2 3+3
positions
3 3
x (normal) + 2 18
2 + x (normal)
3 19
20
x 21
05023AXX
22
kVA n
3 f MOVI-SWITCH® with MLK11A Option Installed
i
P Hz
3.20 MOVI-SWITCH® with MLK11A Option Installed

AS-I binary slave MLK11A can be delivered installed upon request (assembled and
wired for operation):
Important The option can be installed in the following positions:

Ordering • Position "2"
Information
• Position "x" (normal)
x
50449AXX
An ordering example can be found in the section "MOVI-SWITCH® Type Designation

and Combination Options" on page 37.

kVA n
Fieldbus Interfaces f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.21 Fieldbus Interfaces
AS-i Binary Slave 2
MLK11A
10
03005AXX
11
Function Option MLK11A is mounted to a free cable gland and offers the possibility of connecting
MOVIMOT® and MOVI-SWITCH® to the AS interface. 12
Functions in connection with MOVIMOT® 13

• Clockwise, counterclockwise
• Toggling between 2 setpoint values
14
• 24 V power supply for MOVIMOT®
• Ready for operation message to control
15
• LED display of inputs and outputs
• Input connections for one two-channel sensor or two one-channel sensors
(via T connector) 16
Functions in connection with MOVI-SWITCH® 17

• Start/Stop with one direction of rotation
• 24 V power supply for MOVI-SWITCH® 18
• Ready for operation message to control
• LED display of inputs and outputs 19
• Input connections for one two-channel sensor or two one-channel sensors
(via T connector) 20
21
22
kVA n
3 f Fieldbus Interfaces
i
P Hz
MLK11A Technical AS-i Slaves with Special Functions

Data
MLK11A Option
AS-i profile 7.F (free profile)
I/O configuration 7hex
ID code Fhex
Address 1 to 31 (factory setting: address 0)
max. number of address changes: 10
Watchdog ≥ 40 ms (all outputs de-energized)
Ambient temperature -25 °C to +60 °C
Enclosure IP65
Current consumption without ≤ 320 mA
external sensors typically 250 mA (MLK11A with MOVIMOT®)
typically 150 mA (MLK11A with MOVIMOT®)
Total current consumption ≤ 420 mA (including sensor power supply)
Sensor connection
Power supply 18 VDC to 30 VDC from AS-i net, short-circuit proof
Imax ≤ 100 mA
Binary inputs DI2 / DI3 PNP switching
Signal level "1" : V ≥ 10 V, I ≥ 6 mA (max. 10 mA)
"0" : V ≤ 5 V, I ≤ 2 mA
Signal delay < 5 ms
40
D
D I0
DI3I2 D 0
AS-i D O
Pow D O 1
er DOO
3
2
107
60
03192BXX

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
AS-i Slaves with Some manufacturers of AS-i products today offer specially adapted slaves for
Special interfacing MOVIMOT® and MOVI-SWITCH®.
Functions 2
AS-i Slave with • Combined input, output for switching the drive on and off or checkback signal in case
MOVI-SWITCH® of overload 3
Port • 1 additional input
• 1 additional output 4
• Enclosure IP65
AS-i slave with MOVI-SWITCH® port 5
Ordering designation AC2054
Supply source ifm electronic, 45127 Essen
Phone (0)201 2422 - 0
6
Fax (0)201 - 2422200
AS-i profile S 3.F
7
03053AXX
8
AS-i Slave with • Serial interface with SEW-MOVILINK® profile for MOVIMOT®
RS-485 Interface • Single control of fixed frequencies 9
• Setpoint selection via "AS-i Analog Protocol" (Profile 7.1)
• Enclosure IP65 10
• 2 additional inputs
• 24 V supply for MOVIMOT® via parallel black cable 11
AS-i slave with RS-485 interface
Ordering AC1150 Item number: 1164 12
designation
Supply source ifm electronic Bihl+Wiedemann
45127 Essen
Phone (0)201 2422
68199 Mannheim
Phone (0)621 -
13
-0 33996 - 0
Fax (0)201 - Fax (0)621 -
2422200 3392239 14
AS-i profile S 7.F S 7.F
15
16
03052AXX 17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
MF... Fieldbus Interfaces
®
P R O F I
PROCESS FIELD BUS
B U S
1) 2) 2)
MFZ21 MFZ11 MFZ11
MFP32 MFI32 MFI 33 B
MFP22 MFI22
MFI 23 B
MFP21 MFI21
open
2) 2)
MFZ31 MFZ31
MFO32 MFD32
MFO22 MFD22
MFO21 MFD21
04964AXX
1 Red terminal label

2 Black terminal label
Designs
Module type MFP21D MFP22D MFP32D
Part number 823 624 0 823 625 9 823 626 7
Corresponding module carrier MFZ 21D
Module + Module carrier MFP21D/Z21D MFP22D/Z21D MFP32D/Z21D
Part number 823 683 6 823 684 4 823 685 2
Connection technology
Bus Terminals Terminals
Sensors / Actuators Terminals M12 and terminals
Digital inputs 4 6
Digital outputs 2 0
Designs
Module type MFI21A MFI22A MFI32A
Part number 823 526 0 823 527 9 823 528 7
Corresponding module carrier MFZ 11A
Module + Module carrier MFI21A/Z11A MFI22A/Z11A MFI32A/Z11A
Part number 823 451 5 823 452 3 823 453 1
Bus Terminals Terminals
Digital inputs 4 6
Digital outputs 2 0

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
Designs
Module type MFI23B MFI33B
Part number 823 892 8 823 893 6 2
Module + Module carrier MFI23B/Z11A MFI33B/Z11A 3
with Fiber Optic Part number 823 966 5 823 967 3
and Rugged-Line Connection technology
Plug Connector
Bus Fiber optic (via rugged-line plug connector) 4
Sensors / Actuators M12 and terminals
(Phoenix Contact) Digital inputs 4 6
Digital outputs 2 0 5
Designs 6
Module type MFD21A MFD22A MFD32A
Part number 823 551 1 823 552 X 823 553 8
7
Module + Module carrier MFD21A/Z31A MFD22A/Z31A MFD32A/Z31A
Part number 823 554 6 823 555 4 823 556 2
8
Bus Micro-style connector Micro-style connector
Sensors / Actuators Terminals M12 and terminals 9
Digital inputs 4 6
Digital outputs 2 0
10
Designs
11
open Module type
Part number
MFO21A
823 957 6
MFO22A
823 958 4
MFO32A
823 959 2
Corresponding module carrier MFZ 31A 12
Module + Module carrier MFO21A/Z31A MFO22A/Z31A MFO32A/Z31A
Part number 823 978 9 823 979 7 823 980 0 13
Bus Micro-style connector Micro-style connector
Digital inputs 4 6
14
Digital outputs 2 0
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Installation types of MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces

On MOVIMOT®
Inverter:
Supply
system
Fieldbus
01938CXX
In the Field:
Fieldbus
Supply
system
01910BXX

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
Technical Data of MFP.. PROFIBUS Interface
MFP electrical specification
2
MFP electronic power supply V = +24 V +/- 25 %, IE ≤ 150 mA
Electrical isolation • PROFIBUS DP connector potential-free
• Between logic and 24 V power supply 3
• Between logic and peripherals/MOVIMOT® via opto-coupler
Bus connection technology 2 cage clamp terminals each for incoming and outgoing bus cables (optional M12)
Shielding Using EMC metal cable glands 4
Binary inputs (sensors) PLC-compatible to EN 61131-2, Ri ≈ 3.0 kΩ, sampling time approx. 5 ms
Signal form 13 V – +30 V “1” = Contact made / -3 V – +5 V “0” = Contact not made
Sensor power supply 24 VDC to EN 61131-2 interference voltage proof and short-circuit proof
5
Rated current Σ 500 mA
Internal voltage drop max. 1 V
Binary outputs (actuators) PLC-compatible to EN 61131-2, interference voltage proof and short-circuit proof
6
Signal level "0" = 0 V, "1" = 24 V
Rated current 500 mA
Leakage current max. 0.2 mA 7
Inverter power supply (terminal 15/18) 24 VDC not short-circuit proof
Rated current 250 mA 8
Cable length RS-485 30 m between MFP and MOVIMOT® if installed separately
9
Enclosure IP65 (assembled on MFZ.. connection module, all plug connections sealed)
10
Technical data PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS protocol PROFIBUS DP
Supported baud rates 9.6 kbps to 1.5 Mbps / 3 to 12 Mbps (with automatic recognition)
11
Bus termination Integrated, can be enabled via DIP switch according to EN 50170 (V2)
Permitted line length for PROFIBUS • 9.6 kbps: 1200 m 12
• 19.2 kbps: 1200 m
• 93.75 kbps: 1200 m
• 187.5 kbps: 1000 m
• 500 kbps: 400 m 13
• 1.5 Mbps: 200 m
• 12 Mbps: 100 m
To increase the expansion, several segments can be coupled via repeater. The max. 14
expansion/cascading depth can be found in the manuals to the DP Master or the
repeater modules.
DP ident number 6001 hex (24577 dec) 15
DP configurations without DI/DO 2 PD, configuration: 113dez, 0dez
3 PD, configuration: 114dez, 0dez
DP configurations with DI/DO 2 PD + DI/DO, configuration: 113dez, 48dez
16
3 PD + DI/DO, configuration: 114dez, 48dez
0 PD + DI/DO, configuration: 0dez, 48dez,
DP configurations with DI 2 PD + DI, configuration: 113dez, 16dez 17
3 PD + DI, configuration: 114dez, 16dez
0 PD + DI, configuration: 0dez, 16dez,
Universal configuration, for direct entry of configurations 18
Set Prm application data Max. 10 byte,
Hex parameterization:
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00 diagnostic alarm active (default)
00,01,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00 diagnostic alarm deactivated
19
Length of diagnostic data Max. 8 byte, incl. 2 byte equipment-specific diagnosis
Address settings Not supported, adjustable via DIP switch 20
Name of GSD file SEW_6001.GSD
Name of bitmap file SEW6001N.BMP
SEW6001S.BMP
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Technical Data of InterBus Interface MFI21A, MFI22A, MFI32A

Electrical specification MFI
Electronic power supply MFI V = +24 V +/- 25 %, IE ≤ 150 mA
Electrical isolation • InterBus connection potential free
• Between logic and 24 V power supply
• Between logic and peripherals/MOVIMOT® via opto-coupler
Bus connection technology 5 cage clamp terminals each for incoming and outgoing bus cables
Shielding Using EMC metal cable glands
Signal level "0" = 0 V, "1" = 24 V
Leakage current max. 0.2 mA
Cable length RS-485 30 m between MFI and MOVIMOT® if installed separately
Programming Data
InterBus interface Remote bus and installation remote bus
Protocol mode 2 conductor asynchronous protocol 500 kbps
ID code 03hex (03dez) = digital module with input and output data
Length code 2hex / 3hex / 4hex depending on the setting of the DIP switches
Register length on the bus 2, 3 or 4 words (depending on the DIP switch)
Parameter channel (PCP) 0 words
Data to remote bus interface

Line length between two MFIs in the remote bus InterBus-typical, max. 400 m
Maximum number of MFIs on remote bus Depending on InterBus master
64 (configuration 3 PD + DI/DO) – 128 (configuration 2 PD)
Data to installation remote bus interface

Line length between two MFIs in the InterBus-typical, max. 50 m between first and last station
installation remote bus
Maximum number of MFIs on installation remote Limited by the total current consumption (max. 4.5 A) of the MFI in the
bus installation remote bus radial line and voltage drop at the last MFI interface
connection

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
Technical Data of InterBus Interface MFI23B, MFI33B with Fiber Optic and Rugged-Line Plug
Connector
Electrical Specification MFI23B/33B
2
Electronic power supply MFI • Bus logic VS1 = 24 VDC +/- 25%, IE ≤ 200 mA (typ. 80 mA) plus supply current for
sensors and MOVIMOT® inverter 3
• Actuator voltage VS2 = 24 VDC +/- 25%
The two voltages VS1 and VS2 are connected through and can be picked off at the plug
connection for the continuing remote bus. The maximum continuous current measures:
– max. 16 A at 0–40 °C ambient temperature 4
– max. 10 A at 0–55 °C ambient temperature
Electrical isolation No isolation between bus logic and binary inputs or MOVIMOT® electrical isolation
between bus logic and outputs via opto-coupler 5
Bus connection technology Fiber optic rugged-line connector
Binary inputs (sensors) PLC-compatible to EN 61131-2, Ri ≈ 3.0 kΩ, sampling time approx. 5 ms 6
Signal form +13 V...+30 V = "1" / -3 V...+5 V = "0"
Sensor power supply From VS1: 24 VDC to EN 61131-2 interference voltage proof and short-circuit proof
Rated current Σ 500 mA 7
Binary outputs (actuators) PLC-compatible to EN 61131-2
Signal level "0" = 0 V, "1" = 24 V
8
Inverter power supply (terminal 15/18) From VS1: 24 VDC interference voltage proof and short-circuit proof 9
Cable length RS-485 ≤ 30 m between MFI and MOVIMOT®
10
Ambient temperature 0–55 °C [max. 10 A continuous current with 24 V voltage loop-through (VS1 and VS2)]
11
Programming Data
InterBus interface Fiber optic remote bus
Transfer rate 500 kbps / 2 Mbps 12
ID code 03hex(03dec) = digital module with input and output data
Length code 2hex/ 3hex/ 4hex depending on the setting of the DIP switch 13
Register length on the bus 2, 3 or 4 words (depending on the DIP switch)
Parameter channel (PCP) 0 words
14
Data on the INTERBUS interface
incoming / outgoing remote bus Fiber optic (polymer fiber 980/1,000 m)
15
Connection technology Fiber optic rugged-line
Line length between two MFIs on the bus Max. 50 m, depending on cable type1)
Maximum number of MFIs on fiber optic remote bus Depending on InterBus master 16
64 (configuration 3 PD + DI/DO) – 128 (configuration 2 PD)
1) Line lengths < 1 m are only permitted using the specially pre-fabricated cable bridge IBS RL
CONNECTION-LK by Phoenix Contact
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Technical Data of MFD DeviceNet Interface

Note: The DeviceNet Statement of Conformance is located in the appendix.
Electrical specification MFD
Power supply to MFD control electronics V = 11 V…25 V according to DeviceNet specification
via DeviceNet IE ≤ 200 mA
Input voltage for inverters and sensors V = +24 V +/- 25 %
(terminal 11/13)
Electrical isolation DeviceNet potential and inputs/outputs
DeviceNet potential and MOVIMOT®
Bus connection technology Micro-style connector male (M12)
Signal level "0" = 0 V, "1" = 24 V
Cable length RS-485 30 m between MFD and MOVIMOT® if installed separately
Specification DeviceNet
Protocol type Master-slave connection set with polled I/O and bit-strobe I/O
Supported baud rates 500 kbps
250 kbps
125 kbps
Cable length DeviceNet See DeviceNet specification V. 2.0
500 kbps 100 m
250 kbps 200 m
125 kbps 400 m
Bus Termination 120 Ohm (requires external triggering)
Process data configuration without DI/DO 2 PD
3 PD
Process data configuration with DI/DO 2 PD + DI/DO
3 PD + DI/DO
0 PD + DI/DO
Process data configuration with DI 2 PD + DI
3 PD + DI
0 PD + DI
Address setting DIP switch (0..63)
Process data length DIP switches
I/O enable DIP switches
Name of EDS file MFD2x.eds
MFD3x.eds
Name of bitmap file MFD2x.bmp
MFD3x.bmp

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
Technical Data of MFO.. CANopen Interface
Electrical specification MFO
2
Electronic power supply MFO V = +24 V +/- 25%
IE ≤ 150 mA
Electrical isolation • CANopen potential and inputs/outputs 3
• CANopen potential and MOVIMOT®
Input voltage for inverters and sensors V = +24 V +/- 25 %
(terminal 11/13) 4
Bus connection technology Micro-style connector male (M12)
Signal form 13 V – +30 V “1” = Contact made / -3 V – +5 V “0” = Contact not made 5
Internal voltage drop max. 1 V 6
Signal level "0" = 0 V, "1" = 24 V
Rated current 500 mA 7
Inverter power supply (terminal 15/18) 24 VDC not short-circuit proof 8
Cable length RS-485 30 m between MFO and MOVIMOT® if installed separately
Ambient temperature -25...60 °C 9
CANopen specification 10
Protocol type 1 SDO, 1 PDO, Emergency, Lifetime
Supported baud rates • 1 Mbps 11
• 500 kbps
• 250 kbps
• 125 kbps
CANopen line length See CANopen specification DR303
12
1 Mbps 40 m
500 kbps 100 m
250 kbps 200 m 13
125 kbps 400 m
Bus Termination 120 Ω (connect externally)
Process data configuration without DI/DO 2PD
14
3PD
Process data configuration with DI/DO 2 PD + DI/DO
3 PD + DI/DO 15
0 PD + DI/DO
Process data configuration with DI 2 PD + DI
3 PD + DI 16
0 PD + DI
Address setting DIP switch (1..127)
Process data length DIP switches
17
I/O enable DIP switches
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Dimension Sheet of MF... Fieldbus Interface (Mounted to MOVIMOT®)
X2
X
St
Y2
g2
Y
Y1
Y1(*)
X1
02069BXX
Type g2 X1 X2 Y1 Y1(*) Y2 X Y St
DT71..BMG/MM../MF. 21 (230/400 V) 162 115 67 65 – 95 182 140 2xM25/1xM16
DT71..BMG/MM../MF. 22 (230/400 V) 162 115 67 – 81 95 182 140 2xM25/1xM16
DT71..BMG/MM../MF. 32 (230/400 V) 162 115 67 – 81 95 182 140 2xM25/1xM16
DT80..BMG/MM../MF. 21 (230/400 V) 162 115 67 65 – 95 182 140 2xM25/1xM16
DT80..BMG/MM../MF. 22 (230/400 V) 162 115 67 – 81 95 182 140 2xM25/1xM16
DT80..BMG/MM../MF. 32 (230/400 V) 162 115 67 – 81 95 182 140 2xM25/1xM16
DT90..BMG/MM1./MF. 21 (400 V) 197 115 97 65 – 95 182 140 2xM25/1xM16
DT90..BMG/MM1./MF. 22 (400 V) 197 115 97 – 81 95 182 182 2xM25/1xM16
DT90..BMG/MM1./MF. 32 (400 V) 197 115 97 – 81 95 182 182 2xM25/1xM16
DT90..BMG/MM../MF. 21 (230 V) 197 115 97 65 – 95 230 175 2xM25/2xM16

DT90..BMG/MM../MF. 22 (230 V) 197 115 97 – 81 95 230 175 2xM25/2xM16
DT90..BMG/MM../MF. 32 (230 V) 197 115 97 – 81 95 230 175 2xM25/2xM16
DT90..BMG/MM22/MF. 21 (400 V) 197 115 97 65 – 95 230 175 2xM25/2xM16
DT90..BMG/MM22/MF. 22 (400 V) 197 115 97 – 81 95 230 175 2xM25/2xM16
DT90..BMG/MM22/MF. 32 (400 V) 197 115 97 – 81 95 230 175 2xM25/2xM16
DV100..BMG/MM../MF. 21 (230/400 V) 199 115 97 65 – 95 230 175 2xM25/2xM16
DV100..BMG/MM../MF. 22 (230/400 V) 199 115 97 – 81 95 230 175 2xM25/2xM16
DV100..BMG/MM../MF. 32 (230/400 V) 199 115 97 – 81 95 230 175 2xM25/2xM16
(400 V) = Dimensions only for equipment with connection voltages 380 – 500 V
(230 V) = Dimensions only for equipment with connection voltages 200 – 240 V
(230/400 V) = Dimensions for equipment with connection voltages 380 – 500 V and 200 – 240 V

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
Dimension Sheet
of MF... Fieldbus
Interface (without 2
MOVIMOT®)
3
65,5
61,5
4
25
10 40
5
76
8
81,5
75,5
25
9
10
6x M20 x 1,5
40
2x M12 x 1,5
76 10
11
102 25
12
13
82,5
95
30
14
22,5
Ø 4,4 15
115
50465AXX 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Dimension Sheet
for Fieldbus
Interface MFI23B/ 115
104
MFI33B with 84
Rugged-Line
Connection
(without
MOVIMOT®) UL
RC US1
MFI INTERBUS RL
BA US2
RD FO1
84
84
TR FO2
SYS-F
174,5
180,6
103,4
34,3
51
10,4
95
109 71,6
50335AXX

kVA n
Options for MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.22 Options for MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces
MFG11A Keypad The MFG11A keypad is plugged onto an MFZ.. connection module (not part of the scope 2
of delivery) instead of a bus module and allows for manual control of a MOVIMOT®
drive.
3
MFZ.. 4
7
MFG11A
8
P
STO
10
50030BXX
11
Technical Data 12
MFG11A Option
13
Setpoint resolution 1%
14
Serial interface RS-485 for connection of up to 31 MOVIMOT® inverters
(max. 200 m, 9,600 baud)
15
Enclosure IP 54 (MFG11A mounted on MFZ.. connection module)
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f Options for MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces
i
P Hz
MWS Option for MF.. fieldbus modules contain a diagnostics interface for startup and service. This
Bus Diagnostics allows for bus diagnostics using the SEW user software MOVITOOLS.
(Part Number 823 The diagnostics interface can be connected to a commercially available PC with a serial
180X) interface (RS-232) using MOVIMOT® MWS21A fieldbus diagnostics kit.
Scope of Delivery • Interface adapter UWS21A
• Cable with modular jack 4/4 (RJ11) plug connector
• Interface cable RS-232
• SOFTWARE-ROM 4 (MOVITOOLS software)
• For additional information see the section "Operation and Service."
GND RS- RS+ +5V
4 321
Modular
VITOO RS-232 Jack 4/4
MO
LS
(RJ 11)
UWS21A MF...
03301BXX
Bus Monitor in The bus monitor in MOVITOOLS provides a friendly control and visualization of cyclical
MOVITOOLS MOVIMOT® process data.
03565AEN
Features • Simple operation

• User-friendly familiarization with control functions even without connection to the
fieldbus (preparation for commissioning)
• Integrated into SEW user interface MOVITOOLS
• Simple and quick troubleshooting
• Shortest project planning phase

kVA n
Options for MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces f 3
i
P Hz
1
Function of Bus The bus monitor provides the user with a powerful tool for startup, and troubleshooting.
Monitor It can be used to display and interpret cyclically exchanged process data between
inverter and control unit. 2
In addition, the bus monitor allows not only monitoring bus operation as a passive
station, but also allows for active control of the inverter.
3
This provides the user with the following possibilities:
• To interactively take over control of the inverter in an existing system and, thereby,
check the functionality of the drive.
4
• To remotely simulate the operating principle of an individual drive (that is, without
existing system and fieldbus master), so that the control functions can be tested prior 5
to commissioning.
6
Bus Monitor in
Controller
Operating Mode (1) (2) 7
(3)
8
(4)
(5)
9
10
11
12
03566BEN
(1) PO data from controller

(2) PI data from inverter to controller 13
(3) Displays current data in hex code
(4) PO data can be edited here in control mode
– "PD release" generally allows for sending data
– "PO send" is used to send edited data to the inverter
14
(5) Displays current setting
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f MF.../Z.3. Field Distributors
i
P Hz
3.23 MF.../Z.3. Field Distributors
(1)
(2)
04091BXX
(1) MF.. fieldbus interface

(2) Connection of pre-fabricated cable
Function • Communications interface with I/Os (I/Os can only be used in combination with M12
plug connectors)
• Joint wiring space of bus and power terminals
• Pluggable motor circuit
Sample
MFP21D/Z23D
Designation Type
Connection module
Z13A = for InterBus
Z23D = for PROFIBUS
Z33A = for DeviceNet and CANopen
Fieldbus interface
MFI... = InterBus
MFP... = PROFIBUS
MFD.. = DeviceNet
MFO.. = CANopen
Possible
no I/O 4 x I / 2 x O (M12) 6 x I (M12)
Combinations
InterBus MFI21A/Z13A MFI22A/Z13A MFI32A/Z13A

InterBus with fiber –
MFI23B/Z13A MFI33B/Z13A
optic and rugged line
PROFIBUS MFP21D/Z23D MFP22D/Z23D MFP32D/Z23D
DeviceNet MFD21A/Z33A MFD22A/Z33A MFD32A/Z33A
CANopen MFO21A/Z33A MFO22A/Z33A MFO32A/Z33A

kVA n
MF.../Z.3. Field Distributors f 3
i
P Hz
1
Technical Data of
MF../Z.3.
MF../Z.3.
2
Enclosure IP65 (fieldbus interface and motor connection cable attached and screwed, all
plug connections sealed) 3
Interface PROFIBUS, InterBus, DeviceNet, CANopen (technical data starting on page
51)
4
Dimensions
MF.../Z.3. 5
98,5
82,5
7
58
8
9
121
43,5
10
33,5 5,5
6,5
M16 x1,5 11
12
95
93,5
13
137
14
189
175
15
M25 x 1,5 16
17
M20 x1,5
5,5
18
38,5
100 19
50467AXX
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f MF.../Z.6. Field Distributor
i
P Hz
3.24 MF.../Z.6. Field Distributor
(1) (2) (3) (4)

04092BXX

(2) Maintenance switch
(3) Connection space for supply connection
(4) Fieldbus interface
Function • Communications interface with I/Os

• Separate wiring space of bus and supply voltage
• Pluggable motor circuit
• Maintenance switch (triple lockable) Ø 5...Ø 8 mm
– With line protection function I ON I ON
– Manufactured by ABB
0 OFF
0 OFF
– Type switch element MS 325 - 9

– Type auxiliary contact HK 20
– Color: black/red
Sample Type
Designation
MFP21D/Z26D/AF0
AF0 = Metric cable entry
AF1 = With micro-style connector for
DeviceNet and CANopen
AF2 = M12 plug connector for PROFIBUS
AF3 = M12 plug connector for PROFIBUS +
M12 plug connector for 24 V supply
Connection module
Z16A = For InterBus
Z26D = For PROFIBUS
Z36A = For DeviceNet and CANopen
Fieldbus interface
MFI... = InterBus
MFP... = PROFIBUS
MFD.. = DeviceNet
MFO.. = CANopen

kVA n
MF.../Z.6. Field Distributor f 3
i
P Hz
1
Possible
Combinations
4 x I / 2 x O (terminals) 4 x I / 2 x O (M12) 6 x I (M12)
MF.../Z.6. 2
3
InterBus MFI21A/Z16A/AF0 MFI22A/Z16A/AF0 MFI32A/Z16A/AF0
InterBus with fiber
– MFI23B/Z16A/AF0 MFI33B/Z16A/AF0
optic and rugged line 4
MFP21D/Z26D/AF0 MFP22D/Z26D/AF0 MFP32D/Z26D/AF0
PROFIBUS MFP21D/Z26D/AF2 MFP22D/Z26D/AF2 MFP32D/Z26D/AF2
5
MFP21D/Z26D/AF3 MFP22D/Z26D/AF3 MFP32D/Z26D/AF3
DeviceNet MFD21A/Z36A/AF1 MFD22A/Z36A/AF1 MFD32A/Z36A/AF1
CANopen MFO21A/Z36A/AF1 MFO22A/Z36A/AF1 MFO32A/Z36A/AF1 6
7
Technical Data of
MF.../Z.6.
MF../Z.6.
8
Maintenance switch Load disconnector and line protection
Type: ABB MS 325 – 9 + HK20
Switch activation: black/red, triple lockable
9
Enclosure IP65 (fieldbus interface, supply connection cover and motor connection cable 10
attached and screwed, all plug connections sealed)
Interface PROFIBUS, InterBus, DeviceNet, CANopen (technical data starting on page
51) 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f MF.../Z.6. Field Distributor
i
P Hz
Dimension Sheet MF.../Z.6.
136,5
79
56
30
24
46
44
M20 x 1,5
44
165
44
202
44
M25 x 1,5
365
388
365
6,5
6,5
12
35
180
50,5 194
50468AXX

kVA n
MF.../MM../Z.8. Field Distributor f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.25 MF.../MM../Z.8. Field Distributor
2
9
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
10
04093BXX

(2) Connection space for supply connection 11
(3) MF.. fieldbus interface
(5) MOVIMOT® inverter (here: size 1) 12
Function • Communications interface with I/Os 13

• Separate wiring space of bus and power terminals
• Pluggable motor circuit 14
• Integrated MOVIMOT® inverter
• Maintenance switch (triple lockable)
15
– Manufactured by ABB
– Type OT16ET3HS3ST1
– Color black/red 16
Ø 5...Ø 8 mm
I ON I ON
17
0 OFF
0 OFF
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f MF.../MM../Z.8. Field Distributor
i
P Hz
Sample Type
Designation
MFP22D/MM22B/Z28D 0/AF01)
M12 plug connector for 24 V supply
Method of connection
0 = 댴 / 1= 쑶
Connection module
Z18A = For InterBus
Z28D = For PROFIBUS
MOVIMOT® inverter
Fieldbus interface
MFI... = InterBus
MFP... = PROFIBUS
MFD.. = DeviceNet
MFO.. = CANopen
1) If the field distributor is used in combination with a drive without mechanical holding brake, the field
distributor must be ordered with integrated braking resistor (according to the following example):
Possible
Combinations 4 x I / 2 x O (terminals) 4 x I / 2 x O (M12) 6 x I (M12)
댴 MFI21A/MM..B/Z18A 0/AF0 MFI22A/MM..B/Z18A 0/AF0 MFI32A/MM..B/Z18A 0/AF0

InterBus
쑶 MFI21A/MM..B/Z18A 1/AF0 MFI22A/MM..B/Z18A 1/AF0 MFI32A/MM..B/Z18A 1/AF0
InterBus 댴 – MFI23B/MM..B/Z18A 0/AF0 MFI33B/MM..B/Z18A 0/AF0
with fiber optic
and –
rugged line
쑶 MFI23B/MM..B/Z18A 1/AF0 MFI33B/MM..B/Z18A 1/AF0
댴 MFP21D/MM..B/Z28D 0/AF0 MFP22D/MM..B/Z28D 0/AF0 MFP32D/MM..B/Z28D 0/AF0

쑶 MFP21D/MM..B/Z28D 1/AF0 MFP22D/MM..B/Z28D 1/AF0 MFP32D/MM..B/Z28D 1/AF0
PROFIBUS
댴 MFD21A/MM..B/Z38A 0/AF1 MFD22A/MM..B/Z38A 0/AF1 MFD32A/MM..B/Z38A 0/AF1
DeviceNet
쑶 MFD21A/MM..B/Z38A 1/AF1 MFD22A/MM..B/Z38A 1/AF1 MFD32A/MM..B/Z38A 1/AF1
댴 MFO21A/MM..B/Z38A 0/AF1 MFO22A/MM..B/Z38A 0/AF1 MFO32A/MM..B/Z38A 0/AF1
CANopen
쑶 MFO21A/MM..B/Z38A 1/AF1 MFO22A/MM..B/Z38A 1/AF1 MFO32A/MM..B/Z38A 1/AF1

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
Assignment of 1400 1/min:
Motors/ Field
Power
Distributors MF../ Motor 댴 Field distributor with MOVIMOT® 2
[kW]
MM../Z.8.
DT71D4 / TH MF/ MM03B / Z.8. 0 / BW1 / AF..
0.37
DT71D4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM03B / Z.8. 0 / AF.. 3
DT80K4 / TH MF/ MM05B / Z.8. 0 / BW1 / AF..
0.55
DT80K4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM05B / Z.8. 0 / AF..
4
DT80N4 / TH MF/ MM07B / Z.8. 0 / BW1 / AF..
0.75
DT80N4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM07B / Z.8. 0 / AF..
DT90S4 / TH MF/ MM11B / Z.8. 0 / BW1 / AF.. 5
1.1
DT90S4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM11B / Z.8. 0 / AF..
1.5
DT90L4 / TH MF/ MM15B / Z.8. 0 / BW1 / AF.. 6
DT90L4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM15B / Z.8. 0 / AF..
DV100M4 / TH MF/ MM22B / Z.8. 0 / BW2 / AF..
2.2 7
DV100M4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM22B / Z.8. 0 / AF..
DV100L4 / TH MF/ MM30B / Z.8. 0 / BW2 / AF..
3
DV100L4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM30B / Z.8. 0 / AF.. 8
2900 1/min: 9
Power
Motor쑶 Field distributor with MOVIMOT®
[kW] 10
DT71D4 / TH MF/ MM05B / Z.8. 1 / BW1 / AF..
0.55
DT71D4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM05B / Z.8. 1 / AF..
11
DT80K4 / TH MF/ MM07B / Z.8. 1 / BW1 / AF..
0,75
DT80K4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM07B / Z.8. 1 / AF..
DT80N4 / TH MF/ MM11B / Z.8. 1 / BW1 / AF..
12
1.1
DT80N4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM11B / Z.8. 1 / AF..
1.5
DT90S4 / TH MF/ MM15B / Z.8. 1 / BW1 / AF.. 13
DT90S4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM15B / Z.8. 1 / AF..
DT90L4 / TH MF/ MM22B / Z.8. 1 / BW2 / AF..
2.2 14
DT90L4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM22B / Z.8. 1 / AF..
DV100M4 / TH MF/ MM30B / Z.8. 1 / BW2 / AF..
3
DV100M4 / BMG / TH . MF/ MM30B / Z.8. 1 / AF.. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Technical Data of MF../MM../Z.8. Field Distributors:

Field distributor type MF../ MF../ MF../ MF../ MF../ MF../ MF../
MM03B/ MM05B/ MM07B/ MM11B/ MM15B/ MM22B/ MM30B/
Z.8... Z.8... Z.8... Z.8... Z.8... Z.8... Z.8...
Apparent output power with SN
1.1 kVA 1.4 kVA 1.8 kVA 2.2 kVA 2.8 kVA 3.8 kVA 5.1 kVA
Vin = 380 – 500 V
Connection voltages Vin 3 x 380 VAC / 400 VAC / 415 VAC / 460 VAC / 500 VAC
Permitted range Vin = 380 VAC - 10%...500 VAC + 10%
Supply frequency fin 50 Hz – 60 Hz ± 10%
Supply voltage rated current Iin
1.3 AAC 1.6 AAC 1.9 AAC 2.4 AAC 3.5 AAC 5.0 AAC 6.7 AAC
(at Vin =400 VAC)
Output voltage Voutp 0... Vin
Resolution 0.01 Hz
Operating point 400 V at 50 Hz / 100 Hz
Motor power PMot 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW
PWM frequency 4 / 8 / 12 / 161) kHz
Current limit Imax Motor operating mode: 160 % at 댴, 150 % at 쑶
regenerative mode:160 % at 댴, 150 % at 쑶
Interference According to limit class A
To EN 55011 and EN 55014, meets EN 61800-3
Ambient temperature ϑamb -25...40 °C 2) -25...35 °C 3)
Enclosure IP65 (fieldbus interface, supply connection cover and motor connection cable attached and
screwed, all plug connections sealed)
Operating mode DB (EN60149-1-1 and 1-3)
Altitude h ≤ 1000 m (PN reduction: 1% per 100 m up to max. 2,000 m)
External electronics supply Tl. 11 V = +24 V ± 25%
Tl. 13 IE ≤ 250 mA (only MOVIMOT®),
Maintenance switch Load disconnector
Type: ABB OT16ET3HS3ST1
Switch activation: black/red, triple lockable
Interface PROFIBUS, InterBus, DeviceNet, CANopen (technical data starting on page 51)
1) 16 kHz-PWM frequency (low-noise) If DIP-SWITCH S1/7 = ON (factory setting), the equipment operates with 16 kHz PWM frequency
(low-noise) and incrementally switches back to a lower takt frequency dependent upon the heat sink temperature.
2) PN reduction: 3 % per K up to 55 °C
3) PN reduction: 2.5 % per K up to 55 °C

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
MF.../MM03-MM15/Z.8. Dimension Sheet (Size 1)
M25 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 2
30
4
56
50
34
5
29 6
66 44 7
97 44
44 8
119 44 9
10
223
11
120 200
6,5
12
13
14
15
290
308
16
17
18
104
19
120
270
20
293
21
50469AXX
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
MF.../MM22-MM30/Z.8. Dimension Sheet (Size 2)
M25 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5
61
56
39
35
37
73 44
44
44
126 44
238
205
124
7
363
350
113 290
321
129
50470AXX

kVA n
AC Motors with Plug Connector (for Z.8 Field Distributor) f 3
i
P Hz
1
3.26 AC Motors with Plug Connector (for Z.8 Field Distributor)
• Additional Information about AC motors with plug connector can be found in the 2
"Geared Motors" catalog.
AC Motors with
APG4 Plug 3
Connector
4
+ 5
MF../MM../Z.8..
6
0186 741 5
03198BXX
9
Function AC motors DT..../APG4 have a plug connector manufactured by Phoenix Contact 10

(Series PlusCon VC) for connecting power (phases), motor protection (TH), and brake.
Using plug connector APG4, the motor and an SEW field distributor with integrated
MOVIMOT® MF../MM../Z.8... inverter or another suitable field control module (e.g. Drive 11
Shuttle speed regulating rheostat by Phoenix Contact, Type IBS IP 400 VFD 1-3A...) are
connected via a pre-fabricated hybrid cable. 12
Connector Pin
Assignment
(5) 13
(6)
U1 (BK)
V1 U1
U1
V1 (BK)
V1
14
W1
W1 (BK)
W1
(GN/YE)
15
PE
BU 15 (BU)
WH 14 (WH)
(2)
16
RD 13 (RD)
(1)
17
TH
1 (sw)
APG4
2 (sw) (3) 18
(4)
03205BXX 19
(1) Brake coil
(2) Brake control system
(3) Temperature evaluation 20
(4) EMC metal cable gland
(5) With wide-area contact of EMC metal cable gland with plug housing
(6) The method of connection at the motor terminal board must correspond to the intended method of
connection of the field distributor. The jumpers at the motor terminal board must be placed accordingly.
21
22
kVA n
3 f AC Motors with Plug Connector (for Z.8 Field Distributor)
i
P Hz
AC Motors with
ASA4 Plug
Connector
+
MF../MM../Z.8..
0593 076 6
05018AXX
Function AC motors DT..../ASA4 have a plug connector manufactured by Harting (Series HAN
10E) for connecting power (phases), motor protection (TH), and brake.
The ASA4 plug connector is used to connect the motor and an SEW field distributor with
integrated MOVIMOT® MF../MM../Z.8... inverter via a pre-fabricated hybrid cable.
Connector Pin
Assignment
U1
V1
W1
(4)
PE
V1 U1
15
14
W1
6
1
6
(2)
13
2
2
7
7
3
3
8
8
BU
1
9
4
4
9
WH
2
10
10
(3)
5
RD
(1)
ASA4
TH
05117AXX
(1) Brake coil

(2) Brake control system
(3) Temperature evaluation
(4) The method of connection at the motor terminal board must correspond to the intended method of connection of the field
distributor. The jumpers at the motor terminal board must be placed accordingly.

kVA n
AC Motors with Plug Connector (for Z.8 Field Distributor) f 3
i
P Hz
1
AC Motors with
IS(U) Plug
Connector 2
3
0593 278 5
+ 0593 755 8
0816 325 1 4
0816 326 X
MF../MM../Z.8..
5
05019AXX 6
Function AC motors DT..../IS have an integrated plug connector manufactured by SEW-
EURODRIVE for connecting power (phases), motor protection (TH/TF) and brake. 7
The IS plug connector is used to connect the motor and an SEW field distributor with
integrated MOVIMOT® MF../MM../Z.8... inverter via a pre-fabricated hybrid cable.
8
Connector Pin
Assignment
9
6 5 4 3 2 1
10
11
(2)
12
PE
(3) 13
V2 U2
V1 U1
7 8 9 10 11 12
7 8 9 10 11 12
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
U1 14
W2
W1
V1
15
BU W1
WH
RD 16
(1) 15
IS IS 14
TH (4)
13 17
1
18
2 (5)
19
05121AXX
20
(1) Brake coil (4) Brake control system
(2) Variable terminal link for delta connection (5) Temperature evaluation
(3) Variable terminal link for star connection 21
22
kVA n
3 f Connection Technology for Field Distributors
i
P Hz
3.27 Connection Technology for Field Distributors

With PROFIBUS, Field distributors MF.../Z.6A and MF.../MM../Z.8. in combination with PROFIBUS and
InterBus InterBus are equipped with AF0 mounting flange:
(2)
(1)
(3)
(3)
(4)
50362AXX
(1) Front panel

(2) M20 EMC cable gland
(3) M20 screw plug
(4) M25 screw plug
With DeviceNet, Field distributors MF.../Z.6A and MF.../MM../Z.8. in combination with DeviceNet and
CANopen CANopen are equipped with AF1 mounting flange:
(3)
(2)
(1)
X11
(4)
(4)
(5)
50361AXX
(1) Front panel

(2) Micro-style connector (X11)
(3) Protection cap
(4) M20 screw plug
(5) M25 screw plug

kVA n
Connection Technology for Field Distributors f 3
i
P Hz
1
AF1 Cabling and
Pin Assignment
2
4
1 2 3 4 5
BU
5
GY
BN 6
BK
WH
7
8
X11
9
10
11
50452AXX
M12 connector X11

12
Pin 1 DRAIN
Pin 2 V+
4
5
3
Pin 3 V-
13
1 2
Pin 4 CAN_H
Pin 5 CAN_L 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
Optional Connection Technology

AF2 Mounting As an alternative to the AF0 standard design, the AF2 mounting flange can be combined
Flange with field distributors for Profibus MFZ26D and MFZ28D. The AF2 features an M12
connection system for Profibus connection. An X11 connector for the incoming and an
X12 socket for the outgoing Profibus are mounted on the equipment. The M12
connectors are designed in "reverse-key coding" (often referred to as B or W coding).
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
X12
X11
(5)
(5)
(6)
50360AXX
(1) Front panel

(2) M12 connector, incoming PROFIBUS (X11)
(3) Protection cap
(4) M12 socket, outgoing PROFIBUS (X12)
(5) M20 screw plug
(6) M25 screw plug
AF2 mounting flange corresponds to the recommendations from the Profibus guideline
No. 2.141 "Connection Technology for Profibus"
In contrast to the standard design, the switchable bus termination at the MFP.. module
may no longer be used if AF2 is used. Instead, a pluggable bus termination (M12) should
be used in place of the outgoing X12 bus connection at the last station!

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
AF2 Cabling and
Pin Assignment
2
3
BU
4
BN
1 2 4 5 8 9
RD
5
GN
RD
GN GY 6
GY
7
8
X11 X12
9
10
11
50367AXX
M12 connector X11

12
Pin 1 Not assigned
Pin 2 A-line PROFIBUS (incoming)
Pin 3 Not assigned
13
Pin 4 B-line PROFIBUS (incoming)
Pin 5 Shield or protective ground 14
Thread Shield or protective ground
M12 socket X12 15

Pin 1 5 V VP supply voltage for terminating resistor
Pin 2 A-line PROFIBUS (outgoing)
16
Pin 3 DGND reference potential to VP (Pin1)
Pin 4 B-line PROFIBUS (outgoing)
Pin 5 Shield or protective ground
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
i
P Hz
AF3 Mounting As an alternative to the AF0 standard design, the AF3 mounting flange can be combined
Flange with field distributors for Profibus MFZ26D and MFZ28D.
AF3 features an M12 connection system for Profibus connection. An X11 connector for
the incoming and an X12 socket for the outgoing Profibus are mounted on the
equipment. The M12 connectors are designed in "reverse-key coding" (often referred to
as B or W coding).
In addition, AF3 features an M12 connecting plug X15 (4-pole, regular coding) for
supplying the 24 V supply voltage(s).
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
X12
X11
X15
(6)
(7)
(8)
50359AXX
(1) Front panel

(2) M12 connector, incoming PROFIBUS (X11)
(3) M12 socket, outgoing PROFIBUS (X12)
(4) Reduction
(5) M12 connector, 24 V voltage supply (X15)
(6) Protection cap
(7) M20 screw plug
(8) M25 screw plug
AF3 mounting flange corresponds to the recommendations from the Profibus guideline
No. 2.141 "Connection Technology for Profibus"
In contrast to the standard design, the switchable bus termination at the MFP.. module
may no longer be used if AF3 is used. Instead, a pluggable bus termination (M12) should
be used in place of the outgoing X12 bus connection at the last station!

kVA n
i
P Hz
1
AF3 Wiring and
Pin Assignment
GN RD BN BU GY BN BU WH BK 2
1 2 4 5 8 9 11 13 15 17
6
RD
7
GN
GY 8
X11 X12 10
11
X15 12
50368AXX
M12 connector X11

13
Pin 1 Not assigned
Pin 2 A-line PROFIBUS (incoming) 14
Pin 3 Not assigned
Pin 4 B-line PROFIBUS (incoming)
15
16
M12 socket X12
Pin 1 5 V VP supply voltage for terminating resistor
Pin 2 A-line PROFIBUS (outgoing)
17
Pin 3 DGND reference potential to VP (Pin1)
Pin 4 B-line PROFIBUS (outgoing) 18
19
M12 connector X15
Pin 1 24V - 24 V voltage supply for module electronics and sensors
20
Pin 2 V2I24 – 24 V voltage supply for actuators
Pin 3 GND - 0V24 - 24 V reference potential for module electronics and sensors
Pin 4 GND2 - 0V24 reference potential for actuators
21
22
kVA n
3 f Fieldbus Interfaces and Field Distributors with Integrated MQ.. Control
i
P Hz
3.28 Fieldbus Interfaces and Field Distributors with Integrated MQ.. Control
Modules of type MQ... are based on the same housing and fieldbus technology as the
MF.. modules; however, in addition they feature an integrated programmable controller.
04387AEN
Technical • Integrated fieldbus interface

Features • Programmable controller (IPOS, LOGODRIVE)
• Single positioning with NV26 proximity sensor
• Integrated I/O preprocessing and timers
• Protocol modification

kVA n
Fieldbus Interfaces and Field Distributors with Integrated MQ.. Control f 3
i
P Hz
1
Interface types MQ.../Z.1.. Fieldbus Interface
(in preparation) • with integrated control
2
3
InterBus MQI21A/Z11A MQI22A/Z11A MQI32A/Z11A
PROFIBUS MQP21D/Z21D MQP22D/Z21D MQP32D/Z21D
4
5
MQ.../Z.3.. Field Distributor
• with integrated control
6
no I/O 4 x I / 2 x O (M12) 6 x I (M12)
8
InterBus MQI21A/Z13A MQI22A/Z13A MQI32A/Z13A
PROFIBUS MQP21D/Z23D MQP22D/Z23D MQP32D/Z23D
9
MQ.../Z.6../AF. Field Distributor
• with integrated control, line protection and maintenance switch
10
11
12
InterBus MQI21A/Z16A/AF0 MQI22A/Z16A/AF0 MQI32A/Z16A/AF0
MQP21D/Z26D/AF0 MQP22D/Z26D/AF0 MQP32D/Z26D/AF0
PROFIBUS MQP21D/Z26D/AF2 MQP22D/Z26D/AF2 MQP32D/Z26D/AF2 13
MQP21D/Z26D/AF3 MQP22D/Z26D/AF3 MQP32D/Z26D/AF3
14
MQ.../MM.../Z.8../AF. Field Distributorwith integrated control, maintenance switch,
MOVIMOT® inverter 15
16
17
댴 MQI21A/MM..B/Z18A 0/AF0 MQI22A/MM..B/Z18A 0/AF0 MQI32A/MM..B/Z18A 0/AF0
InterBus
쑶 MQI21A/MM..B/Z18A 1/AF0 MQI22A/MM..B/Z18A 1/AF0 MQI32A/MM..B/Z18A 1/AF0 18
댴 MQP21D/MM..B/Z28D 0/AF0 MQP22D/MM..B/Z28D 0/AF0 MQP32D/MM..B/Z28D 0/AF0
쑶 MQP21D/MM..B/Z28D 1/AF0 MQP22D/MM..B/Z28D 1/AF0 MQP32D/MM..B/Z28D 1/AF0 19
PROFIBUS
22
kVA n
3 f Hybrid Cables
i
P Hz
3.29 Hybrid Cables

Function • Connecting field distributors with drives
• Combining power transmission, control voltage, and communication in one cable
jacket
• Ensuring optimum EMC shielding and cable impedances
• Delivered with pre-fabricated plug connection
Hybrid cable for connection between MF.../Z.3. or MF../.6. field distributor and
MOVIMOT®
• Part number: 0186 725 3
• Maximum cable length with MF.../Z.3. and cross-section reduction: 3 meter
• Maximum cable length with MF.../Z.3. without cross-section reduction: 30 meter
• Maximum cable length with MF.../Z.6.: 30 meter
50450AXX
Connection between field distributors MF.../Z.8. and AC motors

• Part number 0186 742 3
• Maximum cable length: 5 meter
50451AXX
Connection between field distributors MF…/Z.8. and AC motors with APG4 plug
connector
• Part number: 0186 741 5
03050AXX

kVA n
Hybrid Cables f 3
i
P Hz
1
Connection between field distributors MF…/Z.8. and AC motors with ASA4 plug
connector
• Part number: 0593 076 6 2
3
05020AXX
6
Connection between field distributors MF…/Z.8. and AC motors with IS plug

7
connector
8
10
05030AXX 11
MF...../Z.8.. 0/.... MF...../Z.8.. 1/.... 12
Field distributor in star Field distributor in delta connection
connection
Motor with IS lower part Hybrid cable part number Hybrid cable part number 13
Size DT71 – DT90 0593 278 5 0816 325 1
Motor with IS lower part Hybrid cable part number Hybrid cable part number
Size DV100 0593 755 8 0816 326 X 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
kVA n
3 f Hybrid Cables
i
P Hz
Mechanical
Design
A B
1
BK
BK BK L1
V1 U1 BK
WH OG L2
14 RS+
BK BK WH RD
BU RD WH GN 0V 24V
1 2
15 13 0V RS-
BK
BK L3
GNYE
2 W1 2
GNYE
03520AXX
A Connection between field distributors MF…/Z.8A and AC motors

(Part number 0186 742 3 + 0186 741 5)
B Connection between field distributor MF.../Z.3A or MF../.6A and MOVIMOT®
(Part number 0186 725 3)
1 Cumulative shield
2 Shield
• Supply core 4 x 1.5 mm2

• Control core pair 2 x 0.75 mm2
• Control core pair 3 x 0.75 mm2
– Insulation: TPE-E (polyester)
– Conductor: E-CU extra finely stranded conductor, single wire ≤ 0.1 mm
– Shield: made of tin-coated E-Cu wire.
• Overall diameter: ≤ 13 mm
Electrical • Conductor resistance for 1.5 mm2 (20 °C):max. 13 Ω/km

Characteristics • Conductor resistance for 0.75 mm2 (20 °C):max. 26 Ω/km
• Operating voltage for 1.5 mm core2: max. 750 V
• Operating voltage for 0.75 mm core2: max. 350 V
• Insulation resistance at 20 °C: min. 20 MΩ x km
Mechanical • Can be used in cat-track routing

Characteristics • Bending radius in cat-track 10 x diameter
in fixed installation 5 x diameter
Thermal • Processing and operation -30 °C to +90 °C

Characteristics • Transport and storage -40 °C to +90 °C
Chemical • Oil resistant to VDE 0472 Section 803 Testing method B

Characteristics • General fuel resistance (e.g. diesel, gasoline) to DIN ISO 6722 Part 1 and 2
• General resistance to acids, caustic solutions, cleaning materials
• General resistance to dust (e.g. bauxite, magnesite)
• Insulating and sheathing material is halogen-free based on VDE 0472 Part 815 and
silicon-free

Project Planning Process 4
1
4 Project Planning
4.1 Project Planning Process 2
3
Selection of Drive System
4
Variable Speed Fixed Speed

6
®
MOVIMOT ® MOVI-SWITCH
• Integrated frequency inverter • Fixed speed
• Integrated protection for motor and electronics • 1 direction of rotation
7
• Communication via RS - 485 • Control with 24 V signal
• Integrated TF evaluation
8
9
For further information
Control see Page 91
10
11
12
Binary control Via keypad Via fieldbus Via AS-i binary slave MLK11A 13
Technical data (see Page 45)
• 2 directions of rotation • Variable speed • Infinitely variable MOVIMOT® connection (see Page 142)
speeds
• 1 ramp
• 2 speeds
• 2 directions of rotation
• 1 ramp • Variable ramp
MLK 11A connection
Startup
(see Page 145)
(see Page 204)
14
Principle (see Page 96)
I ®
f1/f2
P R O F
K1b
K1a
PROCESS FIELD BUS
B U S 15
R
L
K1
16
MLG MBG
17
18
For further For further For further
information information information
see Page 88 see Page 89 see Page 90 19
05098AEN
20
21
22
4 Project Planning Process
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
R
L
Binary control
K1
Is the
®
MOVIMOT controlled No
directly with binary
control?
Yes
The MWA21A option
is required.
The binary signals are
processed in the switching
cabinet and sent to the
®
MOVIMOT by means of an
RS-485 signal.
It is possible to preset
an analog setpoint.

Connection (see Page 144)
Startup (see Page 201)
®
MOVIMOT requires
a 24 V supply Yes
Is this an external
supply?
No
The MLU option is required.

MLU
MOVIMOT ® connection (see page 142)

Startup with
binary control (see Page 196)
05099AEN

MLG MBG Via keypad 3
Is the 6
24 V supply Yes
external?
7
No
8
9
Is operation
carried out directly
Yes
in the 10
MOVIMOT ® ?
11
No 12
13
An MLU..A option is required.
Technical data (see Page 26) 14
MLU
15
16
17
18
® ®
The MOVIMOT The MOVIMOT
option MLG.A is required option MGB11A is required 19
(setpoint setter with integrated 24 V DC supply). (setpoint setter).
Technical data (see Page 27) Technical data (see Page 28)
MLG connection (see Page 143) MGB connection
®
(see Page 144) 20
®
MOVIMOT connection (see Page 142) MOVIMOT connection (see Page 142)
MBG
MLG Startup (see Page 198) Startup (see Page 198)
Operation (see Page 200)
Operation (see Page 200)
21
05100AEN
22
4 Project Planning Process
Via fieldbus
Design types
Possible for all

fieldbus systems
MF..22 4 inputs MF..32 6 inputs

4 inputs
2 outputs Wired over M12
2 outputs
Wired over M12 connector and
MF..21 Wired to terminals
connector and terminals terminals
Fibre optic cable with

Rugged line connector
MFI23B MFI33B only possible with
Interbus
Mounting position
Decentralized Use of field

Bus module installed assembly of
at MOVIMOT® distributor
bus module
Fieldbus module with Fieldbus module with

Bus module with Fieldbus module MF.../Z..6.. MF.../MM.../Z..8..
standard lower with MF.../Z..3.. field distributor field distributor
section Field distributor (with maintenance switch and (with maintenance switch
cable protection function) and MOVIMOT®)
®
P R O F I
PROCESS FIELD BUS
B U S
MFP../Z21. MFP../Z23. MFP../Z26. MFP../MM../Z28.
MFI../Z11. MFI../Z13. MFI../Z16. MFI../MM../Z18.
MFD../Z31. MFD../Z33. MFD../Z36. MFD../MM../Z38.
MFO../Z31. MFO../Z33. MFO../Z36. MFO./MM../Z38.
Technical data Page: 51-58 Page: 62 -63 Page: 64 -66 Page: 67-72
Unit design Page: 117-119 Page: 121 Page: 122 Page: 123
Connection Page: 147, 157, 166-170 Page: 148-150, 158-161,171 Page: 151-153, 162-165, Page: 151-153, 162-165,
172-173, 180-181 174-176, 182-184 177-179. 185-187 177-179. 185-187
Startup Page: 207-267 Page: 280 Page: 281 Page: 282
05101AEN

3
MOVI-SWITCH®
Directly via 24 V switching Via AS-i

Via a fieldbus connection
with fieldbus module
7
signal interface
10
11
12
13
14
15
RUN OK 16
17
Technical data (Page 37-44) Technical data (Page 37-44) Technical data (Page 37-44)
Unit design (Page 303) Unit design (Page 303) Unit design (Page 303)
Connection (Page 306-308) Connection (Page 309-310) Connection (Page 311-312) 18
Startup ( Page 313-314) Startup (Page 313-314) Startup (Page 313-314)
05102AEN 19
20
21
22
4 Decentralization Concepts
4.2 Decentralization Concepts

MOVIMOT® or • Connection of data line and 24 VDC to the fieldbus interface
MOVI-SWITCH® • Connection of systems cable directly on the motor
with Fieldbus
Interfacing • Connection of sensors and actuators possible via M12 connecting sockets or
terminals
(1) (2) PC
PLC TERMINAL
®
I
P R O F
PROCESS FIELD BUS
B U S
MF../Z.1 MF../Z.1
(3)
Re-
peater
~= (4)
1I / 1O RS-485 1I / 1O
(5)
® ®
MOVI-SWITCH MOVIMOT ® MOVI-SWITCH
3xI 1xO 3xI 1xO
50373AXX
(1) Communication
(2) Supply
(3) Fieldbus
(4) 24 V supply
(5) Supply (the drives are optionally equipped with plug connectors for daisychaining power)
Drive with ASA3 Drive with ASA3 Drive with ASA3

Decentralization Concepts 4
1
MOVIMOT®, Field • Standard field distributor for cost-efficient solutions
Distributor with • Connection of sensors and actuators only via M12 connecting sockets
Integrated 2
Fieldbus • Pre-fabricated cable with connectors to connect field distributor with MOVIMOT®
Interface • High operational reliability and electromagnetic compatibility
3
(1) (2) PC
PLC TERMINAL 4
5
®
I
6
P R O F
PROCESS FIELD BUS
B U S
7
MF... / Z.3 MF... / Z.3 MF... / Z.3
Re-
(3) 8
peater
~= (4)
(5)
9
10
(6)
11
12
13
14
®
MOVIMOT MOVIMOT ® MOVIMOT
®
4xI 2xO 4x 2x 4x 2x 15
16
17
50372AXX
(1) Communication
(2) (5) Supply
18
(3) Fieldbus
(4) 24 V supply
(6) Hybrid cable 19
20
21
22
MOVIMOT®, Field • Maintenance switch for disconnecting individual drives when bus is in operation
Distributor with • Circuit-breaker for protection of drive supply cable
Integrated
Fieldbus • Separate wiring space for power and signal level
Interface and • Connection of sensors and actuators possible via M12 connecting sockets or
Maintenance terminals
Switch • Pre-fabricated cable with connectors to connect field distributor with MOVIMOT®
• High operational reliability and electromagnetic compatibility
(1) (2) PC
PLC TERMINAL
®
I
P R O F
PROCESS FIELD BUS
B U S
MF... / Z.6. MF... / Z.6. MF... / Z.6.

Re-
(3)
peater
~= (4)
(5)
(6)
®
MOVIMOT MOVIMOT ® MOVIMOT
®
4xI 2xO 4x 2x 4x 2x
50364AXX
(1) Communication
(2) (5) Supply
(3) Fieldbus
(4) 24 V supply
(6) Hybrid cable

Decentralization Concepts 4
1
AC Motor, Field • Offset installation of frequency inverter, advantageous for inaccessible drives →
Distributor with simple maintenance
Integrated • Maintenance switch for disconnecting individual drives when bus is in operation 2
Fieldbus
Interface, • Pre-fabricated cable to connect field distributor with MOVIMOT® (with connectors on
Maintenance both ends) 3
Switch, and • Separate wiring space for power and signal level
MOVIMOT®
Frequency
• Connection of sensors and actuators possible via M12 connecting sockets or 4
terminals
Inverter
• High operational reliability and electromagnetic compatibility
5
(1) (2) PC
PLC TERMINAL 6
7
®
8
P R O F I
PROCESS FIELD BUS
B U S
9
MF.../ MM.../ Z.8. MF.../ MM.../ Z.8. MF.../ MM.../ Z.8.
10
Re-
(3)
peater
~= (4)
(5) 11
12
13
(6) 14
15
16
17
4xI 2xO 4x 2x 4x 2x
18
19
50376AXX
(1)
(2) (5)
Communication
Supply
20
(3) Fieldbus
(4) 24 V supply
(6) Hybrid cable 21
22
MOVIMOT® or • Simple connection with AS-i installation material

MOVI-SWITCH® • 24 VDC power supply via yellow AS-i cable
with AS-i
Interfacing • AS-i module can be installed directly on the drive
• Sensor connection possible via M12 connecting socket
• Connection of systems cable directly on the motor
• Functionality:
– Selection of preset setpoint values at MOVIMOT®
– Start, Stop with MOVI-SWITCH®
(1) (2) PC
PLC TERMINAL
®
P R O F I
PROCESS FIELD BUS
B U S
(3)
~=
MLK 11A
(4)
® ®
MOVI-SWITCH MOVIMOT ® MOVI-SWITCH
2xI 2xI 2xI
50375AXX
(1) Communication
(2) Supply
(3) AS-i
(4) Supply (the drives are optionally equipped with plug connectors for daisychaining power)
Drive with ASA3 Drive with ASA3 Drive with ASA3

Project Planning Examples – Decentralized Systems 4
1
4.3 Project Planning Examples – Decentralized Systems
Example 1 2
10
50423AXX
11
Objective 8 conveyor belts are placed in a row for the transport of cement bags. They have a
power demand each of 0.75 kW. The customer wants to specify speed from 50% to
12
100% via PROFIBUS.ize
A sensor attached to each conveyor belt detects when a new cement bag arrives on the 13
conveyor belt. During maintenance work, all conveyor belts are jointly disconnected
from the supply. The MOVIMOT® geared motors are freely accessible and located 2 m
from the field distributors. 14
MOVIMOT® The equipment description shows a power demand of 0.75 kW and a required speed 15
Selection setting range of 1:2.
According to the "MOVIMOT® Geared Motors" catalog, for example, a KA...DT80N4/ 16
MM07 with a setting range of 1:5 is selected. The energy generated during deceleration
of the conveyor belts is removed through the standard integrated BW1 braking resistor.
17
Fieldbus Interface A PLC with a PROFIBUS fieldbus interface is used for control. 1 sensor is mounted
Selection directly at the conveyor belts. 18
The Profibus interface is used with 4 additional digital inputs and 2 digital outputs via
M12 connector of type MFP22D. 19
Field Distributor MOVIMOT® geared motors are freely accessible, and all drives are jointly disconnected 20
Selection from the supply for maintenance work. Hence, a maintenance switch at the field
distributor is not required. Z23D field distributor is selected for the MFP22D Profibus
interface. 21
22
4 Project Planning Examples – Decentralized Systems
Hybrid Cable Each of the 8 MOVIMOT® geared motors has a rated current of 1.9 A. This results in a
Selection combined current of 15.2 A for 8 conveyor belts. For this purpose, the system designer
selected a 2.5 mm² supply line for the field distributors.
In case of the /Z23D field distributor, a cross-section reduction by one frame size
compared to the supply line may be selected for a maximum hybrid cable length of 3
meters. The cross section of the hybrid cables of the supply cores always measures 1.5
mm². A 2 m long hybrid cable is used.
Dimensioning the The following modules must be taken into account for dimensioning the 24 V supply:
24 V supply: • 8 MOVIMOT® with a current consumption each of 250 mA
• 8 MFP22D Profibus interfaces with a current consumption each of 150 mA
• 8 sensors with each 90 mA (based on information from the sensor manufacturer)
This results in a total current of 3.92 A. The external 24 V supply must be dimensioned
for this current.
Which components • 8 MOVIMOT® geared motors

must be ordered – e.g. KA...DT80N4/MM07B/BW1
from SEW?
• 8 field distributors with Profibus interface
– MFP22D/Z23D
• 8 hybrid cables between field distributor and MOVIMOT® geared motors with a cable
length of 2 m

1
Example 2
10
11
50476AXX
12
Objective 15 roller conveyors are placed in a row for the transport of automobile tires. They have
a power consumption each of 0.55 kW. The customer wants to specify the speed 13
between 33% and 100% via InterBus.
A sensor located at the front of each roller conveyor detects the transfer of a tire from 14
the previous roller conveyor. Another sensor at the end of the roller conveyor detects
the transfer to the following roller conveyor.
The roller conveyor is powered only if a tire is located on the conveyor. This is indicated 15
by a control light directly at the roller conveyor. For maintenance work, the roller
conveyors must individually be disconnected from the supply by means of a 16
maintenance switch. The MOVIMOT® geared motors are freely accessible and located
3 m from the field distributors.
17
MOVIMOT® The equipment description shows a power demand of 0.55 kW and a required speed
Selection setting range of 3:1. 18
®
According to the "MOVIMOT Geared Motors" catalog, for example, a RF...DT80K4/
MM05 with a setting range of 5:1 is selected. The energy generated during deceleration
of the roller conveyor is eliminated by the standard integrated BW1 braking resistor.
19
20
21
22
Fieldbus Interface An InterBus interface is used for control. 2 sensors (takeover and transfer of the tires)
Selection and 1 actuator (control light) are mounted directly on the roller conveyors.
MFI22A InterBus interface is used with 4 digital inputs and 2 digital outputs via M12
connector.
Field Distributor MOVIMOT® geared motors are freely accessible, and the drives are disconnected from
Selection the supply for maintenance work using a maintenance switch at the field distributor. A /
Z16A field distributor is selected for the MFI22A InterBus interface.
Hybrid Cable Each of the 15 MOVIMOT® motors has a rated current of 1.6 A. This results in a
Selection combined current of 24 A for 15 conveyor belts. For this purpose, the system designer
selected a 4 mm2 supply line for the field distributors.
The /Z16A field distributor features an integrated line protection switch in the
maintenance switch. The maximum hybrid cable length measures 30 m, even if a cross
section reduction is present. A 3 m long hybrid cable is used.
24 V Supply • 15 MOVIMOT® with a current consumption each of 250 mA
• 15 MFI22A Profibus interfaces with a current consumption each of 150 mA
• 15 actuators (control light) with each 200 mA (based on information from the light
manufacturer)
for this current.
Which components • 15 MOVIMOT® geared motors:

must be ordered – e.g. RF...DT80K4/MM05B/BW1
from SEW?
• 15 field distributors with Interbus interface:
– MFI22A/Z16A
• 15 hybrid cables between field distributor and MOVIMOT® with a cable length of 3 m

1
Example 3
10
11
12
13
14
15
50472AXX
16
Objective The two roller conveyors for the tire transport with a power demand each of 0.55 kW are
located in a cell together with a robot that picks up the tires from the roller conveyor and 17
mounts them on a wheel rim.
Positioning the tires on the roller conveyor is controlled by means of 6 sensors. Brake 18
motors with a speed setting range of 10:1 are to be used for the positioning task.
The control in the robot cell is carried out via a DeviceNet interface, which will also be
used to control the two roller conveyors. The switch cabinet of the robot cell does not 19
have sufficient space for the inverters of both roller conveyors. Therefore, field
distributors with integrated MOVIMOT® frequency inverters, which are mounted outside
the hazardous area of the robot, are to be used. They are located 5 m away from the
20
roller conveyors.
21
22
Selection of Motor The equipment description shows a power demand of 0.55 kW and a required speed
and MOVIMOT® setting range of 10:1. MOVIMOT® must be mounted on the field distributor.
Frequency Inverter A geared motor in delta connection is required. The method of connection of the motor
is implemented in the field distributor and, therefore, must be taken into consideration
when selecting the field distributor.
Since the MOVIMOT® frequency inverter is not mounted directly on the motor, the motor
must also be equipped with a TH thermostat to protect it from thermal overload.
Based on these requirements, the following geared motor is selected:
e.g. RF.... DT71D4/BMG/TH
Based on the selected motor and the method of connection, a MOVIMOT® of size MM05
is required. An additional braking resistor is not required since MOVIMOT® uses the
brake coil of the utilized braking motor as braking resistor.
Fieldbus Interface A DeviceNet interface is required for control. Six sensors are installed on each of the
Selection roller conveyors.
MFD32A DeviceNet interface with six digital inputs via M12 connector is used.
Field Distributor Since the roller conveyors are in the hazardous area of the robot, it was required to
Selection integrate the MOVIMOT® inverters in the field distributor.
Based on the selected MOVIMOT® of size MM05 and the selected fieldbus interface for
DeviceNet, the following field distributor is required: MFD32A/ MM05B/Z38A 1/AF1.
Hybrid Cable For the MFD32A/MM05B/Z38A 1/AF1 field distributor, the maximum length of the hybrid
Selection cable between motor and field distributor with mounted MOVIMOT® measures 5 m.
Hence, a 5 m long hybrid cable is selected.
24 V Supply • 2 MOVIMOT® frequency inverters with a current consumption each of 250 mA
for this current.
The voltage supply for the 2 MFD32A DeviceNet interfaces is carried out via DeviceNet.
Which components • 2 geared motors with brake and thermostat:

must be ordered – e.g. RF...DT 71D4 / BMG / TH
from SEW?
• 2 field distributors with DeviceNet interface and integrated MOVIMOT® frequency
inverter:
– MFD32A/MM05B/Z38A 1/AF0
• 2 hybrid cables between MFD32A/MM05B/Z38A 1/AF0 field distributor and motor
with 5 m cable length

Single Applications with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples 4
1
4.4 Single Applications with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples
Example 1 On/Off operation via AC input power supply with programmable speed and one direction 2
of rotation
• Clockwise rotation: Terminal R = "1" or counterclockwise: Terminal L = "1"
3
• Setpoint potentiometer f1 active (= terminal f1/f2 = "0")
• 24 VDC power supply via option MLU..A
4
(1)
5
MLU..A
6
7
L
L1
R
L2
L3 24V
CW (2) 8
10
11
50378AXX
(1) MLU..A option (mounted on terminal box)

(2) Example Clockwise 12
Example 2 Start/Stop, direction of rotation and two speeds can be programmed via 3 binary inputs
• 24 VDC power supply via option MLU..A 13
(1) 14
MLU..A
15
16
(2)
L1
L2
f1/f2
L
f1/f2
CCW
17
L3 R CW
24V
18
19
20
50379AXX
(1) MLU..A option (mounted on terminal box) CCW = Counterclockwise 21

(2) External CW = Clockwise
f1/f2 = Setpoint switch mode
22
4 Single Applications with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples
Example 3 Start/Stop, direction of rotation and two speeds via external controller (via binary inputs)
L1
L2 f1/f2
L3 L
R
24V
24 VDC (1)
50386AXX
(1) 24 VDC supply
Example 4 Control and setpoint setting via option "Setpoint adjuster MBG11A"
• e.g. enable, direction of rotation, and setpoint
MBG11A
1
2
3
4
RS+
L1 RS-
L2
L3 L
R
24V
24 VDC (1)
50383AXX
(1) 24 VDC supply

Single Applications with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples 4
1
Example 5 Control and setpoint setting via "MLG..A" option
2
• 24 VDC supply via MLG..A option
MLG..A 4
5
RS+
L1
L2
RS- 6
L3 L
R
24V 7
9
50380AXX
(1) MLG..A option (mounted on terminal box) 10
Example 6 Control via analog setpoint setting (MWA21A option) 11

24 VDC (1)
12
1 24 V
2 24 V
3
4 R 13
5 L
6 10 V
7 +
8 -
9
14
10
RS+ 11 RS+
L1 RS- 12 RS-
L2
L
MWA21A
15
L3
R
24V
16
17
18
6 10 V 6 10 V
(2) 2kΩ∗
7 +
(3)
7 + 19
8 - 8 -
9 9
10 10
MWA21A MWA21A
20
50389AXX
(1) 24VDC supply (3) floating analog signal 21

(2) Potentiometer utilizing 10 V reference voltage
* alternatively 5kΩ
22
4 Group Drives with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples
Example 7 Control and setpoint setting via RS-485 interface
RS+
L1 RS- RS-485
L2
L3 L
R
24V
24 VDC (1)
50388AXX
4.5 Group Drives with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples

Example 1 Control and setpoint setting of each individual drive up to 15 drives (selectable via
address) via RS-485 interface
RS+
L1 RS-
L2
L3 L
R
24V
RS+
L1 RS- RS-485
L2
L3 L
R
24V
24 VDC (1)
50385AXX
(1) 24 VDC supply

Group Drives with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples 4
1
Example 2 Control via analog setpoint setting for all drives (relational synchronous operation) via
option MWA21A
2
RS+
L1 RS-
L2
L3 L
R
3
24V
24 VDC (1)
4
1 24 V
2 24 V
3
4 R
5
5 L
6 10 V
7 +
8 - 6
9 MWA21A
10
RS+ 11 RS+
L1 RS- 12 RS- 7
L2
L3 L
R
24V 8
10
11
6 10 V 6 10 V
12
(2) 2kΩ∗
7 + 7 +
8 - (3)
8 -
9
10
9
10 13
MWA21A MWA21A
50387AXX 14
(1) 24VDC supply
(2) Potentiometer utilizing 10 V reference voltage
* alternatively 5kΩ 15
(3) Floating analog signal
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
4 Group Drives with MOVIMOT® – Application Examples
Example 3 Control and setpoint setting for all drives (relational synchronous operation) via option
"Setpoint adjuster MBG11A"
MBG11A
RS+
24V
RS-
24 VDC (1)
RS+
L1 RS-
L2
L3 L
R
24V
RS+
L1 RS-
L2
L3 L
R
24V
50384AXX
(1) 24 VDC supply

Installation Planning under EMC Aspects 4
1
4.6 Installation Planning under EMC Aspects
Information on The correct choice of lines, proper grounding, and functioning potential compensation 2
the Arrangement are critical for successful installation of decentral drives.
and Installation of On principle, the relevant standards must be applied. In addition, special attention
Installation should be paid to the following points: 3
Components
• Equipotential bonding
– low-impedance HF-capable potential compensation must be provided 4
independently of the functional ground (protective ground connection) (see also
VDE 0113 or VDE 0100 Part 540) through, for example:
– flat contact surface connection of metal (system) components
5
– use of ribbon cable ground connections (HF strand)
6

7

8
03643AXX
– The cable shield of data lines may not be used for potential compensation. 9
• Data Lines and 24 V Supply
– should be run separately from lines subject to interference (e.g. trigger lines of 10
solenoid valves, motor leads)
• Field distributor 11
– it is recommended that the pre-fabricated SEW hybrid cables especially designed
for the connection between field distributor and motor be used for this connection.
12
13
14
15
03047AXX
16
• Cable glands
– a screwed gland with large flat contact surface shield contacts must be used
(observe the notes on selection and appropriate assembly of cable glands) 17
• Cable shield
– must feature good EMC characteristics (high screening attenuation) 18
– should not be intended solely as mechanic protection of the cable
– must be connected at flat contact surface cable ends with metal housing of the
unit (via EMC metal cable glands) (observe the notes on selection and 19
appropriate assembly of cable glands)
• Additional information can be found in SEW's documentation "Drive 20
Engineering – Practical Implementation, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
in Drive Engineering."
21
22
4 Installation Planning under EMC Aspects
Example for the If MF.. fieldbus module and MOVIMOT® are installed separately, the RS-485 connection
Connection of must be implemented as follows:
Fieldbus Module • carrying the 24VDC supply
MF.. and
MOVIMOT® – use shielded lines
– apply shield to the housing of both units via EMC metal cable glands (for notes on
selection and appropriate assembly of cable glands see page 26 and page 27)
– strands twisted in pairs (see the following figure)
RS+ RS+
RS- GND
24V 24V
GND RS-
03477AXX
• without carrying the 24VDC supply

if MOVIMOT® is supplied with 24 VDC using a separate lead wire, the RS-485
connection must be designed as follows:
• use shielded lines
• apply shield to the housing of both units via EMC metal cable glands (observe the
notes on selection and appropriate assembly of cable glands)
• the GND reference potential must generally be carried for the RS-485 interface
• strands twisted (see the following figure)
RS+
RS-
GND
03479AXX

Installation Planning under EMC Aspects 4
1
Metal Cable Metal cable glands must fulfill certain minimum requirements. It must be possible to
Glands connect the shield over a wide contact surface and contact it in a simple way. The
following figure shows 3 commercial designs: 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
05026AXX
18
19
20
21
22
5 Installation Planning under EMC Aspects
5 MOVIMOT® Safety Notes

• Never install or operate damaged products. In the event of damage, please
submit a complaint to the transport company immediately.
• In compliance with existing regulations (e.g. EN 60204, VBG 4, DIN-VDE 0100/0113/

0160), only electrical specialists with accident prevention training are permitted to
perform installation, startup, and service work on MOVIMOT®.
• Make sure that preventive measures and protection devices are in accordance
with applicable regulations (e.g. EN 60204 or EN 50178).
– Necessary protective measures: Grounding of MOVIMOT®
• Before removing the terminal box cover, disconnect the MOVIMOT® from the
supply system. Dangerous voltages may still be present for up to 1 minute after
shutdown.
• The terminal box cover must remain closed during operation.
• The fact that the Status LED and other display elements are no longer illuminated
does not indicate that the unit has been disconnected from the power supply and
does not carry any voltage.
• Mechanical blocking or unit-internal safety functions can cause a motor

standstill. Removing the cause of this problem or performing a reset can result in
the motor re-starting on its own. If this is not permitted for safety reasons: Before
correcting the fault, MOVIMOT® must be disconnected from the supply
system.
• Caution: MOVIMOT® is not suitable for hoist applications!
• Caution – Danger of burns: The MOVIMOT® surface temperature (especially of the

heat sink) can exceed 60 °C during operation!
• If MOVIMOT® is used for emergency stops, the supplemental documentation

"Safe Shutdown for MOVIMOT®" must be observed.
Intended Usage These MOVIMOT® (geared) motors are intended for industrial equipment. They
conform to valid standards and regulations and meet the requirements of the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.
Technical data and information on approved conditions on site can be found on the
nameplate and in these operating instructions.
These details must be observed!

Additional Safety Notes for Field Distributors 5
1
5.1 Additional Safety Notes for Field Distributors
MFZ.3. 2
• Before removing the bus module or the motor connector, disconnect the unit
from the supply system. Dangerous voltages may still be present for up to 1
minute after shutdown. 3
• During operation, the bus module and the connector of the hybrid cable must be
connected and screwed onto the field distributor. 4
MFZ.6. 5
• Before removing the terminal box cover for the power supply connector,
disconnect the unit from the supply system. Dangerous voltages may still be
present for up to 1 minute after shutdown. 6
• Caution: The switch disconnects only the MOVIMOT® from the supply system.
After operating the maintenance switch, the terminals of the field distributor 7
are still connected with the supply system.
• During operation, the terminal box cover for the power supply connector and the
connector of the hybrid cable must be connected and screwed onto the field
8
distributor.
9
MFZ.8A.
• Before removing the terminal box cover for the power supply connector or the 10
MOVIMOT® inverter, disconnect the unit from the supply system. Dangerous
voltages may still be present for up to 1 minute after shutdown.
11
• Caution: The maintenance switch disconnects only the connected motor from
the supply system. After operating the maintenance switch, the terminals of
the field distributor are still connected with the supply system. 12
• During operation, the terminal box cover for the power supply connector, the
MOVIMOT® inverter, and the connector of the hybrid cable must be connected and
fastened onto the field distributor.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
6 MOVIMOT® Basic Unit (Inverter)
6 Unit Design
6.1 MOVIMOT® Basic Unit (Inverter)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
02589AXX
1. Designation of connection method

2. Terminal box
3. Connection plug between connection unit and inverter
4. Terminal box cover with inverter and heat sink
5. Connection unit with terminals
6. Electronics terminal strip X2
7. Connection of brake coil (X3). For motors without brake: Connection of internal brake resistor BW. (standard)
8. Power supply connection L1, L2, L3 (X3) (suitable for 2 x 4 mm2)
9. Screws for connecting protective ground 댷
10. Cable glands
11. Electronics name plate
12. Safety hood for inverter electronics
13. Setpoint potentiometer f1 (not shown), accessible through a screwed gland on the top of the connection box cover
14. Setpoint switch f2 (green)
15. Switch t1 for integrator ramp (white)
16. DIP switch S1 for setting bus address, motor protection, DC braking, PWM frequency
17. Status LED (visible from the top of the connection box cover, see the section "Operation and Service")

MOVIMOT® Basic Unit (Inverter) 6
1
MOVIMOT® Nameplates, Type Designations
Motor nameplate
(Example) 2
SEW-EURODRIVE Bruchsal / Germany 3

Typ KA77 DT 90L4 BMG MM15 MLU 3~ IEC 34
Nr. 010012345.6.00.00 IM B3
KW 1,5 / 50 HZ
50Hz V 380-500
cosϕ 0,99
3,50
4
A
60Hz V 380-500 A 3,50
r/min 22/1400 IP 54 Kl F
Bremse V 230 Nm 20 Gleichrichter 5
kg 73 Ma 665 Nm i 64,75 :1
Schmierstoff Made in Germany 184103 3.14 6

05113AXX
KA 77 DT 90L4 BMG/MM15/MLU 7
Additional feature Inverter 1)
8
MOVITRAC® frequency inverter
9
Additional feature Motor (brake)
10
Motor size, number of poles
Motor series 11
Gear unit size2) 12

Gear unit series2)
13
1) Only factory-installed options are listed on the nameplate.
2) Detailed information about geared motor combinations can be found in the catalog "MOVIMOT Geared
Motors."
14
15
MLU..
MM15
16
17
18
19
K77 DT 90L4BMG 20
04145AXX
21
22
6 MOVIMOT® Basic Unit (Inverter)
Inverter Nameplate
(Example)
50457AXX
MM 15 B – 503 – 00
Design (00 = Standard)
Connection type (3 = 3-phase)
Connection voltage
(50 = 380...500 VAC)
(23 = 200...240 VAC)
Version B
Motor power (15 = 1.5 kW)
MOVIMOT® series

Fieldbus Interfaces 6
1
MF.21 Fieldbus 2
Module
1
7
2
8
50353AXX
1 Diagnostics LEDs
2 Diagnostics interface (below the screw fitting) 9
10
MF.22, MF.32
Fieldbus Module 11
4
12
13
14
15
3 16
1
2 17
50352AXX
1 Diagnostics LEDs 18
2 Diagnostics interface (below the screw fitting)
3 M12 connection sockets
4 Status LED
19
20
21
22
6 Fieldbus Interfaces
Underside of
Module (all MF..
types) 1
01802CDE
1 Connection to module carrier

2 DIP switch (for MFD and MFO: 2 DIP switches)
3 Gasket
Unit Design of
MFZ… Module
Carrier 2
1 3
5
3 4 6
01805CXX
1 Terminal strip (X20)

2 Floating terminal block for 24 V through-wiring
(Caution! Do not use for shielding!)
3 M20 cable gland
4 M12 cable gland
5 Grounding terminal
6 Only DeviceNet and CANopen Micro-style connector (X11)
2 EMC cable glands are part of the scope of delivery.

1
MFI23B, MFI33B
Fieldbus Module
(Rugged-Line 2
Plug Connector)

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

50320AXX
1 Diagnostics LEDs
10
2 Diagnostics interface (below the screw fitting)
3 M12 connection sockets
4 Status LED 11
5 Rugged-line connection "Remote IN" (incoming remote bus and 24 VDC supply)
6 Rugged-line connection "Remote OUT" (outgoing remote bus and 24 VDC supply)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Type Designations / Nameplates MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces

Example for Type
Designation
MFP 21 D / Z21 D
Version
Module carrier:
Z11 = for InterBus
Z21 = for PROFIBUS
Z31 = for DeviceNet and CanOpen
Version
21 = 4 x I / 2 x O (connection via terminals)

22 = 4 x I / 2 x O (connection via plug connectors + terminals)
32 = 6 x I (connection via plug connectors + terminals)
23 = 4 x I / 2 x O (fiber optic rugged line, only for InterBus)

33 = 6 x I (fiber optic rugged line, only for InterBus)
MFI... = InterBus
MFP... = PROFIBUS
MFD... = DeviceNet
MFO.. = CanOpen
Example for Bus module:

Nameplates
Sach.Nr.8236240 .10 .10Nr. 0151264

Profibusmodul MFP 21D
50460AXX
Module carrier:
Sach.Nr.8236275 .-- .-- Nr. 0151269

Busmodul MFP 21D
50459AXX

Field Distributors 6
1
6.3 Field Distributors
MF.../Z.3. Field 2
Distributor
3
6 7
4
6
1 1
9 7
2 2
8
8
3
9
3
10
4
11
4
12
5
05108AXX
13
1 2 x M16 x 1.5 (2 EMC cable glands are part of scope of delivery)
2 2 x M25 x 1.5
3
4
2 x M20 x 1.5
Connection potential compensation
14
5 Connection hybrid cable, connection to MOVIMOT® (X9)
6 Terminals for fieldbus connections (X20)
7 Terminals for 24 V connection (X21) 15
8 Terminals for power supply and PE connection (X1)
9 Only DeviceNet and CANopen Micro-style connector
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
6 Field Distributors
MF.../Z.6. Field
Distributor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 2 8
05244AXX
1 Connection hybrid cable, connection to MOVIMOT® (X9)

2 Connection potential compensation
3 Maintenance switch with line protection (triple lockable, color: black/red)
Ø 5...Ø 8 mm
I ON I ON
0 OFF
0 OFF
03546AXX
4 Terminals for power supply and PE connection (X1)
5 2 x M25 x 1.5
6 Terminals for bus, sensor, actuator, 24 V connection (X20)
7 6 x M20 x 1.5 (2 EMC cable glands are part of scope of delivery)
8 Terminal block for 24 V through-wiring (X29), internally connected with 24 V connection on X20
9 Pluggable terminal "Safety Power" for 24 V MOVIMOT® supply (X40)

Field Distributors 6
1
MF.../MM../Z.8.
Field Distributor
2
5
2
6 6
1
8
8
9
4
9 10
11
12
3 5 10 7
13
05241AXX
1 Terminals for power supply and PE connection (X1) 14

2 Maintenance switch (triple lockable, color: black/red)
Ø 5...Ø 8 mm 15
I ON I ON
0 OFF
0 OFF
16
17
03546AXX
3 Cable gland 2 x M25 x 1.5
4 Terminals for bus, sensor, actuator, 24 V connection (X20) 18
5 6 x M20 x 1.5 cable gland (2 EMC cable glands are part of scope of delivery)
6 MOVIMOT® frequency inverter
7 Connection potential compensation
8 Connection hybrid cable, connection to AC motor (X9) 19
9 Terminal block for 24 V through-wiring (X29), internally connected with 24 V connection on X20
10 Pluggable terminal "Safety Power" for 24 V MOVIMOT® supply (X40)
20
21
22
6 Field Distributors
Field Distributor Type Designations

Example MF../Z.3.
Type Designation
MFP21D/Z23D
Connection module
Z13A = For InterBus
Z23D = For PROFIBUS
Fieldbus interface
MFI... = InterBus
MFP... = PROFIBUS
MFD.. = DeviceNet
MFO.. = CANopen
Example MF.../Z6.
Type Designation
MFP21D/Z26D/AF0
M12 plug connector for 24 VDC supply
Connection module
Z16A = for InterBus
Z26D = for PROFIBUS
Z36A = for DeviceNet and CANopen
Fieldbus interface
MFI... = InterBus
MFP... = PROFIBUS
MFD.. = DeviceNet
MFO.. = CANopen
Example MF.../
MM../Z.8. Type
MFP22D/MM22B/Z28D 0/AF0
Designation
M12 plug connector for 24 VDC supply
Method of connection
0 = 댴 / 1= 쑶
Connection module
Z18A = For InterBus
Z28D = For PROFIBUS
MOVIMOT® inverter
Fieldbus interface
MFI... = InterBus
MFP... = PROFIBUS
MFD.. = DeviceNet
MFO.. = CANopen

MOVIMOT® Geared Motors 7
1
7 Mechanical Installation
7.1 MOVIMOT® Geared Motors 2
Before You Begin MOVIMOT® may only be installed if:
• The entries on the nameplate of the drive match the supply voltage 3
• The drive is not damaged (no damage resulting from transport or storage)
• The following requirements have been properly fulfilled: 4
– Ambient temperature between –25 °C and +40 °C (remember that the
temperature range of the gear unit may be restricted → operating instructions for 5
the gear unit)
– No oils, acids, gases, vapors, radiation, etc.
6
Installation
Tolerances
Shaft end Flanges
7
Diametric tolerances in accordance with DIN 748 Centering shoulder tolerances in accordance with
• ISO k6 with ∅ ≤ 50mm DIN 42948 8
• ISO k6 with ∅ > 50mm • ISO j6 with ∅ ≤ 230 mm
• ISO j6 with ∅ > 230 mm
(Center hole in accordance with DIN 332, shape
DR)
9
Installing • MOVIMOT® may only be mounted or installed in the specified position on a level, 10
MOVIMOT® vibration-free and torsionally rigid support structure.
• Thoroughly remove any anti-corrosion agents from the shaft ends (use a
commercially available solvent). Do not allow the solvent to penetrate the bearings 11
and shaft seals – this could cause material damage!
• Carefully align MOVIMOT® and driven machine to avoid placing any unacceptable 12
strain on motor shafts (observe permissible overhung load and axial thrust data!).
• Do not butt or hammer the shaft end.
13
• Protect motors in vertical mounting positions with an appropriate cover against
penetration of objects or fluids !
• Ensure unobstructed cooling air supply and that air heated by other devices cannot 14
be drawn in.
• Balance components for subsequent mounting on the shaft with half the key 15
(outgoing shafts are balanced with half the key).
• Any condensation drain holes will be sealed by plastic plugs and should only be
opened if necessary.
16
• Open condensation drain holes are not permitted, as this would invalidate higher
classes of enclosure. 17
18
19
20
21
22
7 MOVIMOT® Geared Motors
Installation in • Use suitable screwed cable glands for the supply leads (use reducing adapters if
Damp Areas or in necessary).
Open Air • Coat the threads of screwed cable glands and sealing plugs with sealant, and tighten
well – apply another coating of sealant.
• Properly seal the cable inlets.
• Clean the sealing faces of connection box covers well before re-assembly.
• Apply protective coating agent if necessary.
• Check that the type of enclosure is authorized (refer to the nameplate).

MOVIMOT® Retrofit Sets 7
1
7.2 MOVIMOT® Retrofit Sets
Scope of Delivery • Verify that you have the correct retrofit set for your motor (see the section "Technical 2
Data and Dimension Drawings")
• Use the following figures to verify that all parts of the retrofit set are present
3
Scope of Delivery Parts C – I are assembled for delivery
of Retrofit Set
4
MM03 – MM15
5
A
D
I 6
B
7
C H
8
F H
9
E
10
G
11
01082DXX
A Terminal box gasket D Connection cable with right-angle plug G 4 screws 12

B 4 screws E Cover with inverter H 2 screws
C Terminal box F Terminal board I PE screw
13
Scope of Delivery Parts C – I are delivered mounted
of Retrofit Set 14
MM22 – MM30
A
15
16
C
B H
17
I
F 18
H
E 19
G 20
02661BXX
A Terminal box gasket E Cover with inverter G 4 screws 21

B 4 screws F Terminal board with connection cable H 2 screws
C Terminal box I PE screw
22
7 MOVIMOT® Retrofit Sets
Assembly • Remove power supply from motor and prevent unintentional restart.
• Remove terminal box cover and power supply cable.
• For the result, see the following figure:
*
01083BXX
* Brake control only with brake motors (optional).
• If brake control is present, remove leads from brake control (1) (2).
• Remove upper nuts (4) and jumpers (3).
• Tighten lower nuts (5).
3 4
1 2
02662BXX

1
• Remove bottom part of terminal box (6).
• Remove old gasket (7).
2
• Clean gasket contact surface (8).
• Place new gasket (A) on terminal box (C).
3
C 4
6
5
A
8 7 8
03324AXX
• Mount terminal box (C) and secure with 4 screws (B).

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
C B
01087DXX
16
Caution: Ensure correct position and placement of gasket (cutout for terminal block on
terminal box bottom must point in direction of fan guard)! 17
18
19
20
21
22
With MOVIMOT® retrofit set MM03 – MM15

• Install right-angle plug harness (D) on terminal studs (9) and tighten nuts.
RD
BK
BK
W2 - 1
U2 - 2
V2 - 3
W1 - 4
V1 - 5
U1 - 6
BK
BK
BK
9 D 9 D
01088FXX

• Install connection cable of terminal board (F) on terminal studs (9) and tighten nuts.
9 F
02663BXX

1
2
• Place right-angle plug harness (D) on terminal board (F).
• Position terminal board (F) and secure with two screws (H). Caution: Do not 3
damage or pinch cable.
6
H
7
D 8
9
F
01096DXX
10
With MOVIMOT® retrofit set MM22 – MM30 11

• Position terminal board (F) and secure with 2 screws (H). Caution: Do not damage
or pinch cable.
12
13
14
15
H 16
17
18
F
02666BXX
19
20
21
22
• Only for brake motors: Connect brake cable (1).

– red on terminal X3:13
– white on terminal X3:14
– blue on terminal X3:15
01097DXX

MLU..A / MLG..A / MLK11A Option 7
1
7.3 MLU..A / MLG..A / MLK11A Option
Scope of Delivery • MLU..A / MLG..A / MLK11A top (B) 2
• 2 screws (A)
• Cable entry screw (D) 3
• MLU..A / MLG..A / MLK11A bottom (E)
Check the completeness of the scope of delivery.
4
Required tools • Crosstip screwdriver (size 1)
5
• Slotted head screwdriver (4.5 mm)
• Allen wrench (8 mm)
6
Assembly 1. Remove a screwed gland plug cap on the MOVIMOT® terminal box.
7
2. Affix seal (G) to the bottom (E) with adhesive.
3. Attach lower section (E) to MOVIMOT® terminal box and fasten it with cable entry
screw (D). 8
®
4. Guide connection cable (C) through cable entry screw (D) into the MOVIMOT
terminal box. 9
5. Place top (B) on bottom (E) and fasten it with 2 screws (A).
10
Option may be assembled only in the position shown in the following figure!
11
A
12
B
13
C 14
D 15
E 16
G 17
18
19
20
21
01391CXX
22

Installation on Break through knock out at MFZ… bottom:
MOVIMOT®
Connection Box
A
.
Z..
MF
01787BXX

1
Installation on MOVIMOT®:
B 2
...
MF 5
6
...
MF
7
10
11
.
Z..
MF
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
05112AXX
22
Installation on
Site
2 mm
10
mm
51
82,5 mm
M4
.
Z..
MF
...
MF
...
MF
50466AXX

MOVIMOT® Installation Guidelines 8
1
8 Electrical Installation
8.1 MOVIMOT® Installation Guidelines 2
Connect Power • The nominal voltage and frequency of MOVIMOT® must correspond to the data for
Supply Lines the supply system. 3
• Line cross-section: according to input current Iin for rated power (see Technical
Data).
4
• Permitted line cross-section of MOVIMOT® terminals (does not apply to field
distributor)
5
Power terminals Control terminals
1.0 mm2 – 4.0 mm2 (2 x 4.0 mm2) 0.25 mm2 – 1.0 mm2 (2 x 0.75 mm2)
AWG17 – AWG10 (2 x AWG10) AWG22 – AWG17 (2 x AWG18) 6
• Use conductor end sleeves without insulation collar
(DIN 46228 Part 1, material E-CU) 7
• Install line safety at the beginning of the supply system cable behind supply bus
junction (see the section "Connection of MOVIMOT® Basic Unit," F11/F12/F13). Use 8
D, D0, NH or circuit breakers. The fusible rating should be selected in accordance
with the cross-section of the cable.
• It is not permissible to use a conventional residual-current-operated circuit breaker
9
as a protection device. Universal current-sensitive residual-current-operated circuit
breakers (tripping current 300 mA) are permitted as a protective device. During 10
normal operation of MOVIMOT®, earth-leakage currents of > 3.5 mA can occur.
• Use contactor switch contacts to switch MOVIMOT® from utilization category AC-3
according to IEC 158. 11
• SEW recommends using earth-leakage monitors with pulse-code measurement for
power supply systems with non-grounded star point (IT systems). This step will 12
prevent accidental triggering of the earth-leakage monitor by means of the grounding
capacities of the inverter.
13
Altitude above MOVIMOT® drives with supply voltages of 380 to 500 V can be used at altitudes above
1000 m MSL 2000 m MSL up to 4000 m MSL1 under the following peripheral conditions. 14
• The rated continuous power is reduced based on the reduced cooling above 1000 m
(see the section Technical Data and Dimension Drawings). 15
• Above 200 m MSL, the air and creeping distances are only sufficient for overvoltage
class 2. If the installation requires overvoltage class 3, an additional external
overvoltage protection must be used to ensure that overvoltage surges are limited to 16
2.5 kV phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. If safe electrical separation is required,
it must be implemented outside the units at altitudes above 2000 m MSL (presently,
safe electrical separation is not specified by a standard outside the EU)
17
• The permitted rated supply voltage of 3 x 500 V up to 2000 m MSL is reduced by 6 V
for every 100 m to a maximum of 3 x 380 V at 4000 m MSL. 18
19
20
21
1. The maximum altitude is limited by creeping distances and flameproof components such as electrolytic
capacitors.
22
8 MOVIMOT® Installation Guidelines
Connecting 24 • Supply MOVIMOT® either via external 24 VDC or via the MLU..A or MLG..A options.
VDC supply
Conventional • Connect the required control leads (e.g. CW/Stop, CCW/Stop, f1/f2 setpoint change)
Control (via • Use cables shielded as control cables and run separate from power cables.
Binary
Commands)
Control via RS- with bus master PLC, MLG..A, MBG11A, MWA21A option or MF... fieldbus interfaces
485 Interface • Caution: Connect only one bus master.
• Use twisted pair shielded cables as control leads and route them separate from
power current cables.
Protection • MOVIMOT® drives have integrated protection elements against overloads, external
Devices elements will not be necessary.
UL-Compliant • Only use copper cables with the following temperature ranges as connection leads:
Installation Temperature range: 60 / 75 °C
• The permissible tightening torques of the MOVIMOT® power terminals are:
– 1.5 Nm (13.3 lb.in)
• MOVIMOT® are suited for operation on voltage supply systems with grounded star
(TN and TT systems) supplying a maximum supply current of 5,000 AAC and having
a maximum rated voltage of 240 VAC (MM03B-233 to MM22B-233) or 500 VAC
(MM03-503 to MM30B-503). The rating for the fuses is not to exceed the following
values:
– MM03B-503 to MM07B-503: 25 A/600 V
– MM11B-503 to MM30B-503: 35 A/600 V
– MM03B-233 to MM22B-233: 35 A/250 V
• As external 24 VDC voltage source use only tested units with a limited output voltage
(Vmax = 30 VDC) and limited output current (I ≤ 8 A).
• UL certification does not apply to operation in voltage power systems with a non-
grounded star point (IT systems).

Additional Installation Instructions for Fieldbus Interfaces, Field 8
Distributors
1
8.2 Additional Installation Instructions for Fieldbus Interfaces, Field Distributors
Current Carrying • Cage clamp terminals X20 (gray): 12 A maximum continuous current 2
Capacity of • Screw terminals X1, X21 (green): 32 A maximum continuous current
Terminals
Daisychaining 24 3
VDC Supply
Voltage for MFZ.1
Module Carrier:
4
5
05236AXX
• Two M4 x 12 studs are located on the connection part of the 24 VDC supply. These 6
studs can be used for daisychaining the 24 VDC supply voltage.
• The studs have a current carrying capacity of 16 A.
7
Additional
Connection
Options with 8
MFZ.6 and MFZ.8
Field Distributor
9
10
05237AXX
• The connection part of the 24 VDC supply comprises a X29 terminal block with two
11
M4 x 12 studs and a pluggable X40 terminal.
• The X29 terminal block can be used alternatively to X20 terminal for daisychaining 12
the 24 VDC supply voltage. The two studs are connected internally with the 24 V
connection on terminal X20.
13
Terminal assignment:
No. Name Function
14
X29 1 24 V 24 V power supply for module electronics and sensors
(stud, jumpered with terminal X20/11)
2 GND 0V24 reference potential for module electronics and sensors
(stud, jumpered with terminal X20/13)
15
• The pluggable X40 terminal ("Safety Power") is intended for the external 24 VDC
supply of the MOVIMOT® inverter via a safety reset device.
16
Terminal assignment:
No. Name Function
17
X40 1 24 V 24 V voltage supply for MOVIMOT® for disconnection with safety reset device
2 GND 0V24 reference potential for MOVIMOT® for disconnection with safety reset device 18
This allows a MOVIMOT® drive to be used in safety applications. Corresponding
information can be found in the documentation "Safe Disconnection for MOVIMOT®." 19
®
• X29/1 and X40/1 are factory-jumpered, so that the MOVIMOT inverter is supplied
by the same 24 VDC voltage as the fieldbus module. 20
• The current carrying capacity of the two studs is 16 A.
• The current carrying capacity of screw terminal X40 is: 10 A.
21
22
8 Additional Installation Instructions for Fieldbus Interfaces, Field
Distributors
Transfer Rates > With transfer rates > 1.5 Mbps it must be observed that the PROFIBUS connecting leads
1.5 Mbps (in in the inside of the field distributor are kept as short as possible and have the same
connection with length for incoming and outgoing bus.
MFP..D)
Wiring Check Before connecting power to the system for the first time, it is necessary to perform a
wiring check to prevent damage to persons, systems and equipment caused by
wiring faults.
• Remove all bus modules from the connecting module.
• Disconnect all MOVIMOT® inverters from the connecting module (only with MFZ.8).
• Disconnect all plug connectors of the motor circuits (hybrid cable) from the field
distributor.
• Perform an insulation test of the wiring in accordance with valid national standards.
• Check the grounding.
• Check whether supply system cable and 24 VDC cable are insulated.
• Check whether supply system cable and communications cable are insulated.
• Check the polarity of the 24 VDC cable.
• Check the polarity of the communications cable.
• Check the supply phase sequence.
• Ensure equipotential bonding between the fieldbus interfaces.
After the Wiring • Plug on and fasten all motor circuits (hybrid cable).
Check • Insert the bus modules and fasten screws.
• Plug on all MOVIMOT® inverters and fasten screws (only with MFZ.8).
• Install all terminal box covers.
• Seal plug connections not in use.

Additional Installation Instructions for Fieldbus Interfaces, Field 8
Distributors
1
EMC Metal Cable EMC metal cable glands supplied by SEW must be installed as follows:
Glands
2
7
(1)
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
03432BXX 20
(1) Caution: Cut off insulation foil, but do not fold it back
21
22
8 Connection of MOVIMOT® Basic Unit
8.3 Connection of MOVIMOT® Basic Unit
Functions of the CW and CCW

L1 terminals under binary control
L2
L3
24V
24V
PE
R
L
L
F11/F12/F13
K11
CW direction of CCW direction of
rotation activated rotation activated
Functions of f1/f2 terminals

L1
L2
L3
MOVIMOT ®
f1/f2
f1/f2
24V
24V
R
R
L
L
Contact closed = ready for operation
Setpoint f1 Setpoint f2
activated activated
Setpoint switchover f1/f2
Functions of CW and CCW Terminals

controlled via RS-485 interface / field distributor
24 VDC supply
Both directions
Ready signal
M
24V
BMG are enabled

CCW/stop
3~
R
L
RS-485
CW/stop
Only CW direction enabled.

24V
Setpoint selection for CCW rotation

R
L
K1
causes the drive to stop.

white
blue
red
RS+
f1/f2
24V
K1a
K1b
RS-
Only CCW direction enabled.

14
13
24V
15
R
L
Setpoint selection for CW rotation

R
L
causes the drive to stop.

+ 24 V supply
DC
= external or Drive is inhibited or
- MLU../MLG..option. brought to a stop
24V
R
L
BW braking resistor
(only for MOVIMOT®
without brake)
05293AEN

Connection of MLU11A / MLU21A Option 8
1
8.4 Connection of MLU11A / MLU21A Option
YE (MLU11A) / BN (MLU21A) 2
YE (MLU11A) / BN (MLU21A)
3
L1
L2
L3
MOVIMOT ®
L1
L2
4
MLU..A 5
24V
7
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
24V
14
13
15
R
L
8
RD
9
BU
03272BXX
10
8.5 Connection of MLG11A / MLG21A Option 11

YE (MLG11A) / BN (MLG21A)
12
YE (MLG11A) / BN (MLG21A)
13
L1
L2
L3
MOVIMOT ®
L1
L2
14
MLG..A
15
16
RS+
24V
RS-
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
24V
14
13
15
17
R
L
OG
GN
RD
BU
(1)
18
19
03182BXX 20
®
(1) Observe Enable of direction of rotation (see the section "Connection of MOVIMOT Basic Unit"
Functions of terminals CW/Stop, CCW/Stop with controller via RS-485 interface)
21
22
8 Connection of MBG11A Option
8.6 Connection of MBG11A Option

L1
L2
L3
MOVIMOT ®
MBG11A
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
24V
RS+
14
13
15
24V
RS-
R
L
(1)
24 VDC
(2) 댷
03183BXX
8.7 Connection of MWA21A Option
24VDC
L1
L2
L3
MOVIMOT ® MWA21A
1 24V
2 24V
3
4 R
5 L
6 10V
(3) 7 +
8 -
9
10
11 RS+
12 RS-
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
24V
14
13
15
R
L
(1)
(2) 댷 (2) 댷
03184BXX
(1) Observe Enable of direction of rotation (see the section "Connection of MOVIMOT® Basic Unit"
(3)
Potentiometer
with use of 10V 6 10V 6 10V
MWA21A
MWA21A
reference voltage
2 kΩ ∗ 7 + Potential-free 7 +
∗ can be 5 kΩ 8 - analog signal 8 -
9
9
10 10

Connection of AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A 8
1
8.8 Connection of AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A
2
L1
L2
L3
MOVIMOT ® MLK11A
(1) (2) 3
AS-i - 0V
N.C. DI2
4 3 3 4
4
5 N.C.
1 2 2 1
AS-i + 24V 5
N.C.
DI3
6
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
24V
14
13
15
R
L
7
WH
BK/BU
BK/RD 8
BK/WH
RD
BU
9
05118AXX
10
(1) AS-i connection
(2) Connection for 2 external sensors
11
8.9 Connection RS-485 Bus Master
12
L1
L2
L3
MOVIMOT ® RS-485
13
Busmaster
(SPS / PLC)
14
15
16
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
24V
RS-485
14
13
15
R
L
17
(1)
18
24 VDC
(3)
댷 댷 19
(2) (2)
03177AXX 20
®
(1) Observe Enable of direction of rotation (see the section "Connection of MOVIMOT Basic Unit"
(2) EMC metal cable gland 21
(3) Potential compensation MOVIMOT®/ RS-485 master
22
8 Connection of MDG11A Option
8.10 Connection of MDG11A Option

• The diagnostic unit must be connected prior to the possible occurrence of a fault
since the MOVIMOT® fault messages are not saved and the information is lost when
the 24 V supply is disconnected.
• Connecting the MDG11A to an RS-485 bus with several MOVIMOT® is not
permitted.
• The diagnostic unit can be used if the MOVIMOT® is controlled via terminals (=
address 0 [S1/1-S1/4 = OFF]).
• Using the diagnostic unit with setpoint setting via RS-485 interface is not permitted.
L1
L2
L3
MOVIMOT ®
MDG11A
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
24V
RS+
14
13
15
24V
RS-
R
L
댷
(1)
03404BXX

Connection with PROFIBUS 8
1
8.11 Connection with PROFIBUS
2
Connecting MFZ21 with MOVIMOT®
3
MFZ21 (PROFIBUS) X20 (3) MOVIMOT®
4
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
MFZ21
+ 0 1
5
RS+
f1/f2
K1b
K1a
24V
RS-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
R
L
GND
GND
GND
DGND
DGND
RS+
24 V
24 V
24 V
DGND
RS-
res.
res.
VP
B
B
A
(2)
댷 댷
7
MFP... + -
(1) (1)
A A
B B
24 VDC 8
PROFIBUS DP
04914AXX
9
0 = Potential level 0
1 = Potential level 1 10
(1) For separate assembly of MFZ21 / MOVIMOT®:
Connect the shield of the RS-485 cable via an EMC metal cable gland on MFZ and MOVIMOT® housing. 11
(2) Ensure equipotential bonding between all bus stations.
(3) Assignment of terminals 19-36 starting on page 188
12
Terminal assignment
No. Name Direction Function 13
X20 1 A Input PROFIBUS-DP data line A (incoming)
2 B Input PROFIBUS-DP data line B (incoming) 14
3 DGND - Data reference potential for PROFIBUS-DP (only for test purposes)
4 A Output PROFIBUS-DP data line A (outgoing)
5 B Output PROFIBUS-DP data line B (outgoing)
15
7 - - Reserved 16
8 VP Output +5 V output (max. 10 mA) (only for test purposes)
9 DGND - Reference potential for VP (terminal 8) (only for test purposes) 17
10 - - Reserved
11 24 V Input 24 V power supply for module electronics and sensors
12 24 V Output 24 V power supply (jumpered with terminal X20/11)
18
13 GND - 0V24 reference potential for module electronics and sensors
14 GND - 0V24 reference potential for module electronics and sensors 19
®
15 24 V Output 24 V power supply for MOVIMOT
16 Communications link to MOVIMOT® terminal RS+
RS+ Output
20
17 RS- Output Communications link to MOVIMOT® terminal RS-
18 GND - 0V24 reference potential for MOVIMOT®
21
22
8 Connection with PROFIBUS
Connecting MFZ23 Field Distributor with MFP...

MFZ23 connection module with MFP21, MFP22 fieldbus module and two separate 24 VDC voltage circuits
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
MFP21 X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ MFP22 2
≤ 2.5 mm (AWG12)
X20
≤ 4 mm 2 (AWG10)
X21
MFZ23 0 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
res.
DGND
res.
DGND
GND2
VP
GND2
B
DGND
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
A
GND
GND
2 x 24 VDC
A
A A
B PROFIBUS DP B
(1) (1)
24V1 24V1
GND1 GND1
24V2 24V2
GND2 GND2
04916AXX
Terminal assignment
No. Name Direction Function
2 B Input PROFIBUS-DP data line B (incoming)
4 - - Reserved
9 - - Reserved
10 DGND - Reference potential for VP (terminal 5) (only for test purposes)
X21 1 24 V Input 24 V power supply for module electronics and sensors
5 V2I24 Input 24 V power supply for actuators (digital outputs)
6 V2I24 Output 24 V power supply for actuators (digital outputs) jumpered with terminal X21/5
7 GND2 - 0V24V reference potential for actuators

1
MFZ23 connection module with MFP21, MFP22 fieldbus module and one common 24 VDC voltage circuit
L3 L3 2
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
3
MFP21 X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10)
4
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ MFP22 ≤ 2.5 mm2 (AWG12)
2
≤ 4 mm (AWG10) 5
X20 X21
MFZ23 0 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6
DGND
DGND
res.
DGND
GND2
res
VP
GND2
B
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
A
GND
GND
.
A
1 x 24 VDC
A
PROFIBUS DP
A 7
B B
(1) (1)
24V 24V
GND GND 8
04917AXX
9
10
11
Terminal assignment
12
13
4 - - Reserved 14
6 A Output PROFIBUS-DP data line A (outgoing) 15
9 - - Reserved
16
X21 1 24 V Input 24 V power supply for module electronics and sensors 17
18
19
8 GND2 - 0V24V reference potential for actuators 20
21
22
MFZ23 connection module with MFP32 fieldbus module
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10)
MFZ23
PE
PE
MFP32
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ 2
≤ 2.5 mm (AWG12)
2
≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
X20 X21
0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
res.
DGND
res.
DGND
VP
DGND
res.
res.
res.
res.
1 x 24 VDC B
24 V
24 V
A
GND
GND
A
A A
B PROFIBUS DP B
(1) (1)
24V 24V
GND GND
04918AXX
Terminal assignment
4 - - Reserved
9 - - Reserved
5 - - Reserved
6 - - Reserved
7 - - Reserved
8 - - Reserved

1
Connecting MFZ26, MFZ28 Field Distributor with MFP...
MFZ26, MFZ28 connection modules connected with MFP21, MFP22 fieldbus module and two separate 24
VDC voltage circuits 2
L3 L3
L2 L2 3
L1 L1
PE PE
4
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm (AWG10)2
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
MFZ26 5
(2)
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24
1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
2
34 35 36 6
MFP21 X20
≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12)
MFP22
MFZ28
0 1 2 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DGND
DGND
DGND
GND2
GND2
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
GND
GND
VP
res.
res.
A
B
A
2 x 24 VDC 8
A A
PROFIBUS
B B
(1) DP (1)
24V1 24V1
GND1 GND1
9
24V2 24V2
GND2 GND2 10
04919AXX
11
(1) EMC metal cable gland 12

13
Terminal assignment
No. Name Direction Function 14
0
15
5 B Output PROFIBUS-DP data line B (outgoing) 16
7 - - Reserved 17
10 - - Reserved
18
12 24 V Output 24 V power supply (jumpered with terminal X20/11) 19
17 GND2 - 0V24V reference potential for voltage potential
21
22
MFZ26, MFZ28 connection module with MFP22 fieldbus module and one common 24 VDC voltage circuit
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10) ≥ 10 mm
2
PE
PE
(AWG8)
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
(2)
MFZ26
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
MFP21 1 2
MFP22 ≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12) X20
0 1 2
MFZ28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DGND
DGND
DGND
GND2
GND2
GND
GND
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
VP
res.
res.
A
B
A
1 x 24 VDC A A
PROFIBUS
B B
(1) DP (1)
24V 24V
GND GND
04922AXX

Terminal assignment
7 - - Reserved
10 - - Reserved

1
MFZ26, MFZ28 connection module with MFP32 fieldbus module
L3 L3 2
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE
3
PE
2
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
≥ 10 mm 2 4
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
(AWG8)
(2)
MFZ26
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
5
MFP32 1
≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12) X20

6
0 1
MFZ28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 7
res.
res.
res.
res.
DGND
DGND
DGND
24 V
24 V
GND
GND
VP
res.
res.
A
B
A
1 x 24 VDC A
PROFIBUS
A 8
B B
(1) DP (1)
24V 24V
GND GND 9
04925AXX
10
11
12
Terminal assignment
13
2 B Input PROFIBUS-DP data line B (incoming) 14
4 A Output PROFIBUS-DP data line A (outgoing) 15
16
7 - - Reserved
9 DGND - Reference potential for VP (terminal 8) (only for test purposes) 17
10 - - Reserved
11 24 V Input 24 V power supply for module electronics and sensors 18
19
15 V2I24 - Reserved
16 V2I24 - Reserved 20
17 GND2- - Reserved
18 GND2 - Reserved 21
22
8 Connection with InterBus (Copper Line)
8.12 Connection with InterBus (Copper Line)

Types of the The MFI can be connected to the remote bus as well as the installation remote bus. The
InterBus Interface principal distinguishing feature between these types of interfaces can be found in the
structure of the bus cable. Normal remote bus cables consist of 2-core cables twisted
together in 3 pairs for data transmission. In the installation remote bus, the wires for data
transmission may be supplemented by the power supply for the MFI and active sensors.
Remote Bus The typical remote bus connection for IP20 units involves a 9-pin sub D plug. The
Connection following wiring examples show how MFIs are connected to units on the input or output
end using 9-pin sub D plugs.
INTERBUS
Master
max. 400 m (max. 1,200 ft.)

MFI
UL
RC
BA
MFI INTERBUS
TR
RD
SYS-F
max. 12.8 km
(max. 8 miles)
MM
max. 400 m (max. 1,200 ft.)
MFI
UL
RC
BA
MFI INTERBUS
TR
RD
SYS-F
MM
MFI
UL
RC
BA
MFI INTERBUS
TR
RD
SYS-F
MM
05027AEN

Connection with InterBus (Copper Line) 8
1
Line Type The incoming remote bus is picked off from the preceding module using a 9-pin Sub D
D9-MFI (9-pin Sub plug.
D to MFI) 2
Line Type The subsequent InterBus module is connected using a 9-pin Sub D socket.
MFI-D9 (MFI to 9- 3
pin Sub D) MFZ11 (INTERBUS) (4)
X20 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 4
0 1 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
-
6
BN
GN
BN
YE
YE
GN
PK
GY
PK
GY
24 VDC
+
(1) (2) (2)

(3) 7
DO 1
1 1 DO
6 2 /DO 6
6 /DO 1
7 3
8 4
9 5
DI
/DI
2
7
2 DI
6 2
7 3 8
7 8 4
3 /DI 9 5
COM
3 COM
5
(5)
9 (7) (6)
9
(7)
05120AXX
10
(1) Incoming remote bus cable
(2) Connect shield of incoming/outgoing remote bus cable with EMC metal cable gland at MFZ housing 11
(3) Outgoing remote bus cable
(5) 9-pole Sub-D connector
(6) 9-pole Sub-D socket 12
(7) Strain relief
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Installation An 8-core cable is used for the installation remote bus. In addition to the strands for
Remote Bus transmitting data, the cable also carries the 24 VDC supply voltage for the MFI bus
Connection electronics and the active sensors.
Installation remote bus

Incoming max. 50m
remote bus
IBS IP CBK MFI MFI MFI
Installation UL
RC
BA
UL
RC
BA
UL
RC
BA
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
remote bus TR
RD
SYS-F
TR
RD
SYS-F
TR
RD
SYS-F
terminal
MM MM MM
24V supply
Outgoing/continuing voltage
remote bus
05029AEN
The maximum number of modules which can be connected to an installation remote bus
terminal depends on the current consumption of the individual modules.
Line Type A special InterBus installation remote bus terminal is required in order to open an
CCO-I → MFI installation remote bus segment. The installation remote bus can be connected to this
(IP 65 Round bus terminal (e.g. type IBS IP CBK 1/24F) using an IP 65 round plug connector (type
Connector → MFI CCO-I).
Terminals)
MFZ11 (InterBus) (4)
X20 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
GN
GY
BN
YE
PK
(1) (2) (3)

1 DO 1
2 98
7 /DO 2
3 6 3
4 5 DI
/DI 4
COM 5
RBST 9
YE/GN
PE 6
RD
+24 V 7
BU
0V 8
05122AXX
(1) IP 65 round connector

(2) incoming installation remote bus cable
(3) Connect shield of installation remote bus cable with an EMC cable gland on the
MFZ housing.

1
MFZ11A Connection with MOVIMOT® (in combination with MFI21, MFI22, MFI23)
2
MFZ11 (INTERBUS) X20 (3) MOVIMOT®
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
3
MFZ11
+ 0 1
4
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
24V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
R
L
GND
GND
GND
RS+
24 V
24 V
24 V
RS-
(2) 5
(1) (1)
MFI... + - 6
/DO
DO
/DI
DI
COM
/DO
DO
/DI
DI
COM
24 VDC
04927AXX 7
(1) For separate assembly of MFZ11 / MOVIMOT®: 9

Connect the shield of the RS-485 cable via an EMC metal cable gland on MFZ and MOVIMOT® housing.
10
Terminal assignment
11
X20 1 /DO Input Incoming remote bus, negated data send direction (green)
2 DO Input Incoming remote bus, data send direction (yellow)
12
3 /DI Input Incoming remote bus, negated data receive direction (pink)
4 DI Input Incoming remote bus, data receive direction (gray) 13
5 COM - Reference potential (brown)
6 /DO Output Outgoing remote bus, negated data send direction (green)
14
7 DO Output Outgoing remote bus, data send direction (yellow)
8 /DI Output Outgoing remote bus, negated data receive direction (pink)
9 DI Output Outgoing remote bus, data receive direction (gray)
15
10 COM - Reference potential (brown)
11 24 V Input 24 V power supply for module electronics and sensors 16
17
15 24 V Output 24 V power supply for MOVIMOT®
16 RS+ Output Communications link to MOVIMOT® terminal RS+ 18
18 GND - 0V24 reference potential for MOVIMOT® 19
20
21
22
Connecting Field Distributor MFZ13 with MFI... (Installation Remote Bus Connection)
Line Type IP 65 round connector → MFI terminals
CCO-I → MFI A special InterBus installation remote bus terminal is required in order to open an
installation remote bus segment. The installation remote bus can be connected to this
bus terminal (e.g. type IBS IP CBK 1/24F) using an IP 65 round plug connector (type
CCO-I).
MFZ13 connection module with MFI21/MFI22 fieldbus module
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
2
MFI21 X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ MFI22 ≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12)
2
≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
X20 X21
MFZ13 0 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YE/GN
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
COM
COM
/DI
DI
/DI
DI
GND
/DO
DO
/DO
DO
GND2
GND2
GND
24V2 24V2
GND2 GND2
YE
GN
GY
PK
BN
BU
RD
(1) (1)
(2)
DO 1
/DO 2 (3)
DI 3 BU Kl.3/X21
/DI 4 RD
Kl.1/X21
YE
COM 5 Kl.2/X20
GN
Kl.1/X20
GY
RBST 9 Kl.4/X20
PK
PE 6 Kl.3/X20
+24V 7 BN Kl.5/X20
YE/GN PE
0V 8
1
2 9 8
(4) 3 7
6
4 5
04928AXX

(2) Incoming installation remote bus cable
(3) Outgoing installation remote bus cable

1
Terminal assignment
2
3 /DI Input Incoming remote bus, negated data receive direction (pink) 3
4 DI Input Incoming remote bus, data receive direction (gray)
5 COM - Reference potential (brown) 4
5
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
MFZ13 connection module with fieldbus module MFI32
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
2
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
MFZ13 MFI32
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ ≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12)
X20
≤ 4 mm 2 (AWG10)
X21
YE/GN
0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
24 V
24 V
res.
res.
res.
res.
GND
GND
COM
COM
/DI
DI
/DI
DI
/DO
DO
/DO
DO
BU
RD
GY
GN
YE
BN
PK
(1) (1)
(2)
DO 1
/DO 2 (3)
DI 3 BU Kl.3/X21
/DI 4 RD
Kl.1/X21
YE
COM 5 Kl.2/X20
GN
Kl.1/X20
GY
RBST 9 Kl.4/X20
PK
PE 6 Kl.3/X20
+24V 7 BN Kl.5/X20
YE/GN PE
0V 8
1
2 9 8
(4) 3 7
6
4 5
04929AXX


1
Terminal assignment
2
5
5 - - Reserved
8
6 - - Reserved
7 - - Reserved 9
8 - - Reserved
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Connecting MFZ16, MFZ18 Field Distributor with MFI... (Installation Remote Bus Connection)
Line type CCO-I IP 65 round connector → MFI terminals
→ MFI A special InterBus installation remote bus terminal is required in order to open an
installation remote bus segment. The installation remote bus can be connected to this
bus terminal (e.g. type IBS IP CBK 1/24F) using an IP 65 round plug connector (type
CCO-I).
MFZ16, MFZ18 connection modules with MFI21/MFI22 fieldbus module
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
2
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
MFI21
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
MFZ16 MFI22
(5)
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
YE/GN
1 2
2
≤ 2.5 mm (AWG12) X20
0 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
MFZ18
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
COM
COM
/DI
DI
/DI
DI
GND
/DO
DO
/DO
DO
GND2
GND2
GND
24V2 24V2
GND2 GND2
GY
GN
RD
PK
BU
YE
BN
(1) (1)
(2)
DO 1
/DO 2 (3)
DI 3 BU Kl.13
/DI 4 RD
Kl.11
YE
COM 5 Kl.2
GN
Kl.1
GY
RBST 9 Kl.4
PK
PE 6 Kl.3
+24V 7 BN Kl.5
YE/GN PE
0V 8
1
2 9 8
(4) 3 7
6
4 5
04930AXX
0 = Potential level 0 (1) EMC metal cable gland

1 = Potential level 1 (2) incoming installation remote bus cable
(3) outgoing installation remote bus cable
2 = Potential level 2 (4) IP 65 round connector

1
Terminal assignment
2
5
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
MFZ16, MFZ18 connection modules with MFI32 fieldbus module
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
2
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
MFZ16
MFI32 (5)
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
YE/GN
1
2
≤ 2.5 mm (AWG12)
0 1 X20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
MFZ18
24 V
24 V
res.
res.
res.
res.
GND
GND
COM
COM
/DI
DI
/DI
DI
/DO
DO
/DO
DO
RD
YE
BN
GN
PK
GY
BU
(1) (1)
(2)
DO 1
/DO 2 (3)
DI 3 BU Kl.13
/DI 4 RD
Kl.11
YE
COM 5 Kl.2
GN
Kl.1
GY
RBST 9 Kl.4
PK
PE 6 Kl.3
+24V 7 BN Kl.5
YE/GN PE
0V 8
1
2 9 8
7
(4) 3
6
4 5
04931AXX


1
Terminal assignment
2
5
15 - - Reserved
8
16 - - Reserved
17 - - Reserved 9
18 - - Reserved
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
8 Connection with InterBus (Fiber Optic)
8.13 Connection with InterBus (Fiber Optic)

Connection of • InterBus and 24 VDC supply are installed via rugged-line plug connector.
Communication
and 24 VDC
Supply
50326AXX
1) Fiber optic (InterBus remote bus)

2) US1/US2 voltage supply
• The cable connectors are not part of the SEW scope of delivery (manufactured by
Phoenix-Contact).
• It is absolutely necessary to observe the project planning and installation
guidelines for the rugged-line connection technology of Phoenix-Contact.
Fitting the Bus The cable connectors can be connected to the bus module in four different ways (see
Cable Connector the following figure).
Remote OUT
DI4
DI5
(X12)
DI2
(1) DI4
DI5
(2) DI0
DI1
DI3
DI2
G
DIA US1
IB
DI3 US2
RC 1
DI0 RL TR
FO
2
FO
RD
US
RB
TE
DI1
IN
F
MFI S-
SY
G
DIA US1
IB
US2
RC 1
FO
RL TR 2
FO
RD
US
RB
TE
IN
F
MFI S-
SY
Remote OUT
(X12)
Remote IN
(X11)
Remote IN
(X11)
DI4
Remote OUT
(3) DI2
DI3
DI5
(4) DI4
DI5
(X12)
DI0 DI2
DI1 DI3
DI0
G
DIA US1
IB
US2 DI1
RC 1
FO
RL TR 2 G
US
RD
FO DUIAS1
RB IB
US2
TE
RC
IN
F 1
MFI S-
SY FO
RL TR 2
FO
RD
US
RB
TE
IN
F
MFI S-
SY
Remote OUT
(X12)
Remote IN
(X11) Remote IN
(X11)
50323AXX
• Cable connectors may only be connected with de-energized equipment.

• Do not use the clip of the cable connector to pull the connector into the correct
position.
• Caution: Cable connectors not in use must be fitted with a dummy plug to
ensure the enclosure!

Connection with InterBus (Fiber Optic) 8
1
Assembly • Switch off the voltage.
• Open the clip (1.) and sufficiently insert the connector into the module electronics (2.)
2
• Close the clip (3.) DI4
DI5 DI4
DI2
DI0
DI3 DI2
DI5
3
DI3
DI1 DI0
G 1
DIA US
IB 2
US DI1
RC 1
FO G
RL TR 2 DIA US
1
FO
4
US IB
RB RD US
2
TE
I IN RC 1
MF S-F FO
SY
RL TR 2
US FO
RB RD
TE
I IN
MF S-F
SY
5
2.
6
3.
7
1.
8
50325AXX.eps
9
Disassembly • Switch off the voltage.
• Open the clip and pull the connector away from the module in the direction of the
cables.
10
Supply Voltage • The two available supply voltages are used as follows:
11
– US1: 24 VDC supply of bus logic, sensors and MOVIMOT®
– US2: Supply of actuators (for current consumption see Technical Data) 12
Contact
DI4
Assignment DI5 13
DI2
DI3
DI0
DI1
IB
DIA
G
RC
US
1
US
2
FO
1
14
RL TR 2
US FO
RB RD
TE
I IN
MF S-F
SY
15
16
17
18
+US1 +US1 +US1 +US1

19
US1 US1 US1 US1
+US2 +US2 +US2 +US2
US2 US2 US2 US2
20
50327AXX
21
22
Cable Installation Cabling for the plug connectors requires maintaining a distance that is dependent upon
the bending radius of the cable type being used (observe the project planning and
installation guidelines for rugged-line connection technology from Phoenix-Contact).
Rmin
Rmin
50329AXX
Line Lengths < 1 m Line lengths < of 1 m are only permitted using the special pre-fabricated IBS RL
CONNECTION-LK cable link (observe the project planning and installation guidelines
for rugged-line connection technology from Phoenix-Contact).

1
Sample Topology
of an InterBus
Design with INTERBUS- 2
Rugged-Line Interface module
3
MFI. 3B MFI. 3B
4
5
Rugged-Line bus terminal
6
Remote bus
Dummy 7
connector
Remote bus spur line
MFI. 3B 8
Bus segment (max. 400 m in copper
Remote bus (max. 12.8 km in copper and polymer fiber)
Max. 35m/50m in polymer fiber)
9
Remote bus
10
11
Remote bus
12
MFI. 3B MFI. 3B
13
14
15
Remote bus
Dummy
16
connector
04800AEN 17
If fiber optic cables are installed as permanent polymer fibers, a maximum distance of
50 m can be linked between two remote bus stations. If flexible polymer fibers are used, 18
the maximum distance is 35 m.
19
20
21
22
MFZ11A Connection with MOVIMOT® (in combination with MFI23 and MFI33)
MFZ11 (INTERBUS) X20 (3) MOVIMOT®
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
MFZ11
+ 0 1
24V
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
RS-
R
L
GND
RS+
24 V
RS-
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
(2)
MFI23 (1) (1)

MFI33
04782AXX

Terminal assignment
X20 1 - 14 – – Reserved
15 24 V Output 24 V power supply for MOVIMOT®
16 RS+ Output Communications link to MOVIMOT® terminal RS+
18 GND – 0V24 reference potential for MOVIMOT®

1
Connecting MFZ13 Field Distributor with MFI23 + MFI33
L3 L3 2
L2 L2
L1 L1
3
PE PE
2
X1 ≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ ≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12)
X20
≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
X21
2 5
MFZ13 MFI23 0 1 2
MFI33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7
6
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
04784AXX
7
9
Connecting MFZ16, MFZ18 Field Distributor with MFI23 + MFI33
10
L3 L3
L2
L2
11
L1 L1
PE PE
12
2
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
MFZ16 (1) 13
+ 19 20 21 22 23
X20
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 14
1 2
MFI23 2
≤ 2.5 mm (AWG12)
MFI33 15
0 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
MFZ18
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
res.
16
04786AXX
18
19
20
21
22
8 Connection with DeviceNet
8.14 Connection with DeviceNet
DeviceNet The MFD can be connected either via a multi-port or via a T-connector. If the connection
Connection with MFD is removed, the remaining stations will not be influenced, and the bus can
Capabilities remain active.
MFD MFD MFD
UL UL UL
Bus terminating RC
BA
RC
BA
RC
BA
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
resistor TR
RD
TR
RD
TR
RD
SYS-F SYS-F SYS-F
T-connector T-connector T-connector
MFD MFD MFD
UL UL UL
RC RC RC
BA BA BA
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
TR TR TR
RD RD RD
SYS-F SYS-F SYS-F
Bus terminating
resistor
Multi-Port
120
05028AEN

Connection with DeviceNet 8
1
MFZ31 Connection with MOVIMOT® (in combination with DeviceNet)
2
MFZ31 (DeviceNet) X20 (3) MOVIMOT®
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
MFZ31 3
+ 0 1
4
24V
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
R
L
GND
GND
GND
RS+
24 V
24 V
RS-
24V
(2)
5
댷 댷
MFD... (1) (1)
+ -
6
1: DRAIN
4 3 2: V+ 24 VDC
X11 5 3: V-
1 2 4: CAN_H
7
5: CAN_L
04932AXX 8

10
11
Terminal
assignment 12
X20 1 V- Input DeviceNet reference potential 0V24 13
2 CAN_L Input/output CAN_L data line
3 DRAIN Input Equipotential bonding 14
4 CAN_H Input/output CAN_H data line
5 V+ Input DeviceNet power supply 24 V
6 - - Reserved
15
7 - - Reserved
8 - - Reserved 16
9 - - Reserved
10 - - Reserved 17
18
15 24 V Output 24 V power supply for MOVIMOT® 19
®
16 RS+ Output Communications link to MOVIMOT terminal RS+
20
18 GND - 0V24 reference potential for MOVIMOT®
21
22
Connecting MFZ33 Field Distributor with MFD...

MFZ33 connection module with MFD21, MFD22 fieldbus module and two separate 24 VDC voltage circuits
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
MFD21 X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ MFD22
2
≤ 2.5 mm (AWG12) ≤ 4 mm 2 (AWG10)
X20 X21
MFZ33 0 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND2
GND2
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
GND
GND
2 x 24 VDC
24V1 24V1
GND1 GND1
24V2 24V2
GND2 GND2
1: DRAIN
4 3 2: V+
5 X11 3: V-
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
05008AXX
Terminal assignment
X20 1 V- Input DeviceNet reference potential 0V24
3 DRAIN Input Equipotential bonding
6-10 - - Reserved

1
MFZ33 connection module with MFD21, MFD22 fieldbus module and one common 24 VDC voltage circuit
L3 L3
2
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE 3
MFD21 X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10)
4
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ MFD22 ≤ 2.5 mm2 (AWG12)
X20
2
≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
X2
5
MFZ33 0 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6
GND2
GND2
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
GND
GND
1 x 24 VDC
7
24V 24V
GND GND 8
10
1: DRAIN
4 3 2: V+ 11
5 X11 3: V-
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
12
05009AXX
14
Terminal
assignment 15
X20 1 V- Input DeviceNet reference potential 0V24 16
17
6-10 - - Reserved 18
20
22
MFZ33 connection module with MFD32 fieldbus module
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10)
MFZ33 MFD32
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ 2
≤ 2.5 mm (AWG12)
2
≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
X20 X21
0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
res.
res.
res.
res.
24 V
24 V
GND
GND
1 x 24 VDC
24V 24V
GND GND
1: DRAIN
4 3 2: V+
5 X11 3: V-
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
05010AXX
Terminal
assignment
6-10 - - Reserved
5-8 - - Reserved

1
Connecting MFZ36, MFZ38 Field Distributor with MFD
MFZ36, MFZ38 connection modules with MFD21, MFD22 fieldbus module and two separate 24 VDC voltage
circuits 2
L3 L3
L2 L2 3
L1 L1
PE PE
4
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm 2 (AWG10)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
MFZ36 (1)
5
+
MFD21
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
2
34 35 36
6
MFD22 X20
≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12)
MFZ38
1 2 3 4 5
0
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
13 14 15 16
2
17 18
7
GND2
GND2
GND
GND
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
2 x 24 VDC 24V1 24V1 8
GND1 GND1
24V2 24V2
GND2 GND2
9
10
1: DRAIN
4 3 2: V+
5 X11 3: V- 11
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
04996AXX 12
(1) Assignment of terminals 19-36 starting on page 188 14

Terminal
assignment
15
16
4 CAN_H Input/output CAN_H data line 17
19
15 V2I24 Input 24 V power supply for actuators (digital outputs) 20
16 V2I24 Output 24 V power supply for actuator (digital outputs) jumpered with terminal X20/15
22
MFZ36, MFZ38 connection modules with MFD21, MFD22 fieldbus module and one common 24 VDC voltage
circuit:
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
2
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10) ≥ 10 mm
(AWG8)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
(1)
MFZ36
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
MFD21 1 2
MFD22 ≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12) X20
0 1 2
MFZ38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
GND2
GND2
GND
GND
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
1 x 24 VDC
24V 24V
GND GND
1: DRAIN
4 3 2: V+
5 X11 3: V-
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
04997AXX
Terminal
assignment
6- 10 - - Reserved

1
MFZ36, MFZ38 connection modules with MFD32 fieldbus module
L3 L3 2
L2 L2
L1 L1
3
PE PE
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10) ≥ 10 mm 2
(AWG8) 4
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
MFZ36
MFD32 (1)
5
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1
≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12) X20 6

0 1
MFZ38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
7
res.
res.
res.
res.
24 V
24 V
GND
GND
1 x 24 VDC 8
24V 24V
GND GND 9
10
11
1: DRAIN
4 3 2: V+
5 X11 3: V- 12
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
13
04998AXX
14
15
Terminal
assignment
16
17
3 DRAIN Input Equipotential bonding 18
19
6-10 - - Reserved
20
15-18 - - Reserved
22
8 Connection with CANopen
8.15 Connection with open CANopen
CANopen MFO is connected via T connector. If the connection with MFO is removed, the
Connection remaining stations will not be influenced, and the bus can remain active.
Capabilities
MFO MFO MFO
UL UL UL
(1) RC
BA
RC
BA
RC
BA
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
TR TR TR
RD RD RD
SYS-F SYS-F SYS-F
(2) (2) (2)
MFO MFO MFO

UL UL UL
RC RC RC
BA BA BA
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
MFI INTERBUS
TR TR TR
RD RD RD
SYS-F SYS-F SYS-F
(1)
(2) (2) (2)
05086AXX
(1) Bus terminating resistor 120 Ω

(2) T connector

Connection with CANopen 8
1
MFZ31 Connection with MOVIMOT® (in combination with CANopen)
2
MFZ31 (CANopen) X20 (3) MOVIMOT®
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
MFZ31 3
+ 0 1
4
24V
RS+
f1/f2
K1a
K1b
RS-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
R
L
GND
GND
GND
RS+
24 V
24 V
RS-
24V
(2)
5
댷 댷
MFO... (1) (1)
+ -
6
1: CAN_SHLD
4 3 2: CAN_V+ 24 VDC
X11 5 3: CAN_GND
7
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
05011AXX 8

10
11
Terminal
assignment 12
X20 1 CAN_GND Input CANopen reference potential 0V24 13
3 CAN_SHLD Input Equipotential bonding 14
5 CAN_V+ Input CANopen voltage supply 24V
6 - - Reserved
15
7 - - Reserved
8 - - Reserved 16
9 - - Reserved
10 - - Reserved 17
18
15 24 V Output 24 V power supply for MOVIMOT® 19
®
16 RS+ Output Communications link to MOVIMOT terminal RS+
20
18 GND 0V24 reference potential for MOVIMOT®
21
22
Connecting MFZ33 Field Distributor with MFO...

MFZ33 connection module with MFO21, MFO22 fieldbus module and two separate 24 VDC voltage circuits
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
MFO21 X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ MFO22 2
≤ 2.5 mm (AWG12)
X20
≤ 4 mm 2 (AWG10)
X21
MFZ33 0 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND2
GND2
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
GND
GND
2 x 24 VDC
24V1 24V1
GND1 GND1
24V2 24V2
GND2 GND2
1: CAN_SHLD
4 3 2: CAN_V+
5 X11 3: CAN_GND
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
05052AXX
Terminal
assignment
X20 1 CAN_GND Input CANopen reference potential 0V24
3 CAN_SHLD Input Equipotential bonding
6-10 - - Reserved

1
MFZ33 connection module with MFO21, MFO22 fieldbus module and one common 24 VDC voltage circuit
L3 L3
2
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE 3
MFO21 X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10)
4
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ MFO22 ≤ 2.5 mm2 (AWG12)
2
≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
X21
5
X20
MFZ33 0 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6
GND2
GND2
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
GND
GND
1 x 24 VDC
7
24V 24V
GND GND 8
10
1: CAN_SHLD
4 3
2: CAN_V+
11
5 X11
1 2 3: CAN_GND
4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L 12
05053AXX
14
Terminal
assignment 15
17
20
22
MFZ33 connection module with MFO32 fieldbus module
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10)
MFZ33 MFO32
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
+ 2
≤ 2.5 mm (AWG12)
X20
2
≤ 4 mm (AWG10)
X21
0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
res.
res.
res.
res.
24 V
24 V
GND
GND
1 x 24 VDC
24V 24V
GND GND
1: CAN_SHLD
4 3 2: CAN_V+
5 X11 3: CAN_GND
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
05054AXX
Terminal
assignment
5 CAN_V+ Input CANopen voltage supply 24 V
6-10 - - Reserved
5-8 - - Reserved

1
Connecting MFZ36, MFZ38 Field Distributor with MFO
MFZ36, MFZ38 connection modules with MFO21, MFO22 fieldbus module and two separate 24 VDC voltage
circuits 2
L3 L3
L2 L2 3
L1 L1
PE PE
4
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm 2 (AWG10)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
(1) 5
MFZ36
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1 2
6
MFO21
MFO22 ≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12) X20
MFZ38 1 2 3 4 5
0
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
13 14 15 16
2
17 18
7
GND2
GND2
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
GND
GND
24 V
2 x 24 VDC 8
24V1 24V1
GND1 GND1
24V2 24V2 9
GND2 GND2
10
4 3
1: CAN_SHLD
2: CAN_V+
11
5 X11
2 3: CAN_GND
1
4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L 12
05012AXX
13

14
Terminal
assignment 15
6-10 - - Reserved
18
20
21
22
MFZ36, MFZ38 connection modules with MFO21, MFO22 fieldbus module and one common 24 VDC voltage
circuit:
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
PE PE
2
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10) ≥ 10 mm
(AWG8)
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
(1)
MFZ36
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
MFO21 1 2
MFO22 ≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12) X20
0 1 2
MFZ38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
GND2
GND2
GND
GND
24 V
24 V
V2I24
V2I24
1 x 24 VDC
24V 24V
GND GND
1: CAN_SHLD
4 3 2: CAN_V+
5 X11 3: CAN_GND
1 2
4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
05013AXX
Terminal
assignment
6-10 - - Reserved

1
MFZ36, MFZ38 connection modules with MFO32 fieldbus module
L3 L3 2
L2 L2
L1 L1
3
PE PE
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ≤ 4 mm2 (AWG10) ≥ 10 mm 2
(AWG8) 4
PE
PE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
MFZ36
MFO32 (1)
5
+ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1
≤ 2.5 mm 2 (AWG12) X20 6

0 1
MFZ38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
7
res.
res.
res.
res.
24 V
24 V
GND
GND
1 x 24 VDC
8
24V 24V
GND GND 9
10
11
1: CAN_SHLD
4 3 2: CAN_V+
5 X11 3: CAN_GND 12
1 2 4: CAN_H
5: CAN_L
13
05014AXX
14
15
Terminal
assignment
16
17
19
6-10 - - Reserved
20
15-18 - - Reserved
22
8 Connecting Inputs/Outputs (I/O) of MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces
8.16 Connecting Inputs/Outputs (I/O) of MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces

Connection via
Terminals with..
MFZ21
MFP21
MFZ26 in combination with
MFP22
MFZ28
MFZ11
MFI21 MFI23
MFI22
MFZ18
MFZ31
MFD21 MFO21
MFD22 MFO22
MFZ38
MFI23B only: reserved

all other MF.. modules: V2I24
GND2
GND2
GND2
VO24
VO24
VO24
VO24
DO 0
GND
GND
GND
GND
DO1
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
X20 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1 2
04933AEN

X20 19 DI0 Input Switching signal from sensor 1
20 GND - 0V24 reference potential for sensor 1
21 V024 Output 24 V power supply for sensor 1
22 DI1 Input Switching signal from sensor 2
31 DO0 Output Switching signal from actuator 1
32 GND2 - 0V24 reference potential for actuator 1
33 DO1 Output Switching signal from actuator 2
34 GND2 - 0V24 reference potential for actuator 2
24 V power supply for actuators
35 V2I24 Input only with MFI23B: Reserved
only with MFZ.6 and MFZ.8: jumpered with terminal 15 or 16
36 GND2 - 0V24 reference potential for actuators
only with MFZ.6 and MFZ.8: jumpered with terminal 17 or 18

Connecting Inputs/Outputs (I/O) of MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces 8
1
Connection via
Terminals with…
MFZ21
MFZ26 in combination with MFP32
2
MFZ28
MFZ11 3
MFZ16 in combination with MFI32 MFI33
MFZ18
MFZ31 4
MFZ36 in combination with MFD32 MFO32
MFZ38
5
7
VO24
VO24
VO24
VO24
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
DI 4
DI 5
res.
X20 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 8
1
10
04934AXX
11
X20 19 DI0 Input Switching signal from sensor 1 12
21 V024 Output 24 V power supply for sensor 1 13
14
26 GND - 0V24 reference potential for sensor 3 15
28 DI3 Input Switching signal from sensor 4 16
17
33 DI5 Input Switching signal from sensor 6 18
35 res. - Reserved
19
36 GND - 0V24 reference potential for sensors
20
21
22
8 Connecting Inputs/Outputs (I/O) of MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces
Connection via M12 Connector with MF.22 / MFI23
2
1
3
4
5
01799BXX
Notes • Connect sensors / actuators using either M12 sockets or terminals

• When using the outputs: Connect 24 V to V2I24 / GND2.
• Connect dual channel sensors/actuators to DI0, DI2, and DO0. DI1, DI3, and DO1
can then no longer be used.
01800BEN
Caution: Connections which are not used must be fitted with M12 closing caps in
order to guarantee degree of protection IP 65!

Connecting Inputs/Outputs (I/O) of MF.. Fieldbus Interfaces 8
1
Connection via M12 Connector with MF.32 / MFI33
3
2
1
3
4 4
5
01799BXX
5
Notes • Connect sensors using either M12 sockets or terminals
• Connect dual channel sensors to DI0, DI2, and DI4. DI1, DI3, and DI5 can then no
6
longer be used.
7
DI1 DI3 DI5

8
24 V (V024) 24 V (V024) 24 V (V024)
Input DI0 Input DI2 Input DI4
GND GND GND

9
DIO DI2 DI4
DI1 DI3 DI5 10

24 V (V024) 24 V (V024) 24 V (V024)
11
Input DI1 GND Input DI3 GND Input DI5 GND
12
01801BEN
13
14
Caution: Connections which are not used must be fitted with M12 closing caps in
order to Enclosure IP 65 protection! 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
8 Connection of Pre-Fabricated Cables
8.17 Connection of Pre-Fabricated Cables

Connection between MF.../Z.3. or MF.../Z.6. Field Distributor and MOVIMOT® (Part No. 0186 725 3)
03046AXX
Assignment
MOVIMOT® terminal Core color / designation
L1 black / L1
L2 black / L2
L3 black / L3
24 V red / 24 V
⊥ white / 0 V, white / 0 V
RS+ orange / RS+
RS- green / RS-
PE terminal green-yellow + shield end
Observe Release
of Direction of Only counterclockwise direction of
Rotation
R
L
R
L
24V
24V
Both directions of rotation are rotation is enabled.

enabled. Setpoint entries for clockwise rotation.
result in standstill of drive.
Only clockwise direction of rotation is
R
R
L
enabled.
24V
24V
Drive is inhibited or brought to a stop.

Setpoint entries for counterclockwise.
rotation result in standstill of drive.

Connection of Pre-Fabricated Cables 8
1
Connection between MF.../Z.8. Field Distributor and AC Motors (Part No. 0186 742 3)
03047AXX
5
Assignment
6
Motor terminal Core color / designation
U1 black / U1
7
V1 black / V1
W1 black / W1 8
13 red / 13
14 white / 14
9
15 blue / 15
TH black / 1
TH black / 2
10
PE terminal green-yellow + shield end (inside shield)
11
Connect overall shield via an EMC metal cable gland to the housing of the motor 12
terminal box.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
9 Important Notes for Startup
0
9 MOVIMOT® Startup
9.1 Important Notes for Startup
• Safety instructions must be observed during startup!
• Switch off power supply to the MOVIMOT® prior to removing/installing the terminal
box cover.
• Ensure before startup that the drive has not been damaged.
• Check that all protective covers have been fitted correctly.
• MOVIMOT® has been adapted to the motor by internally saved parameters.
Therefore, these parameters have been set permanently.
• Use CW/Stop or CCW/Stop for jog mode.
• Observe a minimum switch-off time of 2 seconds for the supply system contactor
K11.

I
Description of MOVIMOT® Control Elements 9
0
1
9.2 Description of MOVIMOT® Control Elements
DIP SWITCH S1 2
S1/.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
Motor protection
DC braking
PWM frequency 3
deactivated 16 kHz variable1)
RS-485 address No function
Motor protection PWM frequency
OFF 4Q operation
active 4 kHz fix 4
1) If DIP-SWITCH S1/7 = ON, the devices operate with 16 kHz PWM frequency (low-noise) and
5
f1 Setpoint The potentiometer has a different function, depending on the unit operating mode: 6
Potentiometer • Control via terminals: f1 setpoint (selected via terminal f1/f2 = "0")
• Control via RS-485: Maximum frequency fmax 7
100
f [Hz] 8
5 6
75 f1
50
9
25
2 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1)
05066AXX
11
(1) Potentiometer setting
12
f2 Setpoint The function of the switch changes depending on the unit operating mode:
Switch • Control via terminals: f2 setpoint (selected via terminal f1/f2 = "1")
13
• Control via RS-485: Minimum frequency fmin
Function Setting * = Factory setting 14
3 4
Detent position 0* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Setpoint f2 [Hz] 5* 7 10 15 20 25 35 50 60 70 100

Minimum frequency 2* 5 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 35 40
15
[Hz]
16
Switch t1 For integrator ramp (ramp times based on a setpoint jump of 50 Hz)
17
3 4
Function Setting * = Factory setting

Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5* 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Ramp time t1 [s] 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 1* 2 3 5 7 10 18
19
20
21
22
I
9 Startup with Binary Control (Control via Terminals)
0
9.3 Startup with Binary Control (Control via Terminals)

1. Review correct connection of MOVIMOT® (see the section "Electrical
Installation")
2. Ensure that DIP switches S1/1 – S1/4 are set to OFF (= address 0).
3. Check the setting for 4Q operation (DIP switch S1/6 = Off).
ON
ON ON
for for
2. 3. 1
11 22 3
3 4
4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4
5
5 6
6
7
7
8
05062AXX 05063AXX
4. Set first speed with f1 setpoint potentiometer (activated, if terminal f1/f2 = "0")
(factory setting: approx. 50 Hz).
100
f [Hz]
5 6
75 f1
50
25
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1)
05066AXX
5. Set second speed with f2 setpoint potentiometer (activated, if terminal f1/f2 = "1").
3 4
Function Setting
5 6 7 8
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Setpoint f2 [Hz] 5 7 10 15 20 25 35 50 60 70 100
The first speed can be infinitely varied during operation using the externally
accessible f1 setpoint potentiometer.
Speeds f1 and f2 can be set independently to any value.
6. Set ramp time with switch t1 (ramp times are based on a setpoint jump of 50 Hz).
Function Setting
3 4
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Ramp time t1 [s] 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10
7. Replace and fasten terminal box cover.

8. Re-insert screw plug of the cover with gasket.
9. Connect control voltage 24 VDC and power supply.

I
Startup with Binary Control (Control via Terminals) 9
0
1
Inverter Behavior
in relation to
Supply 24 V f1/f2 CW/Stop CCW/Stop Status LED Inverter
Terminal Level behavior
2
0 0 x x x Off Inverter off
1 0 x x x Off Inverter off 3
0 1 x x x Flashes Stop, supply
yellow system missing
1 1 x 0 0 yellow Stop 4
1 1 0 1 0 green Clockwise rotation
with f1
5
1 1 0 0 1 green Counterclockwise
rotation with f1
1 1 1 1 0 green Clockwise rotation
with f2
6
1 1 1 0 1 green Counterclockwise
rotation with f2 7
1 1 x 1 1 yellow Stop
8
Legend 0 = no voltage
1 = voltage 9
X = random
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
9 Startup with MBG11A or MLG11A Option
0
9.4 Startup with MBG11A or MLG11A Option

Installation").
2. Set DIP switch S1/1 (on MOVIMOT®) to ON (= address 1).
ON
ON ON
for for
2. 3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 5 6 7
05064AXX 05065AXX
4. Set minimum frequency fmin with switch f2

3 4
Function Setting
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Minimum frequency fmin 2 5 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 35 40

[Hz]
Function Setting
3 4
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Ramp time t1 [s] 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10
6. Ensure that desired direction of rotation has been enabled.

Terminal R Terminal L Meaning
activated activated • Both directions of rotation are enabled.
R
L
24V
activated not activated • Only clockwise direction of rotation is enabled.

• Setpoint selections for counterclockwise rotation result in
standstill of drive.
R
L
24V
not activated activated • Only counterclockwise direction of rotation is enabled.

• Setpoint selections for clockwise rotation result in standstill
of drive.
R
L
24V
not activated not activated • Unit is inhibited or drive is brought to a stop.

R
L
24V

I
Startup with MBG11A or MLG11A Option 9
0
1
8. Set the maximum speed using f1 setpoint potentiometer.
100 2
f [Hz]
75 f1
5 6
3
50
25
4
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1)
05066AXX
5
6
10.Turn on voltage supply.
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
9 Operating MBG11A and MLG..A Options
0
9.5 Operating MBG11A and MLG..A Options

Function Explanation
Display
Negative display value, e.g. 50 = counterclockwise
Positive display value, e.g. 50 = clockwise
The displayed value refers to the speed entered with f1 setpoint potentiometer. Example:
Display "50" = 50 % of the speed set with setpoint potentiometer.
Caution: With display "0" the drive rotates with fmin.
Increase speed
With CW rotation: With CCW rotation:
Reduce speed
Blocking MOVIMOT®
Press the following buttons simultaneously: + Display = 0FF
Releasing MOVIMOT®
oder
Caution: After release, MOVIMOT® accelerates to the value and direction of rotation
saved last.
Changing direction of 1. until display =
rotation from right to 0
left
2. Pressing again changes direction of rotation.

rotation from left to 0
right

Memory function The value last saved will be retained after the power supply has been turned off and on if the
24 V supply was active for at least 4 seconds after the setpoint was last changed.

I
Startup with MWA21A Option (Speed Control Module) 9
0
1
9.6 Startup with MWA21A Option (Speed Control Module)
1. Review correct connection of MOVIMOT® (see the section "Electrical 2
Installation").
3
ON
4
ON ON
for for
2. 3. 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 5 6 7
05064AXX 05065AXX 6
4. Set minimum frequency fmin with switch f2.
7
3 4
Function Setting
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Minimum frequency fmin 2 5 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 35 40 8

[Hz]
5. Set ramp time with switch t1 (ramp times are based on a setpoint jump of 50 Hz). 9
Function Setting
3 4
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10
5 6 7 8
Ramp time t1 [s] 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10
6. Ensure that desired direction of rotation has been enabled. 11

activated activated • Both directions of rotation are enabled.
12
R
L
24V
13
activated not activated •

•
Only clockwise direction of rotation is enabled.
Setpoint selections for counterclockwise rotation result in
14
standstill of drive.
R
L
24V
15
not activated activated • Only counterclockwise direction of rotation is enabled. 16

• Setpoint selections for clockwise rotation result in standstill
of drive.
17
R
L
24V
not activated not activated • Unit is inhibited or drive is brought to a stop.

18
19
R
L
24V
20
21
22
I
9 Startup with MWA21A Option (Speed Control Module)
0

100
f [Hz]
5 6
75 f1
50
25
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1)
05066AXX

10.Select the signal type for the analog input (terminals 7 and 8) of the MWA21A option
using switches S1 and S2.
S1 S2 Setpoint stop function
V signal 0...10 V OFF OFF
no
I signal 0...20 mA ON OFF
I signal 4...20 mA ON ON
yes
V signal 2...10 V OFF ON
11.Activate voltage supply.

12.Enable MOVIMOT® by applying +24 V on terminal 4 (clockwise rotation) or terminal
5 (counterclockwise rotation) of MWA21A.

I
Startup with MWA21A Option (Speed Control Module) 9
0
1
Control MOVIMOT® will be controlled with analog signal on terminals 7 and 8 from fmin to fmax.
2
6 10V 6 10V
7 + (2) 7 +
(1) 2 kΩ
8 - 8 - 3
9 9
10 10
MWA21A MWA21A
4
05067AXX
(1) Potentiometer using the 10 V reference voltage (alternatively 5 kΩ) 5

(2) Floating analog signal
6
Setpoint Stop
Function:
7
(1) [Hz]
5
8
4
9
3
10
fmin
(2 Hz) 11
1
12
0
0 0,5 1,5 2 2,5 [V] (2)
0 1
1
2 3 4 5 [mA]
13
05068AXX 14
Setting: (1) Output frequency
(2) Setpoint
0...10 V / 0...20 mA 15
2...10 V / 4...20 mA
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
9 Startup with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A
0
9.7 Startup with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A

Installation")
2. Ensure that DIP switches S1/1 – S1/4 are set to OFF (= address 0).
ON
ON ON
for for
2. 3. 1
11 22 3
3 4
4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4
5
5 6
6
7
7
8
05062AXX 05063AXX
4. Set first speed with f1 setpoint potentiometer (activated, if terminal f1/f2 = "0")
(factory setting: approx. 50 Hz).
100
f [Hz]
5 6
75 f1
50
25
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1)
05066AXX
5. Set second speed with f2 setpoint potentiometer (activated, if terminal f1/f2 = "1").
3 4
Function Setting
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Setpoint f2 [Hz] 5 7 10 15 20 25 35 50 60 70 100
The first speed can be controlled in an infinitely variable manner during operation
with the externally accessible f1 setpoint potentiometer.
Speeds f1 and f2 can be set independently to any value.
Function Setting
3 4
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Ramp time t1 [s] 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 1 2 3 5 7 10

9. Connect AS-i supply voltage and supply.

I
Startup with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A 9
0
1
Outputs
(Function and
Bit Function Display / LED color
Designation) 2
D0 Clockwise rotation (terminal R) DO 0 / yellow
D1 Counterclockwise rotation (terminal L) DO 1 / yellow
D2 Speed f1 / speed f2 (terminal f1/ f2) DO 2 / yellow 3
D3 Power supply / reset (terminal 24 V) DO3 / green
4
Inputs (Function
and Designation)
5
D0 Message Ready for operation (relay K1) DI 0 / yellow
D1 - - 6
D2 Sensor 1 (M12 socket, pin 4) DI 2 / yellow
7
8
LED Display
9
(1) DI0 DO0 (5)
(2) DI2 DO1 (6)
(3) DI3 DO2 (7)
10
(4) AS-i DO3 (8)
Power
11
05070AXX
(1) MOVIMOT® ready for operation (5) Clockwise rotation activated 12

(2) external input DI2 (6) Counterclockwise rotation activated
(3) external input DI3 (7) Speed f2 activated
(4) Voltage supply via AS-i system is ok (8) MOVIMOT® voltage supply
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Assigning Slave An AS-i addressing device can be used to assign the slave address. This allows for
Address via simple and network-independent addressing.
Programming The AS-i addressing devices offer the following functions:
Device
• Reading an AS-i slave address.
• Incrementally adjusting address to new value.
• New addressing of slaves.
• Functional test with output to LCD display.
The use of an addressing device requires an adapter that fits onto the M12 plug
connector of the MLK module (see the following figure).
AS-i -
N.C.
4 3
1 2
AS-i +
N.C.
05135AXX
Example: Every AS-i station is individually addressed (A) and then reintegrated in the
bus (B).
A B
(1)
50475AXX
(1) AS-i addressing device

I
Startup with PROFIBUS 10
0
1
10 Communications Interfaces
2
10.1 Startup with PROFIBUS
3
• It is recommended that the 24 VDC-power supply be switched off before removing/
replacing the bus cover (MFP)!
4
• The bus connection of the incoming and continuing PROFIBUS is integrated in the
module carrier so that the PROFIBUS can continue to be operated even when the
module electronics have been disconnected. 5
1. Verify correct connection of MOVIMOT® and PROFIBUS connection module 6

(MFZ21, MFZ23, MFZ26 or MFZ28)
7
3. Check the setting for 4Q operation (DIP switch S1/6 = OFF) (on MOVIMOT®).
8
ON
ON ON
for for
2. 3.
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 5 6 7
05064AXX 05065AXX 10
11
100
f [Hz]
75 f1 12
5 6
50
13
25
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1) 14
05066AXX
(1) Potentiometer setting 15
5. Re-insert PG screw plug of the cover (with gasket). 16

17
3 4
Function Setting
5 6 7 8
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Minimum frequency fmin 2 5 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 35 40 18
[Hz]
19
20
21
22
I
10 Startup with PROFIBUS
0
7. If ramp is not set via fieldbus, set ramp time with switch t1 (ramp times are based on
a setpoint jump of 50 Hz).
3 4
Function Setting
5 6 7 8
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ramp time t1 [s] 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10
8. Setting PROFIBUS address on the MFP (Factory setting: address 4). The
PROFIBUS address is set using DIP switches 1 to 7.
26 x 0 = 0
7
5
2 x 0 = 0
6
4
2 x 1 = 16 (1) Example address 17
5
3
4
2 x 0 = 0 Address 0 to 125: valid address

(1)
2 Address 126: not supported
3
2 x 0 = 0
Address 127: Broadcast
21 x 0 =
2
0
ON
0
1
2 x 1 = 1
17
05071AXX
The following table uses address 17 as an example of how the DIP switch settings
are determined for any bus address.
Calculation Remainder DIP switch setting Valence
17 / 2 = 8 1 DIP 1 = ON 1
8/2=4 0 DIP 2 = OFF 2
4/2=2 0 DIP 3 = OFF 4
2/2=1 0 DIP 4 = OFF 8
1/2=0 1 DIP 5 = ON 16
0/2=0 0 DIP 6 = OFF 32
0/2=0 0 DIP 7 = OFF 64

I
0
1
9. Activating bus terminating resistors on the MFP at the last station.
• If the MFP is located at the end of a PROFIBUS segment, it is only connected to
the PROFIBUS network via the incoming PROFIBUS cable (terminals 1/2). 2
• In order to avoid disruptions in the bus system due to reflections, etc., the
PROFIBUS segment must be terminated with the bus terminating resistors at the
first and last physical stations.
3
• The bus terminating resistors are already implemented on the MFP and they can
be activated using two DIP switches (see figure 153). Bus termination is 4
implemented for cable type A to EN 50170 (volume 2)!
Bus termination ON = Bus termination OFF = 5
activated deactivated
Factory setting
6
10
10
ON
ON
9
9
8
05072AXX 05073AXX
9
Observe the following if field distributor with AF2 or AF3 mounting flange is
used:
In contrast to the standard design, the switchable bus termination at the MFP..
10
module may no longer be used if AF2/AF3 is used. Instead, a pluggable bus
termination (M12) should be used in place of the outgoing X12 bus connection at the 11
last station (see also the section "Technical Data and Dimension Drawings –
Connection Technology for Field Distributors").
12
®
10.Replace the cover on the MOVIMOT connection box and affix and screw down MFP
housing cover. 13
11.Switch on the supply voltage (24VDC) for the MFP PROFIBUS interface and
MOVIMOT®. The green LED "RUN" of the MFP should now light up and the red LED
"Bus-F" should go out.
14
12.Carry out project planning for MFP PROFIBUS interface for the DP master.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 Startup with PROFIBUS
0
Configuration The enclosed diskette contains "GSD files" to be used for the configuration of the DP
(Project master. These files are copied into special directories in the project planning software
Planning) of and updated as part of the configuration software. The detailed installation procedure
PROFIBUS can be found in the manuals of the corresponding project planning software.
Master Always use GSD files with the *.GSD extension since they are compatible with EN
50170 (volume 2). All other files are special file formats which have to be used in
conjunction with older DP master modules.
The latest version of the GSD files is always available on the Internet at the
following address: http://www.SEW-EURODRIVE.de
Project Planning 1. Refer to the README.TXT file on the diskette for detailed information.
for the MFP 2. Install (copy) the GSD file (type file) in accordance with the requirements of your
PROFIBUS-DP project planning software.
Interface:
3. Once the installation has been completed correctly, the MFP appears in the slave
stations with the designation MOVIMOT® + MFP.
4. For project planning purposes, add the interface module into the PROFIBUS
structure under the name MOVIMOT® + MFP and assign the station address.
5. Select the process data configuration for your application (see the section "DP
Configuration" on page 212).
6. If diagnostic alarm processing should be deactivated for the MFP:
• Enter the value 01hex in the second byte of the slave parameter setting (see the
section "Diagnostics" on page 216).
• The default setting is for the diagnostic alarm to be triggered.
7. Specify the I/O addresses for the configured process data or digital inputs/outputs.

I
Function of PROFIBUS Interface 10
0
1
10.2 Function of PROFIBUS Interface
Process Data and The PROFIBUS interfaces MFP not only make it possible to control MOVIMOT® AC 2
Sensor/Actuator motors but also permits sensors/actuators to be connected to digital input terminals and
Processing digital output terminals. For this purpose, an additional I/O byte is added to the
PROFIBUS DP protocol following the process data for MOVIMOT®. The extra digital 3
inputs and outputs of the MFP are mapped in this I/O byte. The process data are coded
based on the uniform MOVILINK® profile for SEW drive inverters (see the section
MOVILINK® Unit Profile on page 275). 4
PROFIBUS-DP configuration "3 PD + I/O":
5
MOVIMOT ® + MF...
Fieldbus master
Process ouput data (PO)
6
PO1: Control word 1 PO2: Speed [%] PO3: Ramp Dig. Out
7
PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2 Dig. In.
Process input data (PI)
8
-+ 9
01667CEN
10
Structure of
Input/Output Byte
reserved, value = 0 11
Output terminal DO 1
12
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fieldbus
Byte: Digital Outputs 13
MFP21/22
master
Byte: Digital Inputs
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
14
Input terminal DI 0
Input terminal DI 1 15
Input terminal DI 2
Input terminal DI 3
reserved, value = 0
16
Byte: Digital Inputs 17

Fieldbus
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MFP 32
master
Input terminal DI 0
18
Input terminal DI 1
Input terminal DI 2
Input terminal DI 3 19
Input terminal DI 4
Input terminal DI 5
01668BEN
21
22
I
10 Function of PROFIBUS Interface
0
DP Generally speaking, functions can only be configured provided they are supported by
Configurations the corresponding MFP type. However, it is also possible to deactivate existing
functions, i.e. the digital outputs of an MFP 21 can be removed from project planning by
selecting the DP configuration "... + DI."
The different MFP types allow for different DP configurations. The following table shows
all possible DP configurations and the supported MFP types. The column "DP identifier"
shows the decimal identifiers of the individual slots for the DP master configuration
software.
Name Supported MFP Description DP identifier
types 0 1 2
®
2 PD all MFP types MOVIMOT control via 2 process data words 113dec 0dec –
3 PD all MFP types MOVIMOT® control via 3 process data words 114dec 0dec –
®
0 PD + DI/DO MFP 21/22 No MOVIMOT control, only processing of 0dec 48dec –
digital inputs and outputs
2 PD + DI/DO MFP 21/22 MOVIMOT® control using 2 process data words and processing of 113dec 48dec –
3 PD + DI/DO MFP 21/22 MOVIMOT® control using 3 process data words and processing of 114dec 48dec –
0 PD + DI all MFP types No MOVIMOT® control, only processing of digital inputs. The 0dec 16dec –
digital outputs of the MFP are not used!
2 PD + DI all MFP types MOVIMOT® control via 2 process data words and 113dec 16dec –
processing of digital inputs.
The digital outputs of the MFP are not used!
3 PD + DI all MFP types MOVIMOT® control via 3 process data words and 114dec 16dec –
processing of digital inputs.
The digital outputs of the MFP are not used!
Universal all MFP types Reserved for special configurations 0dec 0dec 0dec
configuration

I
0
1
Meaning of LED The PROFIBUS interface MFP has three diagnostic LEDs:
Display • LED "RUN" (green) for displaying the normal operating status
2
• LED "BUS-FAULT" (red) for displaying faults on the PROFIBUS-DP
• LED "SYS-FAULT" (red) for displaying system faults on the MFP or MOVIMOT®
Note: In general, the "SYS-Fault" LED is without functions in the PD configurations
3
"0PD+DI/DO" and "0PD+DI."
4
6
MFP PROFIBUS DP
RUN
BUS-F
SYS-F 7
50358AXX 10
Status of the 11
"RUN" LED
RUN BUS-F SYS-F Meaning Fault correction
(Green)
On x x • MFP circuit board hardware OK – 12
On Off Off • Correct MFP operation –
• MFP is currently exchanging data
with the DP master (data
exchange) and MOVIMOT®
13
Off x x • MFP not ready • Check 24 VDC power supply
• 24 VDC supply missing • Switch MFP on again Exchange
module if this reoccurs.
14
Flash- x x • PROFIBUS address is set higher • Check the PROFIBUS address
ing than 125 set on the MFP
15
x = any status
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Status of the
"BUS-F" LED
(Red)
On Off x • MFP is currently exchanging data –
with the DP master (data
exchange)
On Flashi x • Baud rate is detected, however no • Check the project planning of
ng addressing from DP master the DP master
• MFP was not configured in DP
master or configured incorrectly
On On x • Connection to the DP master has • Check the PROFIBUS-DP
failed connection to the MFP
• MFP does not detect baud rate • Check the DP master
• Bus interruption • Check all cables in your
• DP master is not operating. PROFIBUS-DP network
x = any status
Status of the
"SYS-F" LED
(Red)
On x Off • Normal operating status of MFP –
and MOVIMOT®.
On x Flashes • MFP operating status OK, • Evaluate the fault number in
1x MOVIMOT® signals fault. MOVIMOT® status word 1 in the
programmable controller.
• Read the MOVIMOT® operating
instructions for information about
fault rectification
• Reset MOVIMOT® if necessary
using the programmable controller
(reset bit in control word 1).
On x Flashes • MOVIMOT® does not react to • Check DIP switches S1/1–4 in
2x setpoints from the DP master MOVIMOT®.
because PO data have not • Set RS-485 address 1 so that the
been enabled. PO data are enabled.
On x On • Communications link between • Check the electrical connection
MFP and MOVIMOT® is between MFP and MOVIMOT®
disrupted or interrupted. (terminals RS+ and RS-).
• See also the sections "Electrical
Installation" and "Project Planning
– Installation Planning under EMC
Aspects"
x = any status

I
0
1
MFP System The communications link between MFP and MOVIMOT® is interrupted if the MFP
Fault / signals a system fault ("SYS-FAULT" LED continuously lit). This system fault is signalled
MOVIMOT® Fault to the controller as fault code 91 dec via the diagnostics channel and via the status 2
words of the process input data. Since this system fault usually denotes a wiring
problem, it is not possible to perform a RESET using the control word! Check the
electrical connection between MFP and MOVIMOT®. In the event of a system fault, the 3
process input data return a fixed bit pattern because valid MOVIMOT® status
information is no longer available. Thus, only status word bit 5 (malfunction) and the fault
code can be used for evaluation within the controller. No other information is valid!
4
Process input word Hex value Meaning
PI1: Status word 1 5B20hex Fault code 91 (5Bhex), bit 5 (malfunction) = 1 No other
5
status information is valid!
PI2: Current actual value 0000hex Information is not valid!
6
PI3: Status word 2 0020hex Bit 5 (malfunction) = 1 No other status information is
valid!
Input byte of the digital inputs XXhex The input information of the digital inputs continues to be 7
updated.
The input information of the digital inputs continues to be updated, and further evaluation
within the controller is possible.
8
PROFIBUS-DP The response monitoring time on the MFP elapses (if configured in the DP master) if
9
Timeout data transfer via PROFIBUS-DP is disrupted or interrupted. The "BUS-FAULT" LED
lights up (or flashes) to signal that no new user data are being received. MOVIMOT® 10
decelerates with the most recently valid ramp, the "ready" relay drops out after about 1
second to signal a malfunction.
The digital outputs are reset directly after the response monitoring time has elapsed! 11
DP Master Active/ The DP master sets all process output data to 0 if the PLC is switched from RUN to 12
Controller Failure STOP status. MOVIMOT® then receives the ramp setpoint = 0 in 3 PD mode.
The digital outputs DO 0 and DO 1 are also reset by the DP master! 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Diagnostics
Slave Diagnostic The PROFIBUS interface MFP signals all faults to the master via the diagnostic channel
Data of the PROFIBUS-DP. These fault messages are then evaluated within the controller by
means of corresponding system functions (e.g. with the diagnostic alarm OB 84 / SFC
13 in the S7-400). The following figure shows the structure of the diagnostic data that
are made up of diagnostic information to EN 50170 (volume 2) and (in the event of a
MOVIMOT®/MFP fault) of the diagnostic data for the specific unit.
Byte 0: Station status 1

Byte 3: DP master address DIN / EN
Byte 4: Ident number high [60]
Byte 5: Ident number low [01]
Byte 6: Header [02]
® In case of fault only
Byte 7: Fault code MOVIMOT / MFP
[...] contains constant codes of the MFP, remainder variable

01670BEN
The coding of bytes 0 – 3 is defined in EN 50170 (volume 2). Bytes 4, 5 and 6 always
contain the constant codes shown in the figure.
Byte 7 contains:
• MOVIMOT® fault codes (see the section "Operation and Service") or
• MFP fault codes: Fault code 91dec = SYS-FAULT (see the section "MFP System
Fault / MOVIMOT Fault" on page 215).

I
0
1
Switching Alarm on All fault information is also transferred to the controller directly via the status words of
and off the process input data. Consequently, triggering the diagnostic alarm by a MOVIMOT®-
/MFP fault can also be deactivated using the application-specific parameter of the 2
PROFIBUS-DP.
Note: This mechanism only switches off the triggering of a diagnostic alarm prompted
by a MOVIMOT® or MFP fault. However, diagnostic alarms may be triggered by the
3
PROFIBUS-DP system in the DP master at any time. As a result, the corresponding
operation blocks (e.g. OB84 for S7-400) should always be created in the controller. 4
Procedure Additional application-specific parameters can be defined in every DP master during the
project planning of a DP slave. These parameters are transferred to the slave when the
PROFIBUS-DP is initialized. Ten application-specific items of parameter data are
5
provided for the MFP interface, of which only byte 1 has been assigned the following
function: 6
Byte: Permitted value Function
0 00hex Reserved 7
1 00hex MOVIMOT®/MFP fault generates diagnostic alarm
01hex MOVIMOT®/MFP fault does not generate diagnostic alarm
2-9 00hex Reserved 8
No unlisted values are permitted. They can lead to malfunctions of the MFP!
9
Sample for Project
Planning
Parameter setting data (hex) Function
10
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00, Diagnostic alarms are also generated if there is a fault.
00,01,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00, Diagnostic alarms are not generated if there is a fault. 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 Startup with InterBus (Copper Line)
0
10.3 Startup with InterBus (Copper Line)

• It is recommended to switch off the 24 VDC power supply before removing/replacing
the housing cover (MFI)!
• Removal of the bus module interrupts the ring structure of the InterBus. This means
the entire bus system is no longer operational!
1. Verify correct connection of MOVIMOT® and InterBus connection module (MFZ11,

MFZ13, MFZ16 or MFZ18).
ON
ON ON
for for
2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 5 6 7
05064AXX 05065AXX
100
f [Hz]
5 6
75 f1
50
25
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1)
05066AXX
5. Re-insert screw plug of the cover (with gasket).

3 4
Function Setting
5 6 7 8
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
[Hz]
3 4
Function Setting
5 6 7 8
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ramp time t1 [s] 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10
8. Set MFI DIP switch (see “Setting MFI DIP Switch” on page 219).
9. Replace and secure the cover on the MOVIMOT® connection box and affix the MFI
housing cover.

I
Startup with InterBus (Copper Line) 10
0
1
10.Switch on the supply voltage (24VDC) for the MFI InterBus interface and MOVIMOT®.
The "UL" and "RD" LEDs on the MFI should now light up and the red "SYS-FAULT"
LED should go out. If this is not the case, possible wiring or setup mistakes can be 2
localized with reference to the LED states (page 225).
11.Configure MFI InterBus interface in the InterBus master (see "Configuring InterBus
Master [Project Planning]" on page 220).
3
Setting the MFI DIP switches 1–6 on the MFI make it possible to set the MOVIMOT® process data width,
4
DIP Switches the MFI operating mode and the physical continuation of the ring circuit.
Process Data The process data width for MOVIMOT® is set using DIP switches 1 and 2. The MFI 5
Width / Operating InterBus interface supports the process data width 2 PD and 3 PD for MOVIMOT®. As
Mode an option, an additional word can be switched on for transferring the digital I/Os via DIP
switch 5 (I/O). 6
NEXT/END Switch The NEXT/END switch signals the MFI whether another InterBus module follows it. As
a result, this switch must be set to the "NEXT" position when a continuing remote bus is 7
connected to terminals 6 and 10. This switch must be set to the "END" position if the MFI
is the last module on the InterBus.
8
All reserved switches must be in the OFF position. Otherwise, the InterBus protocol chip
is not initialized. The MFI reports the ID code "MP_Not_Ready" (ID code 78hex). In this
case, the InterBus masters report an initialization fault. 9
The following figure shows the SEW factory setting:
• 3 PD for MOVIMOT® + 1 word for digital I/O = 64 bit data width on the InterBus 10
• another InterBus module follows (NEXT)
(1) (2 )
(1) MFI is the last InterBus module, no outgoing 11
bus cable is connected
(2) Another InterBus module follows, outgoing
bus cable is connected
(3) InterBus termination 12
(4) ON = process data width + 1 for digital I/Os
END NEXT (3 )
6
(5) Reserved, position = OFF

I/O (4 ) (6) Process data width for MOVIMOT® 13
5
4
(5 )
14
3
21
2
(6 )
20 15
1
ON
05074AXX
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Setting types of The following table shows the settings of the InterBus data width using DIP switches 1,
InterBus Data 2 and 5.
Width
DIP 1: DIP 2: DIP 5: Designation Function InterBus data
20 21 + 1 I/O width
OFF OFF OFF Reserved None IB init fault
ON OFF OFF Reserved Not possible with MOVIMOT® IB init fault
OFF ON OFF 2 PD 2 PD to MOVIMOT® 32 bit
ON ON OFF 3 PD 3 PD to MOVIMOT® 48 bit
OFF OFF ON 0 PD + DI/DO Only I/O 16 bit
ON OFF ON Reserved Not possible with MOVIMOT® IB init fault
®
OFF ON ON 2 PD + DI/DO 2 PD to MOVIMOT + I/O 48 bit
ON ON ON 3 PD + DI/DO 3 PD to MOVIMOT® + I/O 64 bit
Configuring There are two steps involved in configuring the MFI in the InterBus master interface
InterBus Master module using the project planning software "CMD-Tool" (Configuration-Monitoring-
(Project Diagnosis). The bus structure is created in the first step. Next, the process data are
Planning) described and addressed.
Configuring the The bus structure can be configured online or offline using the CMD tool "IBS CMD." In
Bus Structure offline status, the MFI is configured using "Insert with Ident Code." The following
information must be entered:
Offline
Configuration:
Program setting: Function / meaning
Insert with Ident
Code Ident Code: 3 decimal Digital module with input/output data
Process data channel: This setting depends on DIP switches 1, 2 and 5 on the MFI
32 bit 2 PD
48 bit 3 PD or 2 PD + I/O
64 bit (delivery condition) 3 PD + I/O
Type of station: Remote bus station
Online It is possible to completely install the InterBus system first, wire up all MFI interface
Configuration: modules and then set the DIP switches. Next, the CMD-Tool can be used to read in the
Read in entire bus structure (configuration frame). All MFIs are automatically detected with their
Configuration data width settings.
Frame
Check the setting of MFI DIP switches 1, 2 and 5 with a process data channel length of
48 bit because this process data length is used both for the 3 PD configuration and for 2
PD + DI/DO.
The MFI appears as a digital I/O module (type DIO) after the read-in procedure is
complete.

I
0
1
Creating Process The CMD-Tool always provides a default description for all MFI process data. It is
Data Description possible to use a start address for the input and output area of the programmable
controller. In this version, the addresses of the digital inputs and outputs are located 2
directly after the MOVIMOT® process data addresses, which means they may lie within
the (analog) peripheral area of the programmable controller. In this case, the reserved
bits of the I/O word occupy unnecessary memory area within the controller. A 3
corresponding process data description makes it possible to mask out the reserved bits
and, for example, assign each process data word its own address.
4
Example 1: Default The following table shows the simplest version of the process data description. The four
Process Data process data words of the MFI signal that the process data configuration in question is
5
Description that for 3 PD+DI/DO. The start address P132 is now assigned separately for the input
and output data area. All process data words are located sequentially without any gaps. 6
Station name ID T Process data name I/O Length Byte Bit Assignment
no.
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI 21 IN E 64 0 0 P132
7
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI21 OUT A 64 0 0 P132
The following figure shows the representation of the process data in the address area
8
of the InterBus master module.
9
INTERBUS Master
Address area
MOVIMOT® + MFI
Input addresses Output addresses
P132
Process output data (PO) 10
PO1
P134 PO2 PO1: Control word 1 PO2: Speed [%] PO3: Ramp Digital Output
P136 PO3 11
P138 Digital Output (Word)
P132 PI1 12
PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2 Digital Input
P134 PI2
P136 PI3 13
P138 Digital Input (Word)
-+
14
02105CEN
15
The process data can now be accessed within the programmable controller (e.g. Simatic
S5) as follows:
Write to PO1 – 3: T PW 132, T PW 134, T PW 136 16
Read from PI1 – 3: L PW 132, L PW 134, L PW 136
Set outputs: T PW 138 17
Read inputs: L PW 138
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Example 2: It is much more efficient to divide up the MOVIMOT® process data and the I/O data of
Dividing and the digital inputs and outputs which, as a rule, should be located in the bit-addressable
Optimizing area of the programmable controller. The following table shows how the division is
Process Data for made.
MOVIMOT® and
DI/DO no.
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI 21 IN E 64 0 0
P132
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PI1 – 3 E 48 0 0
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-DI E 16 7 0 P100
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI 21 OUT A 64 0 0
P132
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PO1 – 3 A 48 0 0
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-DO A 16 7 0 P100
of the InterBus master module for this optimized type.
INTERBUS Master
Address area
MOVIMOT ® + MFI
Output addresses
AB100 Digital Output (low byte)
P132 PA1
P134 PA2
PO1: Control word 1 PO2: Speed [%] PO3: Ramp Digital Output
P136 PA3
Process output data (PO)
EB100
Input addresses
Digital Input (low byte)

P132 PE1
P134 PE2 PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2 Digital Input
P136 PE3 Process input data (PI) -+
02106BEN
S5) as follows:
Write to PO1 – 3: T PW 132, T PW 134, T PW 136
Setting outputs: AB 100 (e.g. S O 100.0)
Read inputs: EB 100 (e.g. A I 100.0)0

I
0
1
Example 3: In this example, there is the same separation of process data for MOVIMOT® and DI/
Detailed Process DO as in example 2. However, each process data word is described individually. This
Data Description of significantly increases the clarity. Process data access takes place in the same way as 2
MFI in example 2.
Station name ID T Process data I/O Length Byte Bit Assignment 3
no. name
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI 21 IN E 64 0 0
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PI1 E 16 0 0 P132 4
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PI2 E 16 2 0 P134
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PI3 E 16 4 0 P136 5
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-DI E 16 7 0 P100
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI 21 OUT A 64 0 0
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PO1 A 16 0 0 P132
6
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PO2 A 16 2 0 P134
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PO3 A 16 4 0 P136 7
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-DO A 16 7 0 P100
8
Control Program in Sample program S5 (adapted to the aforementioned configuration) for controlling the
the Programmable MOVIMOT® via InterBus (see page 278). 9
Controller
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 Function of InterBus Interface (Copper Line)
0
10.4 Function of InterBus Interface (Copper Line)

Process Data and MFI InterBus interfaces not only make it possible to control MOVIMOT® AC motors but
Sensor/Actuator also permit sensors/actuators to be connected to four digital input terminals and two
Processing digital output terminals. For this purpose, an additional I/O word is added to the InterBus
protocol following the process data for MOVIMOT®. The extra digital inputs and outputs
of the MFI are mapped in this I/O byte.
The process data are coded based on the uniform MOVILINK® profile for SEW drive
inverters (see the section MOVILINK® Unit Profile on page 275).
InterBus maximum configuration "3 PD + DI/DO:"
MOVIMOT ® + MF...
Fieldbus Master
Process Output Data (PO)
Process Input Data (PI)
-+
05123AEN
Structure of The following figure shows the terminal information on the individual bits of the input and
Input/Output Word output word. All reserved bits can be masked out by the process data description in the
of MFI 21 / MFI 22 InterBus CMD tool, so that the memory area of the programmable controller is not
restricted unnecessarily.
reserved, value = 0
output terminal DO 1
Digital Outputs
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
INTERBUS MFI 21
Master Digital Inputs MFI 22
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
input terminal DI 0
input terminal DI 1
input terminal DI 2
input terminal DI 3
reserved, value = 0
Digital Inputs
INTERBUS
Master 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MFI 32
input terminal DI 0
input terminal DI 1
input terminal DI 2
input terminal DI 3
input terminal DI 4
input terminal DI 5
reserved, value = 0
03569AEN

I
Function of InterBus Interface (Copper Line) 10
0
1
Purpose of LED The InterBus interface MFI has five LEDs for InterBus diagnostics and a further LED for
display displaying system faults.
2
3
UL
RC
4
BA
MFI INTERBUS
TR
RD
5
SYS-F
6
50357AXX 8
LED UL "U-Logic" 9
(Green)
Condition Meaning Fault correction
On Supply voltage applied – 10
Off No supply voltage Check the 24 VDC power supply and the wiring of the
MFI.
11
LED RC "Remote
Bus Check" 12
(Green)
On Incoming remote bus –
connection OK 13
Off Incoming remote bus Check the incoming remote bus cable.
connection disrupted
14
LED BA "Bus
Active" (Green)
15
On Data transmission active on –
InterBus 16
Off No data transmission, InterBus Check the incoming remote bus cable.
stopped Use the diagnostic display on the master interface
module to localize the fault further. 17
Flashing Bus active, no cyclical data –
transmission
18
LED TR "Transmit"
(Green)
19
On Parameter data exchange via –
PCP 20
Off No parameter data exchange –
via PCP
21
22
I
0
LED RD "Remote
Bus Disable" (Red)
On Outgoing remote bus is –
switched off (only in case of a
fault).
Off Outgoing remote bus not –
switched off.
SYS-F LED
"System Fault"
(Red)
Off Normal operating status of MFI –
and MOVIMOT®.
Flashes 1 x MFI operating status OK, Evaluate the fault number in MOVIMOT® status word 1
MOVIMOT® signals fault. in the programmable controller. Consult the
MOVIMOT® operating instructions for fault correction.
Reset MOVIMOT® if necessary using the
programmable controller (reset bit in control word 1).
Flashes 2 x MOVIMOT® does not react to Check DIP switches S1/1–4 in MOVIMOT®. Set RS-
setpoints from the InterBus 485 address 1 so that the PO data are enabled.
master because PO data have
not been enabled.
On Communications link between Check the electrical connection between MFI and
MFI and MOVIMOT® is MOVIMOT® (terminals RS+ and RS-).
disrupted or interrupted. See also the sections "Electrical Installation" and
"Project Planning – Installation Planning under EMC
Aspects".
The "SYS-F" LED is always switched off in the PD configurations 0 PD+DI/DO and
0 PD+DI because only the I/O module functions of the MFI are active in this
operating mode.

I
0
1
MFI System Fault/ The communications link between MFI and MOVIMOT® is interrupted or disrupted if the
MOVIMOT® Fault MFI signals a system fault ("SYS-FAULT" LED continuously lit). This system fault is
signalled to the controller as fault code 91 dec by way of the status words of the process 2
input data. Since this system fault usually denotes a wiring problem, it is not possible to
perform a RESET using the control word! Check the electrical connection between MFI
and MOVIMOT®. 3
In the event of a system fault, the process input data return a fixed bit pattern because
valid MOVIMOT® status information is no longer available. Thus, only status word bit 5 4
(malfunction) and the fault code can be used for evaluation within the controller. No
other information is valid!
5
PI1: Status word 1 5B20hex Fault code 91, bit 5 (malfunction) = 1
No other status information is valid! 6
PI3: Status word 2 0020hex Bit 5 (malfunction) = 1
Input byte of the digital inputs XXhex The input information of the digital inputs continues to
be updated!
8
InterBus Timeout If the data transmission via InterBus is disrupted or interrupted, the fieldbus timeout
9
interval expires on the MFI (default value 630 ms). The bus active LED "BA" comes on
to signal that no InterBus data are being transmitted. MOVIMOT® decelerates 10
immediately with the most recently valid ramp, the "ready" relay drops out after about 1
The digital outputs are reset immediately after the fieldbus timeout interval has elapsed! 11
InterBus Master The InterBus master sets all process output data to 0 if the controller is switched from 12
Active/Controller RUN to STOP status. MOVIMOT® then receives the ramp setpoint = 0 in 3 PD mode.
Malfunctioning The digital outputs DO 0 and DO 1 are also reset by the InterBus master! 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Diagnostics via All generation 4 (G4) InterBus master interface modules offer extensive diagnostic
InterBus Master options, both by way of the status and diagnostic display and within the programmable
Interface Module controller. All important G4 diagnostic capabilities are supported since the MFI is based
(G4) on the InterBus protocol chip SUPI 3. Refer to the documentation for the master module
for more information about diagnosis. The following table provides more detailed
troubleshooting information about the most important fault codes which can occur in
conjunction with the MFI.
Diagnostic
Messages via
Fault Fault code Description Fault correction
Status and name (hex)
Diagnostic Display
OUT1 0C8A Fault on the outgoing interface of the MFI. Check the setting of DIP switch 6
of G4 Master The outgoing interface (OUT1) was (NEXT/END). This switch must be set
Modules activated although no station has been to END if the MFI is the last station.
connected or configured in the master.
DEV 0C40 Fault on a station (device). The length Check the setting of the DIP switches
code of the specified MFI does not on the MFI.
correspond to the entry in the
configuration frame.
DEV 0C70 Data transfer was cancelled, either Check the setting of the DIP switches
because the initialization of SUPI 3 failed on the MFI for validity.
or the MFI is defective. This fault code
also appears if a reserved DIP switch
setting is selected!
PF TEN 0BB4 Fault history of the last ten periphery Check the wiring and shielding of the
faults (PF). The MFI signals a periphery MFI. Switch the MFI on again. Fit a
fault when a microprocessor reset has new MFI electronic unit or contact
been carried out (due to EMC problems or SEW if the fault reoccurs.
defective hardware).
Additional diagnostic messages can be found in the description of your InterBus master
module.

I
0
1
Process Data If the InterBus is in "RUN" status, you can analyze the process data being exchanged
Monitoring between the master module and the MFI using the status and diagnostic display of the
master module in monitor mode ("MONI"). This mechanism represents a very simple 2
means of analyzing which setpoint and actual values are exchanged between the
master and the MFI. The following example demonstrates how to use this monitor
function. 3
Example for The MFI is operated with the following configuration: "3 PD + DI/DO." The addresses 4
Process Data were assigned in the process data description as follows:
Monitoring:
5
Process output data from InterBus master to MFI (OUT):
MFI-PO 1..3: Address P132...136 6
MFI-DO: Address P100
7
Process input data from MFI to InterBus master (IN):
MFI-PI 1..3: Address P132..136
8
MFI-DI: Address P100
9
You can now analyze the MFI process data as follows using the "MONI" operating
mode:
10
Meaning Process data Setting on the diagnostic display:
name Operating mode MONI (monitor)
Direction Assignment 11
Control word 1 to MOVIMOT® MFI-PO1 OUT P132
Speed setpoint [%] to MOVIMOT® MFI-PO2 OUT P134
12
Ramp [ms] to MOVIMOT® MFI-PO3 OUT P136
Status of the digital outputs of MFI MFI-DO OUT P100
Status word 1 from MOVIMOT® MFI-PI1 IN P132 13
Actual value of apparent current from MFI-PI2 IN P134
MOVIMOT®
Status word 2 from MOVIMOT® MFI-PI3 IN P136
14
Status of the digital inputs of MFI MFI-DI IN P100
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 Startup of InterBus (Fiber Optic)
0
10.5 Startup of InterBus (Fiber Optic)

the housing cover (MFI)!
1. Verify correct connection of MOVIMOT® and InterBus connection module (MFZ11A,

MFZ13A, MFZ16A or MFZ18A).
ON
ON ON
for for
2. 1
3. 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 5 6 7
05064AXX 05065AXX
100
f [Hz]
5 6
75 f1
50
25
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1)
05066AXX
5. Re-insert PG screw plug of the cover (with gasket).

3 4
Function Setting
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8

[Hz]
3 4
Function Setting
5 6 7 8
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ramp time t1 [s] 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10
8. Set MFI DIP switch (“Setting MFI DIP Switch” on page 231).
9. Replace and secure the cover on the MOVIMOT® connection box and affix the MFI
housing cover.

I
Startup of InterBus (Fiber Optic) 10
0
1
10.Switch on the supply voltage (24VDC) for the MFI InterBus interface and MOVIMOT®.
The "UL" and "RD" LEDs on the MFI should now light up and the red "SYS-FAULT"
LED should go out. If this is not the case, possible wiring or setup mistakes can be 2
localized with reference to the LED states (see the section "Purpose of LED Display"
on page 237).
11.Configure MFI InterBus interface in the InterBus master ("Configuring InterBus
3
Master [Project Planning]" on page 232).
4
Setting the MFI The MOVIMOT® process data width and MFI operating mode can be set with DIP
DIP Switches switches 1 – 8 of the MFI module. 5
Process Data The process data width for MOVIMOT® is set using DIP switches 1 and 2. The MFI
Width / Operating InterBus interface supports the process data width 2 PD and 3 PD for MOVIMOT®. As
Mode an option, an additional word can be switched on for transferring the digital I/Os via DIP 6
switch 7 (I/O).
Baud Rate The baud rate is set with DIP switch 8. Ensure a uniform baud rate setting of all bus 7
stations!
Continuation of The MFI module with fiber optic automatically recognizes whether it is the last station on 8
Ring Circuit NEXT/ the InterBus. A physical continuation of the ring circuit is not possible.
END
9
The following figure shows the SEW factory setting:
• 3PD for MOVIMOT® +1 word for digital I/O = 64 bit data width on the InterBus
• Baud rate = 2 Mbps
10
PD2 (2 1) I/O 11
res.
res.
res.
res.
PD1 (2 0) 500 kBaud
ON 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 13
2 MBaud
04792AXX
14
Settings of The following table shows the settings of the InterBus data width using DIP switches 1, 15
InterBus Data 2 and 7.
Width
DIP 1: DIP 2: DIP 7: Designation Function InterBus data
20 21 +1 I/O width
16
OFF OFF OFF Reserved None IB init fault
ON OFF OFF Reserved Not possible with MOVIMOT® IB init fault 17
OFF ON OFF 2 PD 2 PD to MOVIMOT® 32 bit
ON ON OFF 3 PD 3 PD to MOVIMOT® 48 bit
18
OFF OFF ON 0 PD + DI/DO Only I/O 16 bit
ON OFF ON Reserved Not possible with MOVIMOT® IB init fault
OFF ON ON 2 PD + DI/DO 2 PD to MOVIMOT® + I/O 48 bit
19
ON ON ON 3 PD + DI/DO 3 PD to MOVIMOT® + I/O 64 bit
20
21
22
I
0
Configuring There are two steps involved in configuring the MFI in the InterBus master interface
InterBus Master module using the project planning software "CMD-Tool" (Configuration-Monitoring-
(Project Diagnosis). The bus structure is created in the first step. Next, the process data are
Planning) described and addressed.
Configuring the The bus structure can be configured online or offline using the CMD tool IBS CMD. In
Bus Structure offline status, the MFI is configured using "Insert with Ident Code." The following
information must be entered:
Offline
Configuration:
Program setting: Function / meaning
Insert with Ident
Code Ident Code: 3 decimal Digital module with input/output data
Process data channel: This setting depends on DIP switches 1, 2 and 7 on the MFI
32 bit 2 PD
48 bit 3 PD or 2 PD + I/O
64 bit (delivery condition) 3 PD + I/O
Type of station: Remote bus station
Online It is possible to completely install the InterBus system first, wire up all MFI interface
Configuration: modules and then set the DIP switches. Next, the CMD-Tool can be used to read in the
Reading in the entire bus structure (configuration frame). All MFIs are automatically detected with their
Configuration data width settings.
Frame Check the setting of MFI DIP switches 1, 2 and 7 with a process data channel
length of 48 bits because this process data length is used both for the 3 PD
configuration and for 2 PD + DI/DO. The MFI appears as a digital I/O module (type
DIO) when the read-in procedure is complete.

I
0
1
Creating Process The CMD-Tool always provides a default description for all MFI process data. It is
Data Description possible to use a start address for the input and output area of the programmable
controller. In this version, the addresses of the digital inputs and outputs are located 2
directly after the MOVIMOT® process data addresses, which means they may lie within
the (analog) peripheral area of the programmable controller. In this case, the reserved
bits of the I/O word take up memory area unnecessarily within the controller. A 3
corresponding process data description makes it possible to mask out the reserved bits
and, for example, assign each process data word its own address.
4
Example 1: Default The following table shows the simplest way of describing process data. The four process
Process Data data words of the MFI signal that the process data configuration in question is the one
5
Description for 3 PD+DI/DO. The start address P132 is now assigned separately for the input and
output data area. All process data words are located sequentially without any gaps. 6
no.
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI 23 IN I 64 0 0 P132
7
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI23 OUT O 64 0 0 P132
8
of the InterBus master module. 9
INTERBUS Master
Address area 10
MOVIMOT® + MFI
Input addresses Output addresses

P132 PO1
P134 PO2 PO1: Control word 1 PO2: Speed [%] PO3: Ramp Digital Output 11
P136 PO3
P138 Digital Output (Word)
12
P132 PI1
PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2 Digital Input
P134 PI2 13
P136 PI3
P138 Digital Input (Word)
-+ 14
02105CEN
15
S5) as follows: 16
Read from PI1 – 3: L PW 132, L PW 134, L PW 136 17
Set outputs: T PW 138
Read inputs: L PW 138 18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Example 2: It is much more efficient to divide up the MOVIMOT® process data and the I/O data of
Dividing and the digital inputs and outputs which, as a rule, should be located in the bit-addressable
Optimizing area of the programmable controller. The following table shows how the division is
Process Data for made.
MOVIMOT® and
DI/DO no.
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI 23 IN I 64 0 0
P132
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PI1 – 3 I 48 0 0
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-DI I 16 7 0 P100
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI 23 OUT O 64 0 0
P132
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PO1 – 3 O 48 0 0
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-DO O 16 7 0 P100
of the InterBus master module for this optimized type.
INTERBUS Master
Address area
MOVIMOT ® + MFI
Output addresses
AB100 Digital Output (low byte)
P132 PA1
P134 PA2
PO1: Control word 1 PO2: Speed [%] PO3: Ramp Digital Output
P136 PA3
EB100
Input addresses
Digital Input (low byte)

P132 PE1
P134 PE2 PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2 Digital Input
P136 PE3 Process input data (PI) -+
02106BEN
S5) as follows:
Setting outputs: AB 100 (e.g. S O 100.0)
Read inputs: EB 100 (e.g. A I 100.0)0

I
0
1
Example 3: In this example, there is the same separation of process data for MOVIMOT® and DI/
Detailed Process DO as in example 2. However, each process data word is described individually. This
Data Description of significantly increases the clarity. Process data access takes place in the same way as 2
MFI in example 2.
Station name ID T no. Process data I/O Length Byte Bit Assignment 3
name
MOVIMOT® + MFI 31 1.0 MFI 23 IN I 64 0 0
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PI1 I 16 0 0 P132 4
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PI2 I 16 2 0 P134
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PI3 I 16 4 0 P136 5
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-DI I 16 7 0 P100
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI 23 OUT O 64 0 0
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PO1 O 16 0 0 P132
6
MOVIMOT® + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PO2 O 16 2 0 P134
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-PO3 O 16 4 0 P136 7
®
MOVIMOT + MFI 3 1.0 MFI-DO O 16 7 0 P100
8
Control Program in Sample program S5 (adapted to the aforementioned configuration) for controlling the
Programmable MOVIMOT® via InterBus (see page 278). 9
Controller
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 Function of InterBus Interface (Fiber Optic)
0
10.6 Function of InterBus Interface (Fiber Optic)

Process Data and MFI InterBus interfaces not only make it possible to control MOVIMOT® AC motors but
Sensor/Actuator also permit sensors/actuators to be connected to four digital input terminals and two
Processing digital output terminals. For this purpose, an additional I/O word is added to the InterBus
protocol following the process data for MOVIMOT®. The extra digital inputs and outputs
of the MFI are mapped in this I/O byte.
InterBus maximum configuration "3PD + DI/DO":
MOVIMOT ® + MF...
Fieldbus Master
-+
05123AEN
Structure of
Input/Output
Word of MFI 23 / Reserved value = 0
MFI 33 Output terminal DO 1
MFI 23
Input terminal DI 0
Input terminal DI 1
Input terminal DI 2
Input terminal DI 3
Reserved value = 0
MFI 33
Input terminal DI 0
Input terminal DI 1
Input terminal DI 2
Input terminal DI 3
Input terminal DI 4
Input terminal DI 5
Reserved value = 0
04799AEN

I
Function of InterBus Interface (Fiber Optic) 10
0
1
Explanation of The MFI InterBus interface has five LEDs for InterBus diagnostics and a further LED for
LED Display displaying system faults.
2
3
UL
RC US1
MFI INTERBUS RL
BA US2
4
DI0 DI2 DI4
RD FO1
TR FO2
5
SYS-F DI1 DI3 DI5
8
50463AXX
9
LED UL "U-Logic"
(Green)
10
On Supply voltage applied –
Off No supply voltage Check the 24 VDC power supply and the wiring of the 11
MFI.
12
LED RC "Remote
Bus Check"
(Green)
Condition Meaning Fault correction 13
On Incoming remote bus –
connection OK
Off Incoming remote bus Check the incoming remote bus cable. 14
connection disrupted
15
LED BA "Bus
Active" (Green)
Condition Meaning Fault correction 16
On Data transmission active on –
InterBus
Off No data transmission, InterBus Check the incoming remote bus cable.
17
stopped Use the diagnostic display on the master interface
module to localize the fault further.
Flashing Bus active, no cyclical data – 18
transmission
19
20
21
22
I
0
LED RD "Remote
Bus Disable"
(Yellow)
On Outgoing remote bus is –
switched off (only in case of a
fault).
Off Outgoing remote bus not –
switched off.
LED TR "Transmit"
(Green)
On Parameter data exchange via –
PCP.
Off No parameter data exchange –
via PCP.
SYS-F LED
"System Fault"
(Red)
Off Normal operating status of MFI –
and MOVIMOT®.
Flashes 1 x MFI operating status OK, Evaluate the fault number in MOVIMOT® status word 1
MOVIMOT® signals fault. in the programmable controller. Refer to the
MOVIMOT® operating instructions for information
about fault rectification. Reset MOVIMOT® if
necessary using the programmable controller (reset bit
in control word 1).
Flashes 2 x MOVIMOT® does not react to Check DIP switches S1/1–4 in MOVIMOT®. Set RS-
setpoints from the InterBus 485 address 1 so that the PO data are enabled.
master because PO data have
not been enabled.
On Communications link between Check the electrical connection between MFI and
MFI and MOVIMOT® is MOVIMOT® (terminals RS+ and RS-).
disrupted or interrupted. See also the sections "Electrical Installation" and
"Project Planning – Installation Planning under EMC
Aspects".
The "SYS-F" LED is always switched off in the PD configurations 0 PD+DI/DO and
0 PD+DI because only the I/O module functions of the MFI are active in this
operating mode.
US1 (Green) Monitoring the Supply Voltage VS1

Condition Meaning
Off VS1 not present
Flashing VS1 below the permitted voltage range
On VS1 present
US2 (Green) Monitoring the Supply Voltage US2

Condition Meaning
On VS2 present
Off VS2 not present or below the permitted voltage range

I
0
1
FO2 (Yellow) Monitoring of outgoing fiber optic line.
Condition Meaning
2
On Outgoing fiber optic line not OK or system reserve reached in
controlled operation.
Off Outgoing fiber optic line OK or not assigned. 3
FO1 (Yellow) Monitoring of incoming fiber optic line. 4

Condition Meaning
On Incoming fiber optic line not OK or system reserve reached in 5
controlled operation.
Off Incoming fiber optic line OK or not assigned.
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
MFI System Fault The communications link between MFI and MOVIMOT® is interrupted if the MFI signals
/ MOVIMOT® a system fault ("SYS-FAULT" LED continuously lit). This system fault is signalled to the
Fault controller as fault code 91 dec by way of the status words of the process input data. Since
this system fault usually denotes a wiring problem, it is not possible to perform a RESET
using the control word! Check the electrical connection between MFI and MOVIMOT®.
In the event of a system fault, the process input data return a fixed bit pattern because
valid MOVIMOT® status information is no longer available. Thus, only status word bit 5
(malfunction) and the fault code can be used for evaluation within the controller. No
other information is valid!
PI1: Status Word 1 5B20hex Fault code 91, bit 5 (malfunction) = 1
No other status information is valid!
PI3: Status Word 2 0020hex Bit 5 (malfunction) = 1
Input byte of digital XXhex The input information of digital inputs
inputs continue to be updated!
InterBus Timeout If the data transmission via InterBus is disrupted or interrupted, the fieldbus timeout
interval expires on the MFI (default value 630 ms). The LED IB DIAG (green) flashes
(0.5 Hz) and signals that no InterBus data are transferred. MOVIMOT® decelerates
immediately with the most recently valid ramp, the "ready" relay drops out after about 1
The digital outputs are reset immediately after the fieldbus timeout interval has elapsed!
InterBus Master The InterBus master sets all process output data to 0 if the controller is switched from
Active/Controller RUN to STOP status. MOVIMOT® then receives the ramp setpoint = 0 in 3 PD mode.
Malfunctioning The digital outputs DO 0 and DO 1 are also reset by the InterBus master!

I
0
1
Diagnosis via All generation 4 (G4) InterBus master interface modules offer extensive diagnostic
InterBus Master options, both by way of the status and diagnostic display and within the programmable
Interface Module controller. All important G4 diagnostic capabilities are supported since the MFI is based 2
(G4) on the InterBus protocol chip SUPI 3. Refer to the documentation for the master module
for more information about diagnosis. The following table provides more detailed
troubleshooting information about the most important fault codes which can occur in 3
conjunction with the MFI.
4
Diagnostic
Messages via
Status and
Fault Fault code Description Fault correction 5
name (hex)
Diagnostic Display
DEV 0C40 Fault on a station (device). The length Check the setting of the DIP switches
of G4 Master code of the specified MFI does not on the MFI. 6
Modules correspond to the entry in the
configuration frame.
DEV 0C70 Data transfer was cancelled, either Check the setting of the DIP switches 7
because the initialization of SUPI 3 failed on the MFI for validity.
or the MFI is defective. This fault code
also appears if a reserved DIP switch
setting is selected! 8
PF TEN 0BB4 Fault history of the last ten periphery Check the wiring and shielding of the
faults (PF). The MFI signals a periphery MFI. Check the US2. Switch the MFI
fault when a microprocessor reset has on again. Fit a new MFI electronic unit 9
been carried out (due to EMC problems or or contact SEW if the fault reoccurs.
defective hardware) or US2 is below the
permitted voltage range.
10
Additional diagnostic messages can be found in the description of your InterBus master
module.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Process Data If the InterBus is in the "RUN" status, you can analyze the process data being
Monitoring exchanged between the master module and the MFI using the status and diagnostic
display of the master module in monitor mode ("MONI"). This mechanism represents a
very simple means of analyzing which setpoint and actual values are exchanged
between the master and the MFI. The following example demonstrates how to use this
monitor function.
Example for The MFI is operated with the following configuration: "3 PD + DI/DO." The addresses
Process Data were assigned in the process data description as follows:
Monitoring
Process output data from InterBus master to MFI (OUT):

MFI-PO 1..3: Address P132...136
MFI-DO: Address P100
Process input data from MFI to InterBus master (IN):

MFI-PI 1..3: Address P132..136
MFI-DI: Address P100
You can now analyze the MFI process data as follows using the "MONI" operating
mode:
Meaning Process data Setting on the diagnostic display:
name MONI (Monitor) operating mode
Direction Assignment
Control word 1 to MOVIMOT® MFI-PO1 OUT P132
Speed setpoint [%] to MOVIMOT® MFI-PO2 OUT P134
Ramp [ms] to MOVIMOT® MFI-PO3 OUT P136
Status of the digital outputs of MFI MFI-DO OUT P100
Actual value of apparent current from MFI-PI2 IN P134
MOVIMOT®
Status of the digital inputs of MFI MFI-DI IN P100

I
Startup with DeviceNet 10
0
1
10.7 Startup with DeviceNet
2
• It is recommended switching the 24 VDC power supply off before removing/replacing
the housing cover (MFD)! 3
• The DeviceNet bus connection is permanently secured using the connection
technology described in the section "Electrical Installation," so that the DeviceNet
operation can continue even after the removal of the module electronics. 4
1. Verify correct connection of MOVIMOT® and DeviceNet connection module (MFZ31, 5

MFZ33, MFZ36 or MFZ38).
2. Set DIP switch S1/1 (on MOVIMOT®) to ON (= address 1). 6
®
3. Check the setting for 4Q operation (DIP switch S1/6 = OFF) (on MOVIMOT ).
7
ON
ON ON
for for 8
2. 3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 5 6 7
05064AXX 05065AXX 9
4. Set the maximum speed using f1 setpoint potentiometer (on MOVIMOT®).
10
100
f [Hz]
5 6
75 f1 11
50
12
25
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1) 13
05066AXX
(1) Potentiometer setting 14

5. Re-insert PG screw plug of the cover (with gasket).
6. Set minimum frequency fmin with switch f2 (on MOVIMOT®). 15
3 4
Function Setting
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 16
5 6 7 8

[Hz]
17
7. If ramp is not set via fieldbus, set ramp time with switch t1 (on MOVIMOT®) (ramp
times are based on a setpoint jump of 50 Hz).
Function Setting
18
3 4
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Ramp time t1 [s] 0,1 0,3 0,2 0,5 0,7 1 2 3 5 7 10 19

8. Set the DeviceNet address on the MFD module.
9. Connect the DeviceNet cable. Next, the LED test is performed. The Mod/Net LED 20
should flash green and the LED SYS-F should go out.
21
22
I
10 Startup with DeviceNet
0
Setting DeviceNet The baud rate is set via DIP switches 1 and 2 of block S1, and the DeviceNet address
Address (MAC-ID) is set via DIP switches 3–8 of Block S1. The following figure shows an
(MAC-ID) and example for the setting of address and baud rate:
Baud Rate
(1) Address (MAC-ID) (setting: address 9)
S1 Factory setting: address 63)
valid addresses: 0 to 63
25 x 0 = 0
8
(2) Baud rate
24 x 0 = 0 (setting: 500 kbps = factory setting)
7
6 23 x 1 = 8
(1)
22 x 0 = 0
5
21 x 0 = 0
4
20 x 1 = 1
3
9
2
21 x 1 = 2
ON
20 x 0 = 0 (2)
1
05075AXX
Determining DIP The following table uses address 9 as an example of how the DIP switch setting is
Switch Setting for determined for any bus address:
any Address
9/2 = 4 1 DIP 3 = ON 1
4/2 = 2 0 DIP 4 = OFF 2
2/2 = 1 0 DIP 5 = OFF 4
1/2 = 0 1 DIP 6 = ON 8
0/2 = 0 0 DIP 7 = OFF 16
0/2 = 0 0 DIP 8 = OFF 32
Determining Baud The following table shows how to determine the baud rate using the DIP switch
Rate Using DIP assignment:
Switch Setting
Baud rate Value DIP 1 DIP 2
125 kbps 0 OFF OFF
250 kbps 1 ON OFF
500 kbps 2 OFF ON
(reserved) 3 ON ON

I
Startup with DeviceNet 10
0
1
Setting Process The process data length is set via DIP switches 1 and 2 of block S2 and the I/Os are
Data Length and enabled via DIP switch 3 of block S2.
I/O Enable 2
S2 (1) Reserved (position = OFF)
(2) I/O enable
(setting: Enable = factory setting) 3
8
(3) Process data length
7
(setting: 3 PD = factory setting)
(1) 4
6
5
5
4
3
1 = Enable (2)
21 x 1 = 2
2
(3) 6
20 x 1 = 1
ON
= 3
050763AXX 7
The following table shows how to determine I/O enable using the DIP switch
8
assignment.
I/O Value DIP 1 9
Disabled 0 OFF
Enabled 1 ON 10
The following table shows how to determine the process data length using the DIP 11
switch assignment.
Process data length Value DIP 1 DIP 2 12
0 PD 0 OFF OFF
1 PD 1 ON OFF
13
2 PD 2 OFF ON
3 PD 3 ON ON
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 Startup with DeviceNet
0
Configuration The enclosed diskette contains "EDS files" to be used for the configuration of the
(Project DeviceNet master. These files are installed by using the configuration software
Planning) for (DeviceNet Manager). The detailed installation procedure can be found in the manuals
DeviceNet Master of the corresponding configuration software.
The diskette also contains a BMP file that contains a symbol for the configuration
software.
Configuration 1. Install the EDS file using the configuration
(Project Planning) software (DeviceNet-Manager from Allen-
of MFD DeviceNet Bradley). The slave station can then be found in
Interface: the folder "SEW-Eurodrive Profile" under the
name: "SEW-MOVIMOT-MFD2x" and "SEW-
MOVIMOT-MDF3x."
2. Create a new project or open an existing project
and read in all network components using "Start
Online Build."
3. Double click the symbol to configure the MFD
interface. Next, read in the parameters of the
module.
4. The MFD must be assigned a storage area for
data exchange so that it can address the
interface via PLC. This can be accomplished,
for example, by using the DeviceNet Manager
from Allen-Bradley. The documentation
accompanying your configuration software
contains detailed information.
5. Set the process data length and the I/Os using
the configuration software. 03309AXX
After downloading the configuration to the DeviceNet scanner (master), the MFD signals
by means of the Mod/Net LED that a connection has been established with the master.
The PIO and BIO LED indicate whether the relevant process data connections have
been established.

I
Function of DeviceNet Interface 10
0
1
10.8 Function of DeviceNet Interface
Process Data and The DeviceNet interface MFD not only makes it possible to control MOVIMOT® 2
Sensor/Actuator AC motors but also permits sensors/actuators to be connected to digital input terminals
Processing and digital output terminals. For this purpose, an additional I/O byte is added to the
(Polled I/O = PIO) DeviceNet protocol following the process data for MOVIMOT®. The extra digital inputs 3
and outputs of the MFD are reproduced in this I/O byte.
4
MOVIMOT ® + MFD.. 5
Feldbus master
PO1: Control word 1 PO2: Speed [%] PA3: Ramp Dig. Out 6
PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2 Dig. In 7
8
-+
03306AEN 9
10
Structure of
Input/Output Byte
12
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte: Digital Outputs
13
Fieldbus
MFD21/22
master Byte: Digital Inputs
14
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
input terminal DI 0
input terminal DI 1
15
input terminal DI 2
input terminal DI 3
16
reserved, value = 0

Fieldbus
17
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MFD32
master
input terminal DI 0 18
input terminal DI 1
input terminal DI 2
input terminal DI 3
input terminal DI 4
19
input terminal DI 5
03104AEN
21
22
I
10 Function of DeviceNet Interface
0
Broadcast The SEW fieldbus profile does not contain bit-strobe I/O messages. They represent a
Process Data DeviceNet-specific process data exchange.
Processing via They involve a broadcast message that is sent out by the master. The length of this
Bit-Strobe I/O broadcast message is 8 bytes = 64 bits. One bit in this message is assigned to each
(BIO) station according to its station address. The value of this bit may be 0 or 1, thereby
triggering two different responses in the recipient
Bit value Meaning BIO LED
0 Only send back the process input data green
1 Set process output data to 0 and green
Send process input data
Caution:
If the process output data is set to 0 via a bit-strobe message, the ramp setpoint is set
to 0.
Data Area of Bit- The following table shows the data area of the bit-strobe request message which
Strobe Request represents the allocation of stations (= station address) to data bits.
Message For example, the station with station address (MAC-ID) 16 only processes bit 0 in data
byte 2.
Byte offset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 ID 7 ID 6 ID 5 ID 4 ID 3 ID 2 ID 1 ID 0

I
0
1
Exchange of Bit- Each station that has received this bit-strobe I/O message responds with its current
Strobe I/Os process input data and, if necessary, with the byte for the digital inputs. The length of
the process input data corresponds to the process data length for the polled I/O 2
connection plus, if necessary, a byte for the digital inputs. It can be set using DIP
switches.
3
Bit 16
for units with
MOVIMOT ® + MFD
Fieldbus master address 16 4
Bit-strobe telegram
1
5
PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2 Dig. In. 6
7
-+
03105AEN 8
Caution:
The set process data length influences the process data lengths of both the bit-strobe I/ 9
O and the polled I/O messages. This means the settings in the controller for the process
data lengths of both the polled I/O and the bit-strobe I/O always have to be the same.
10
Functions of the Baud rate and address (MAC-ID) of the module can be set via DIP switch block S1.
DIP Switches 11
S1
25 (1) Address (MAC-ID) 12

8
(2) Baud rate

4
7
2
23 13
6
(1)
2
5
14
4
21
3
0
2
21
2
(2) 15
ON
20
1
05077AXX 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
PD Configuration The PD configuration on the MFD can be set via DIP switch block S2.
S2
(1) I/O enable
(2) Process data length
8
7
6
5
34
3
(1)
1
2 12
2
2
(2)
20 0
ON
11
ON
05078AXX
This results in the following PD configurations for the different MFD types:
DIP switch Supported MFD Description Process Process
setting types output data input data
length in length in
bytes bytes
2 PD all MFD types MOVIMOT® control using 2 process data 4 4
3 PD all MFD types MOVIMOT® control using 3 process data 6 6
®
No MOVIMOT control, only processing of
0 PD + DI/DO MFD 21/22 1 1
MOVIMOT® control via 2 process data words and
2 PD + DI/DO MFD 21/22 5 5
processing of digital inputs and outputs
3 PD + DI/DO MFD 21/22 7 7
processing of digital inputs and outputs
®
No MOVIMOT control, only processing
0 PD + DI MFD 32 0 1
of digital inputs
2 PD + DI MFD 32 4 5
processing of digital inputs
3 PD + DI MFD 32 6 7
processing of digital inputs

I
0
1
Explanation of The DeviceNet interface MFD comprises five LEDs for diagnostic purposes:
LED Display • LED Mod/Net (green/red) indicates the module and network status
2
• LED PIO (green/red) indicates the status of the process data channel
• LED BIO (green/red) indicates the status of the bit-strobe process data channel
• LED BUS-F (red) indicates the bus status
3
• LED SYS-F (red) indicates MFD or MOVIMOT® system faults
4
Mod/Net
6
MFD DeviceNetTM
PIO
BIO
BUS-F
7
SYS-F
8
50356AXX 10
Power-Up All LEDs are tested after the unit is switched on. The LEDs are switched on in the 11
following sequence as part of the test:
Time Mod/Net-LED PIO LED BIO LED BUS-F LED SYS-F LED 12
0 ms green off off off off
250 ms red off off off off
13
500 ms off green off off off
750 ms off red off off off
1000 ms off off green off off
14
1250 ms off off red off off
1500 ms off off off red off 15
1750 ms off off off off red
2000 ms off off off off off
16
The unit then evaluates whether a station with the same address is already connected
(DUP-MAC check). If it locates a station with the same address, the unit switches off,
and the LEDs Mod/Net, PIO, and BIO show red continuously. 17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Mod/Net LED The range of functions of the Mod/Net LED (module/network status LED) is defined in
(Green/Red) the DeviceNet specifications. The following table describes this functionality.
Status LED Meaning
Not switched on / offline Off • Unit is offline
• Unit is performing DUP-MAC check
• Unit is switched off
Online and in operational mode Flashes green (1 s • DUP-MAC check was performed
cycle) successfully
• A connection has not yet been established
with a master
• Missing, incorrect or incomplete
configuration
Online, operational mode and Green • Online connection has been established
connected with a master
• Connection is active (Established State)
Minor fault or connection Flashes red (1 s • Polled I/O or/and bit-strobe I/O
timeout cycle) connections are in timeout state
• A correctable fault has occurred in the unit
or in the bus system
Critical fault or critical link Red • A non-correctable fault has occurred
failure • BusOff
• DUP-MAC check has detected an fault
PIO LED (Green/ The PIO LED checks the polled I/O connection (processor data channel). The
Red) functionality is described in the following table.
Status LED Meaning
DUP-MAC check Flashes green (125 • Unit is performing DUP-MAC check
ms cycle)
Not switched on / Off • Unit is offline
Offline but not DUP-MAC check • Unit is switched off
Online and in operational mode Flashes green (1 s • Unit is online
cycle) • DUP-MAC check was performed
successfully
• A PIO connection is being established with
a master (Configuring State)
configuration
Online, operational mode and Green • Online
connected • A PIO connection has been established
(Established State)
Minor fault or connection Flashes red (1 s • A correctable fault has occurred
timeout cycle) • Polled I/O connection is in timeout state
failure • BusOff

I
0
1
BIO LED (Green/ The BIO LED checks the bit-strobe I/O connection. The functionality is described in the
Red) following table.
Status LED Meaning
2
DUP-MAC check Flashes green (125 • Unit is performing DUP-MAC check
ms cycle) 3
Not switched on / Offline but Off • Unit is offline
not DUP-MAC check • Unit is switched off
Online and in operational mode Flashes green (1 s • Unit is online 4
cycle) • DUP-MAC check was performed
successfully
• A BIO connection is being established with
a master (Configuring State) 5
configuration
Online, operational mode and Green • Online 6
connected • A BIO connection has been established
(Established State)
Minor fault or connection Flashes red (1 s • A correctable fault has occurred 7
timeout cycle) • Bit-strobe I/O connection is in timeout state
failure • BusOff 8
9
BUS-F LED (Red) The BUS-F LED displays the physical status of the bus node. The functionality is
described in the following table.
10
Status LED Meaning
Fault-Active-State Off • The number of bus faults is in the normal
range. 11
Fault-Passive-State Flashes red • The unit is performing a DUP-MAC check
(125 ms cycle) and cannot send any messages because
no other stations are connected to the bus. 12
Fault-Passive-State Flashes red (1 s • The number of physical bus faults is too
cycle) high. No more fault messages are actively
written to the bus. 13
BusOFF state Red • The number of physical faults continued to
grow despite a switch to the Fault-Passive-
State. Access to the bus is deactivated. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
SYS-F LED (Red) In general, the SYS-F LED has no functions in the PD configurations 0 PD + DI/DO and
0 PD + DI.
LED Meaning Fault correction
Off Normal operating status of MFD –
and MOVIMOT®.
Flashes 1 x MFD operating status OK, • Evaluate the fault number in MOVIMOT® status
MOVIMOT® signals fault. word 1 in the programmable controller. Reset
MOVIMOT® using the programmable controller
(reset bit in control word 1).
• Read the MOVIMOT® operating instructions for
additional information about fault correction.
Flashes 2 x MOVIMOT® does not react to • Check DIP switches S1/1–4 on MOVIMOT®. Set
setpoints from the DeviceNet RS-485 address 1 so that the PO data are
master because PD data have not enabled.
been enabled.
On Communications link between • Check the electrical connection between MFD
MFD and MOVIMOT® is disrupted and MOVIMOT® (terminals RS+ and RS-).
or interrupted.

I
0
1
Fault Conditions
MFD System Fault The communications link between MFD and MOVIMOT® is interrupted if the MFD
/ MOVIMOT® Fault signals a system fault ("SYS-F" LED continuously lit). This system fault is signalled to 2
the controller as fault code 91 dec via the diagnostics channel and via the status words
of the process input data. Since this system fault usually denotes a wiring problem, it is 3
not possible to perform a RESET using the control word! Check the electrical connection
of MFD and MOVIMOT®. In the event of a system fault, the process input data return a
fixed bit pattern because valid MOVIMOT® status information is no longer available. 4
Thus, only status word bit 5 (malfunction) and the fault code can be used for evaluation
within the controller. No other information is valid!
5
PI1: Status Word 1 5B20hex Fault code 91 (5Bhex), bit 5 (malfunction) = 1
Input byte of the digital inputs XXhex The input information of the digital inputs continues to
be updated.
8
9
DeviceNet Timeout The timeout is triggered by the DeviceNet options card. The timeout interval is set by the
master after the connection has been established. The DeviceNet specifications do not 10
refer to a timeout interval, but to an expected packet rate. The expected packet rate is
calculated from the timeout interval using the following formula:
11
tTimeout time = 4 ⋅t Expected _ Packet _ Rate
12
03112AEN
The expected packet rate can be set via the connection object class (0x05), attribute 13
0x09. The values range from 5 ms to 65,535 ms in increments of 5 ms.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Diagnostics The DeviceNet manager can be used, for example, for Allen-Bradley controllers to
perform bus diagnostics. A start online-build is used to check whether all components
can be reached using the bus.
03307AXX
®
Double-clicking the MOVIMOT MFD symbol displays the fieldbus parameters of the
interface.
03308AXX

I
Startup with CANopen 10
0
1
10.9 Startup with open CANopen
2
the housing cover (MFO)!
3
• The CANopen bus connection is permanently secured using the connection
technology described in the section "Electrical Installation," so that the CANopen
network can continue even after the removal of the module electronics. 4
1. Verify correct connection of MOVIMOT® and connection module (MFZ31, MFZ33, 5

MFZ36 or MFZ38).
6
ON
7
ON ON
for for
2. 3. 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 5 6 7
05064AXX 05065AXX 9
4. Set the maximum speed using f1 setpoint potentiometer (on MOVIMOT®).
10
100
f [Hz]
5 6
75 f1 11
50
25 12
2
(1)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13
05066AXX

14
5. Re-insert screw plug of the cover (with gasket).
6. Set minimum frequency fmin with switch f2 (on MOVIMOT®).
15
3 4
Function Setting
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
16
5 6 7 8

[Hz]
7. If ramp is not set via fieldbus, set ramp time with switch t1 (on MOVIMOT®) (ramp 17
times are based on a setpoint jump of 50 Hz).
Function Setting 18
3 4
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Ramp time t1 [s] 0.1 0.3 0.2 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10

19
8. Set the CANopen address on the MFO module.
9. Connect the CANopen cable. After connecting 24 VDC, the SYS-F LED must go out 20
and the STATE LED must begin flashing.
21
22
I
10 Startup with CANopen
0
Setting CANopen The CANopen address is set using DIP switches S1/1–7.
Address
S1
(1)
8
26
7
25
6
24
5
23 (2)
4
22
3
21
2
ON
20
1
04988AXX
(1) Reserved
(2) Example "Address 9"
Valid addresses: 1 to 127
Factory setting: Address 1
The following table uses address 9 as an example of how the DIP switch settings are
determined for any bus address.
9/2 = 4 1 DIP 1 = ON 1
4/2 = 2 0 DIP 2 = OFF 2
2/2 = 1 0 DIP 3 = OFF 4
1/2 = 0 1 DIP 4 = ON 8
0/2 = 0 0 DIP 5 = OFF 16
0/2 = 0 0 DIP 6 = OFF 32
0/2 = 0 0 DIP 7 = OFF 64

I
Startup with CANopen 10
0
1
Setting CANopen The baud rate is set using DIP switches S2/1 and S2/2. The following table shows how
Baud Rate to determine the baud rate using the DIP switch assignment:
2
S2
8
7
4
6
5
4
5
3
21 x 1 = 2
2
(1) 6
ON
1
20 x 0 = 0
=2
04989AXX
7
(1) = CANopen baud rate
Factory setting: Baud rate = 500 kbps
8
9
125 kbps 0 OFF OFF
250 kbps 1 ON OFF
10
500 kbps 2 OFF ON
1 Mbps 3 ON ON 11
Setting Process The process data length is set via DIP switches S2/3 and S2/4 and the I/Os are enabled 12
Data Length and via DIP switch S2/5.
I/O Enable
S2 13
8
(1)
14
7
6
1 = Enable (2) 15
5
21 x 1 = 2
4
(3)
16
3
20 x 1 = 1
=3
2
17
ON
04990AXX
18
(1) Reserved, position = OFF
(2) I/O enable (setting: Enable = factory setting)
(3) Process data length (setting: 3PD = factory setting)
19
20
21
22
I
10 Startup with CANopen
0
The following table shows how to determine I/O enable using the DIP switch
assignment:
I/O Value DIP 5
Disabled 0 OFF
Enabled 1 ON
The following table shows how to determine the process data length using the DIP
switch assignment:
Process data length Value DIP 3 DIP 4
0 PD 0 OFF OFF
Inacceptable configuration 1 ON OFF
2 PD 2 OFF ON
3 PD 3 ON ON
Configuration "EDS files" are available for the configuration of the CANopen master. These files are
(Project installed by using the configuration software. The detailed installation procedure can be
Planning) of found in the manuals of the corresponding configuration software. The most current
CANopen Master version of the EDS files are located on the Internet at http://www.sew-eurodrive.de.
EDS File An EDS file is available for every possible process data configuration. The name of the
corresponding EDS file consists of the following:
• MXX_YPD.EDS or MXX_YPDI.EDS
A trailing "I" indicates that the "Process Data I/O" DIP switch is switched on. The
meaning of XX and Y can be found in the following table.
XX Unit type Y Number of process data
(as set with the DIP switch)
21 MFO21A 0PD No process data
22 MFO22A 2PD Control via 2 process data
32 MFO32A 3PD Control via 3 process data
Examples: 3 process data words must be transferred to MOVIMOT® with MFO22A fieldbus module.
In addition, an I/O byte must be attached to the process data.
• M22_3PDI.EDS
3 process data words must be transferred to MOVIMOT® with MFO21A fieldbus module.
The I/Os of the MFO21A must not be processed.
The name of the corresponding EDS file is:
• M22_2PD.EDS

I
Function of CANopen Interface 10
0
1
10.10 Function of CANopen Interface
Process Data and The MFO CANopen interface not only makes it possible to control MOVIMOT® 2
Sensor/Actuator AC motors but also permits sensors/actuators to be connected to digital input terminals
Processing and digital output terminals. For this purpose, an additional I/O byte is added to the
CANopen protocol following the process data for MOVIMOT®. The extra digital inputs 3
and outputs of the MFO are reproduced in this I/O byte.
4
MOVIMOT ® + MFO.. 5
Fieldbus Master
PO1: Control word 1 PO2: Speed [%] PO3: Ramp Dig. Out 6
PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2 Dig. In. 7
8
-+
04982AEN 9
10
Structure of
Input/Output Byte
Reserved, value= 0 11
12
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte: Digital Outputs
13
Fieldbus
MFO21/22
Master Byte: Digital Inputs
14
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input terminal DI 0
Output terminal DI 1
15
Input terminal DI 2
Input terminal DI 3
16
reserved, value = 0

Fieldbus
17
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MFO32
Master
Input terminalDI 0 18
Eingangsklemme DI 1
Input terminalDI 2
Input terminal DI 3
Input terminal DI 4
19
Input terminal DI 5
Reserved, value = 0 20
04983AEN
21
22
I
10 Function of CANopen Interface
0
Functions of DIP Switches

Baud Rate and PD Baud rate and PD configuration of the module can be set via DIP switch block S2.
Configuration
S2
8
7
(1)
6
20 (2)
5
21
4
(3)
20
3
21
2
(4)
ON
20
1
04984AXX
(1) Reserved
(2) I/O enable
(3) Process data width
(4) CAN bus baud rate
This results in the following PD configurations for the different MFO types:
DIP switch Supported MFO Description Data length [byte]
settings types
Process output Process input
data data
2PD all MFO types MOVIMOT® control using 2 process data 4 4
®
3PD all MFO types MOVIMOT control using 3 process data 6 6
No MOVIMOT® control, only processing of digital
0PD+DI/DO MFO 21/22 1 1
inputs and outputs
®
MOVIMOT control using 2 process data words
2PD + DI/DO MFO 21/22 5 5
and processing of digital inputs and outputs
MOVIMOT® control using 3 process data words
3PD + DI/DO MFO 21/22 7 7
and processing of digital inputs and outputs
No MOVIMOT® control, only processing of digital
0PD+DI MFO 32 0 1
inputs
2PD + DI MFO 32 4 5
and processing of digital inputs
3PD + DI MF0 32 6 7
and processing of digital inputs
Setting Baud The baud rate for the interface can be set according to the following table:
Rates
125 kbps 0 OFF OFF
250 kbps 1 ON OFF
500 kbps 2 OFF ON
1 Mbps 3 ON ON

I
0
1
Address With the MFO, the address is set via DIP switch S1.
S1 2
8
26 3
7
25
6
24 4
5
23 (1)
4
22
5
3
21
2
ON
20 6
1
04985AXX
(1) Valid address: 1-127 7

Caution: Module address 0 is not a valid CANopen address! If Address 0 is set,
the interface cannot be operated. The LEDs COMM, GUARD AND STATE flash 8
simultaneously to indicate this fault (see also the section "Purpose of LED
Display").
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Explanation of The MFO CANopen interface comprises five LEDs for diagnostic purposes:
LED Display • LED COMM (green) indicates data transfers from and to the node
• LED GUARD (green) indicates lifetime monitoring
• LED STATE (green) indicates the status of the bit-strobe process data channel
• LED BUS-F (red) indicates the bus status
• LED SYS-F (red) indicates MFO or MOVIMOT® system faults
COMM
CanOpen
GUARD
STATE
MFO
BUS-F
SYS-F
50355AXX
COMM (Green) The LED COMM always flashes briefly if the CANopen interface has sent a message or
if a message addressed to the interface is received.
GUARD (Green) The LED GUARD indicates the status of the CANopen lifetime monitoring.
LED Meaning
Off CANopen timeout monitoring for fieldbus interface is not activated (object 0x100C = 0
and/or object 0x100D=0). This is the default setting after switch-on.
On CANopen timeout monitoring for fieldbus interface is activated
(Object 0x100C≠0 and object 0x100D≠0).
Flashes green CANopen master did not receive any additional lifetime requests. The fieldbus interface
(1 s cycle) is in fieldbus timeout state.

I
0
1
STATE (Green) The LED STATE shows the current NMT status of the fieldbus interface. The fieldbus
interface supports minimal BOOTUP, i.e. the statuses "pre-operational," "operational"
and "stopped" exist. 2
Status LED Meaning
Pre-operational Flashes The device can only (with SDOs) be parameterized, process data (PDOs) 3
(1 s are ignored. This status exists after switch-on.
cycle)
Operational On PDOs, SDOs and NMT services are processed. 4
Stopped Off The device ignores all SDOs and PDOs. Only messages of the NMT are
processed.
5
BUS-F (Red) The BUS-F LED displays the physical status of the bus node. The functionality is
described in the following table. 6
Status LED Meaning
Rx-Fault-Counter < 128 Off The number of bus faults is within the normal range 7
and (Fault-Active-State).
Tx-Fault-Counter < 128
128 < Rx-Fault-Counter < 255 Flashes The number of physical bus faults is too high. No more 8
and/or Red fault messages are actively written to the bus (Fault-
128 < Tx-Fault-Counter < 255 (1 s Passive-State).
cycle) 9
Rx-Fault-Counter ≥ 255 Red BusOFF state
and/or The number of physical faults continued to grow despite
Tx-Fault-Counter ≥ 255 a switch to the Fault-Passive-State. Access to the bus is
deactivated.
10
11
SYS-F (Red) In general, the SYS-F LED is without functions in the PD configurations 0PD + DI/DO
and 0PD + DI.
LED Meaning Fault correction
12
Off Normal operating status of MFO and –
MOVIMOT®.
13
Flashe MFO operating status OK, MOVIMOT® Evaluate the fault number in MOVIMOT® status word
s signals fault. 1 in the programmable controller. Reset MOVIMOT®
1x using the programmable controller (reset bit in
control word 1). Additional information can be found 14
in the MOVIMOT® Operating Instructions.
Flashe MOVIMOT® does not react to setpoints Check DIP switches S1/1–4 in MOVIMOT®. Set
s from the CANopen master because PD RS485 address 1 so that the PO data are enabled. 15
2x data have not been enabled.
On Communications link between MFO and Check the electrical connection between MFO and
MOVIMOT® is disrupted or interrupted. MOVIMOT® (terminals RS+ and RS-). 16
See the sections "Electrical Installation" and
"Installation Planning under EMC Aspects."
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Fault Conditions
MFO System Fault The communications link between MFO and MOVIMOT® is interrupted if the MFO
/ MOVIMOT® Fault signals a system fault ("SYS-F" LED continuously lit). This system fault is signalled to
the controller as fault code 91 dec via the diagnostics channel and via the status words
of the process input data. Since this system fault usually denotes a wiring problem, it is
not possible to perform a RESET using the control word! Check the electrical connection
between MFO and MOVIMOT®. In the event of a system fault, the process input data
return a fixed bit pattern because valid MOVIMOT® status information is no longer
available. Thus, only status word bit 5 (malfunction) and the fault code can be used for
evaluation within the controller. No other information is valid!
Process input word Hex Meaning
value
PI1: Status Word 1 5B20hex Fault code 91 (5Bhex), bit 5 (malfunction) = 1
PI2: Current actual 0000hex Information is not valid!
value
Input byte of the digital XXhex The input information of the digital inputs continues to be updated.
inputs
CANopen Timeout Monitoring individual MFO.. interfaces through the master (node-guarding):
To monitor the communication, the master cyclically sends a node-guarding object with
set RTR bit to the interfaces. Upon readiness, the interfaces respond with a
corresponding node guarding object which returns the current operating state and a
toggle bit. The toggle bit changes with each message between 0 and 1.
The network master uses the response to verify whether the stations are still functional.
In case of a fault, the master can initiate an action that is appropriate for the application
(e.g. stopping all drives).
Node guarding is active in all operating states following the first reception of a "Node
Event" from the master. Activation of node guarding is signalled through continuous
illumination of GUARD LED.
Response of MFO interfaces upon failure of the NMT master (life guarding):
Monitoring is active if life time factor ≠ 0 and/or guard time ≠ 0.
If monitoring is activated, the MFO interface blocks the MOVIMOT® drive if the master
does not trigger a "Node Event" within the timeout interval. In addition, the interface
sends an EMERGENCY object via CAN bus.
The timeout interval (milliseconds) is calculated as follows:
life time factor (indices 0x100C) • guard time (indices 0x100D)
Timeout intervals below 5 ms are not accepted, previous value remains active.
Caution: The diagnostic interface and MOVITOOLS® can be used together with menu
item P819 to read the timeout interval set by the controller, but it can only be changed
by the controller via CANopen objects 0x100C and 0x100D and not via MOVITOOLS®.

I
0
1
Emergency Object The emergency object can be triggered by two events.
1. A fault occurred in MOVIMOT®, i.e. the fault bit is set in the control word. In this case,
an emergency object with fault code "Device specific" (0xFFFF) is transmitted. 2
2. The interface detected a violation of life guarding. As a result, an emergency object
with fault code "Life guard Fault" (0x8130) is sent. 3
If the fault is corrected, it is signalled by an emergency object with fault code "No Fault"
(0x0000).
4
The status word is sent along with every emergency object. The exact structure is shown
in the following table:
5
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
Emergency fault Fault register Status word from
Contents 0 0 0
Code (Object 0x1001) MOVIMOT® 6
Process Data The CANopen interface always sends out process input data (TX-PDO1) if it received 7
Exchange process output data (RX-PDO1).
In addition, the process input data can be queried with RTR-TX-PDO1.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 Startup with RS-485 Master
0
10.11 Startup with RS-485 Master

Installation")
2. Set correct RS-485 address at DIP switches S1/1...S1/4.
Address – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
S1/1 – X – X – X – X – X – X – X – X
S1/2 – – X X – – X X – – X X – – X X
S1/3 – – – – X X X X – – – – X X X X
S1/4 – – – – – – – – X X X X X X X X
– = switch setting OFF, X = switch setting ON
ON
for 3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 6 7
05065AXX
4. Set minimum frequency fmin with switch f2

3 4
Function Setting
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8

[Hz]
5. If ramp is not set via RS-485, set ramp time with switch t1 (ramp times are based on
3 4
Function Setting
Detent position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 6 7 8
Ramp time t1 [s] 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10
6. Ensure that desired direction of rotation has been enabled.

activated activated • Both directions of rotation are enabled
R
L
24V
activated not activated • Only clockwise direction of rotation is enabled

• Setpoint selections for counterclockwise rotation result in
standstill of drive
R
L
24V
not activated activated • Only counterclockwise direction of rotation is enabled

• Setpoint selections for clockwise rotation result in standstill of
drive
R
L
24V
not activated not activated • unit is blocked or drive is stopped

R
L
24V

I
Startup with RS-485 Master 10
0
1
2
100 3
f [Hz]
5 6
75 f1
50
4
25
5
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (1)
05066AXX 6
9. Re-insert screw plug of the cover with gasket. 7

10.Activate voltage supply.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 Function with RS-485 Master
0
10.12 Function with RS-485 Master

• The controller (e.g. PLC) is master, MOVIMOT® is slave.
• 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, and 1 parity bit (even parity) are used.
• The transmission adheres to SEW MOVILINK® protocol (see the section
MOVILINK® Unit Profile on page 275) with a fixed transmission rate of 9,600 baud.
Message
Structure
Request-Telegramm
Idle SD1 ADR TYP Protocol-Data-Unit (PDU) BCC
Idle SD2 ADR TYP Protocol-Data-Unit (PDU) BCC
Master Response-Telegramm MOVIMOT ®
02754AEN
Idle = start pause at least 3.44 ms

SD1 = start delimiter (start character) 1: Master → MOVIMOT: 02hex
SD2 = start delimiter (start character) 2: MOVIMOT → master: 1Dhex
ADR = address 1–15
group address 101–115
254 = point to point
255 = broadcast
TYPE = user data type
PDU = user data
BCC = block check character: XOR of all bytes
• In the "cyclical" type, MOVIMOT® expects the next bus activity (master protocol)
within one second at most. If this bus activity is not detected, MOVIMOT®
automatically decelerates to a standstill (timeout monitoring).
• There is no timeout monitoring for the "acyclical" type.

I
Function with RS-485 Master 10
0
1
Start Pause (idle) MOVIMOT® detects the start of a request message by means of a start pause lasting at
and Start least 3.44 ms, followed by the character 02hex (start delimiter 1). In the event that the
Character (Start transmission of a valid request message is broken off by the master, a new request 2
Delimiter) message may not be sent until at least twice the start pause (approx. 6.88 ms) has
elapsed.
3
Address (ADR) MOVIMOT® supports the address range from 0 to 15 and access via the point-to-point
address (254) or via the broadcast address (255). It is only possible to read the current 4
process input data (status word, current actual value) via address 0. The output data
sent by the master do not come into effect because PO data processing is not active
when the address setting is 0. 5
Group Address Furthermore, ADR = 101...115 makes it possible to group together several MOVIMOT® 6
units. When this is done, all MOVIMOT® units in one group are set to the same RS-485
address (e.g. group 1: ADR = 1, group 2: ADR = 2).
7
The master can now specify new group setpoints for these groups using ADR = 101
(setpoints to inverters of group 1) and ADR = 102 (setpoints to group 2). The inverters
do not send any response when this addressing type is used. The master must observe 8
a rest time of min. 25 ms between two broadcast or group messages.
9
User Data Type MOVIMOT® always supports four different PDU types (Protocol Data Unit). These are
(TYPE) largely determined by the process data length and type of transmission.
10
Type Transmission Process data User data
type length
03hex cyclical 2 words 11
Control word / speed [%] status word 1 / output current
83hex acyclical 2 words
05hex cyclical 3 words Control word / speed [%] / ramp status word 1 / output 12
85hex acyclical 3 words current / status word 2
13
Timeout In "cyclical" transmission, MOVIMOT® expects the next bus activity (request message
Monitoring of the aforementioned types) within one second at most. If this bus activity is not
detected, the drive automatically decelerates with the most recent valid ramp (timeout 14
monitoring). The "ready" signal relay drops out. There is no timeout monitoring if
"acyclical" transmission is selected.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Block Check The block check character (BCC) is used in conjunction with even parity formation to
Character BCC ensure reliable data transmission. The block check character is formed by means of an
XOR logic operation of all message characters. The result is transmitted at the end of
the message in the BCC.
Example The following figure shows how a block check character is created for a PDU type 85hex
acyclical message with three data words. The XOR logic operation on the characters
SD1 ... PO3low results in the value 13hex as the block check character. This BCC is sent
as the last character in the message. Once the receiver has received the individual
characters, it performs a character parity check. The block check character is
subsequently created from the characters SD1 … PO3low received, in accordance with
the procedure below. The message has been correctly transmitted if the calculated and
received BCCs are identical and there is no character parity fault. Otherwise, a
transmission fault has occurred. The message may have to be repeated.
Idle 02 hex 01 hex 85 hex 00 hex 06 hex 20 hex 00 hex 0B hex B8 hex 13 hex
SD1 ADR TYP PA1hi PA1lo PA2 hi PA2 lo PA3 hi PA3lo BCC
Parity
Start
Stop
SD1: 02 hex 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
XOR
ADR: 01 hex 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
XOR
TYP: 85hex 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
XOR
PA1hi : 00 hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
XOR
PA1lo : 06 hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
XOR
PA2 hi : 20 hex 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
XOR
PA2 lo : 00 hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
XOR
PA3 hi: 0B hex 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
XOR
PA3 lo : B8 hex 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
BCC: 13hex 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
01660CEN

I
Function with RS-485 Master 10
0
1
Message The following algorithm should be observed for sending and receiving MOVILINK®
Processing in messages in any programmable controller, in order to ensure correct data transmission.
MOVILINK® 2
Master
Sending Request a) Sending request message (e.g. send setpoints to MOVIMOT®) 3
Message 1. Wait for the start pause (minimum 3.44 ms, at least 25 ms with group or broadcast
messages).
2. Send request message to inverter.
4
Receiving b) Receiving response message

5
Response (receive confirmation + actual values from MOVIMOT®)
Message
1. The response message must be received within approx. 100 ms, otherwise it is sent
6
again.
2. Calculated block check character (BCC) of the response message = received BCC? 7
3. Start delimiter of response message = 1Dhex?
4. Response address = Request address? 8
5. Response PDU type = Request PDU type?
6. All criteria satisfied: → Transmission OK! Process data valid! 9
7. The next request message can now be sent (continue from point a).
10
All criteria satisfied: → Transmission OK! Process data valid! The next request
message can now be sent (continue from point a).
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Sample Message This example deals with the control of a MOVIMOT® AC motor using the process data
words of PDU type 85hex (3 PD acyclical). The RS-485 master sends three process
output data (PO) to the MOVIMOT® AC motor. MOVIMOT® responds with three process
input data (PI).
Request Message PO1: 0006hex Control word 1 = Enable

from RS-485 PO2: 2000hex Speed [%] setpoint = 50 % (from fmax1)
Master to
MOVIMOT® PO3: 0BB8hex Ramp = 3 s
Response PI1: 0406hex Status word 1

Message from PI2: 0300hex Output current [% IN]
MOVIMOT® to RS-
485 Master PI3:0607hex Status word 2
Coding of process data see section 5.5.
Sample Message "3PD acyclical"
Idle 02 hex 01 hex 85 hex 00 hex 06 hex 20 hex 00 hex 0B hex B8 hex 13
hex
SD1 ADR TYP BCC
PO3: Ramp
0BB8hex = 3s
PO2: Speed[%]
2000hex = 50% fmax
PO1: Control word
0006hex = Enable

RS-485 Master MOVIMOT ®
Idle 1D hex 01 hex 85 hex 04 hex 07 hex 03 hex 00 hex 06 hex 07 hex 98 hex
SD1 ADR TYP BCC
PI3: Status word 2
PI2: Output current
PI1: Status word 1

05079AEN
This example shows acyclical transmission, i.e. no timeout monitoring is active in

MOVIMOT®. Cyclical transmission can be implemented with the entry TYPE = 05hex. In
this case, MOVIMOT® expects the next bus activity (request message of the
aforementioned types) within one second at most, otherwise MOVIMOT® automatically
brings itself to a stop (timeout monitoring).
1. fmax is preset using f1 setpoint potentiometer

I
MOVILINK® Unit Profile (Coding of Process Data) 10
0
1
10.13 MOVILINK® Unit Profile (Coding of Process Data)
The same process data information is used for controlling and selecting setpoints for all 2
fieldbus systems. The process data are coded based on the uniform MOVILINK® profile
for SEW drive inverters. In the case of MOVIMOT®, it is always possible to differentiate
between the following types: 3
• 2 process data words (2 PD)
• 3 process data words (3 PD) 4
5
PO1: Control word 1 PO2: Speed [%] PO3: Ramp
6
PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2
Fieldbus master Process input data (PI) MOVIMOT ® 7

02775AEN
8
2 Process Data In order to control MOVIMOT® using 2 process data words, the master programmable
Words controller sends the process output data Control word 1 and Speed [%] to MOVIMOT®,
and the process input data (PI) Status word 1 and Output current are sent from 9
MOVIMOT® to the programmable controller.
10
3 Process Data When control is carried out with 3 process data words, Ramp is sent as the additional
Words process output data word, and Status word 2 is sent as the third process input data
word.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 MOVILINK® Unit Profile (Coding of Process Data)
0
Process Output Process output data are sent from the master programmable controller to MOVIMOT®
Data (control information and setpoints). However, they only come into effect in MOVIMOT®
if the RS-485 address in MOVIMOT® (DIP switches S1/1 to 4) is set to a value other than
0. MOVIMOT® can be controlled with the following process output data:
• PO1: Control word 1
• PO2: Speed [%] (setpoint)
• PO3: Ramp
Basic control block
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
"1" = "1 1 0" = release,

Control word not assigned not assigned
Reset otherwise stop
Setpoint Signed percentage / 0.0061 % Example: -80 % / 0.0061 % = -13115 = CCC5hex
Ramp * Time from 0 to 50 Hz in ms (range: 100...10000 ms) Example: 2.0 s = 2000 ms = 07D0hex
* only with 3 word protocol

02758AEN
Control Word, The "Enable" control command is specified with bits 0 – 2 by entering the control word
Bits 0...2 = 0006hex. The CW and/or CCW input terminal must also be set to +24 V (jumpered) in
order to enable MOVIMOT®.
The "Stop" control command is issued by resetting bit 2 = "0". You should use the stop
command 0002hex in order to stay compatible with other SEW inverter ranges. However,
MOVIMOT® always triggers a stop with the current ramp whenever bit 2 = "0",
irrespective of the status of bit 0 and bit 1.
Control Word In the event of a malfunction, the fault can be acknowledged with bit 6 = "1" (reset). The
Bit 6 = Reset value of unassigned control bits should be 0, in order to ensure compatibility.
Speed [%] The speed setpoint is specified as a percentage, relative to the maximum speed set
using the f1 setpoint potentiometer.
Coding: C000hex = -100 % (CCW)
4000hex = +100 % (CW)
→ 1 digit = 0.0061 %
Example: 80 % fmax, direction of rotation CCW:
Calculation: –80 % / 0.0061 = –13115dec = CCC5hex

I
MOVILINK® Unit Profile (Coding of Process Data) 10
0
1
Ramp The current integrator ramp in the process output data word PO3 is transferred if the
process data exchange takes place using three process data. The integrator ramp set
using the switch t1 is used if MOVIMOT® is being controlled by 2 process data. 2
Coding: 1 digit = 1 ms
Range: 100...10,000 ms 3
Example: 2.0 s = 2000 ms = 2000dec = 07D0hex
4
Process Input MOVIMOT® sends process input data back to the master programmable controller. The
Data (PI) process input data consist of status and actual value information. The following process
input data are supported by MOVIMOT®: 5
• PI1: Status word 1
• PI2: Output current 6
• PI3: Status word 2
7
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8
Controller enabled = "1"
Unit ready for operation = "1"
Unit status / Fault code
0 = inverter not ready
PO data enabled = "1" 9
Status word 1 reserved
2 = not enabled
reserved
4 = enabled
Fault/Warning = "1"
reserved
10
reserved
16 bit integer with sign x 0,1 % IN

11
Act. current
Example: 0320hex = 800 x 0,1 % IN = 80 % IN
12
Controller enabled = "1"
Unit ready for operation = "1"
PO data enabled = "1"
13
reserved
reserved
Fault/Warning = "1" 14
Status word 2* reserved
reserved
A1 (brake)1) 15
A2 (ready for operation)
E1 (CW)
E2 (CCW)
E3 (setpoint f2)
16
reserved 0
reserved 0
reserved 0 17
* with 3 word protocol only
1) "1" = brake engaged, "0" brake released
18
03570AEN
19
20
21
22
I
10 Sample Program with Fieldbus
0
10.14 Sample Program with Fieldbus

A sample program for the Simatic S5 illustrates the processing of process data and the
digital inputs and outputs of the MF… fieldbus interface.
In the example, the process data of the MOVIMOT® fieldbus interface are stored in the
PLC memory area PW132 – PW 136.
The additional output/input word is administered in OW 100 and IW 100.
Allocation of process data addresses in the programmable controller:
MOVIMOT ® + MF...
Fieldbus master
Address range
AW100 Digital Output

Output addresses

PW 132 PO1
PW 134 PO2
PW 136 PO3
PI1: Status word 1 PI2: Output current PI3: Status word 2 Dig. In. -+
EW100 Digital Input Process input data (PI)
Input addresses
PW 132 PI1
PW 134 PI2
PW 136 PI3
01723CEN
PLC Sample For processing the digital inputs / outputs of the MF..:
Program The AND logic operation of digital inputs DI 0..3 controls digital outputs DO 0 and DO 1
on the MF...
A I 100.0 If DI 0 = "1"
A I 100.1 DI 1 = "1"
A I 100.2 DI 2 = "1"
A I 100.3 DI 3 = "1"
= O 100.0 then DO 0 = "1"
= O 100.1

I
Sample Program with Fieldbus 10
0
1
Sample PLC For controlling MOVIMOT®
Program MOVIMOT® is enabled with input 4.0.
2
I 4.0 = "0": Control command "Stop"
I 4.0 = "1": Control command "Enable"
3
The direction of rotation and speed are specified via input 4.1.
I 4.1 = "0": 50 % fmax CW rotation
4
I 4.1 = "1": 50 % fmax CCW rotation
The drive is accelerated and decelerated with an integrator ramp of 1 s. 5
The process input data are temporarily stored in flag words 20 to 24 for further
processing. 6
FB 10 A I 4.0 Issue control command "Enable" with input 4.0
JC =ENAB 7
L KH 0002 Control command "Stop"
T PW 132 is written to PO1 (control word 1)
8
JU =SETP
ENAB: L KH 0006 MOVIMOT® control command "Enable" (0006hex)
T PW 132 is written to PO1 (control word 1) 9
SETP: A I 4.1 Define direction of rotation with input 4.1 10

JC =CCW CCW rotation if input 4.1 = "1"
L KH 2000 Set speed = 50% fmax CW rotation (=2000hex)
11
T PW 134 is written to PO2 (Speed [%])
JU =ACTV
CCW: L KH I000 Set speed = 50% fmax CCW rotation (=E000hex) 12
T PW 134 is written to PO2 (Speed [%])
13
ACTV:
L KF +1000 Ramp = 1 s (1000dec)
T PW 136 is written to PO3 (Ramp)
14
L PW 132 Load PI1 (Status word 1) 15

T MW 20 and store in buffer
L PW 134 Load PI2 (Output current) 16
L PW 136 Load PI3 (Status word 2)
17
BE
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 Startup of Field Distributor
0
10.15 Startup of Field Distributor

MF.../Z.3. Field Startup depending on the fieldbus system used according to section:
Distributor • "Startup with PROFIBUS" on page 207
• "Startup with DeviceNet" on page 247
• "Startup with InterBus (copper line)" on page 218
• "Startup with InterBus (fiber optic)" on page 236
• "Startup with CANopen" on page 257
Block Diagram
X1 X21
24V
GND
L1
L2
L3
MF..
GND
RS+
RS-
MFZ.3
X9
Connection hybrid cable
05126AEN

I
Startup of Field Distributor 10
0
1
MF.../Z.6. Field Startup depending on the fieldbus system used according to section:
Distributor • "Startup with PROFIBUS" on page 207
2
3
4
Maintenance • The maintenance/line protection switch with MF.../Z.6: protects the hybrid line
Switch against overload and switches the 5
– power supply of the MOVIMOT®
– 24 VDC supply of the MOVIMOT® 6
Caution: The maintenance/line protection switch disconnects only the
MOVIMOT® motor from the supply, not the field distributor.
7
8
Block Diagram
"Safety Power"
9
(1)
X1 X40 X20 / X29 10

L1
L2
L3
24V
GND
24V
GND
11
12
MF.. 13
14
RS+
RS-
MFZ.6
X9 (2)
15
X40 X29 X20 16
17
18
05127AXX
19
(1) Jumper to supply of MOVIMOT® from 24 VDC voltage for MF.. fieldbus module
(factory-cabled)
(2) Connection of hybrid cable 20
21
22
I
0
MF.../MM../Z.8. Startup depending on the fieldbus system used according to section:

Field Distributor • "Startup with PROFIBUS" on page 207
Maintenance • The maintenance switch with MF.../MM../Z.8. switches the

Switch – power supply of the MOVIMOT®
– 24 VDC supply of the MOVIMOT®
Caution: The maintenance switch disconnects the MOVIMOT® inverter with
connected motor from the supply, not the field distributor.
Block Diagram
"Safety Power"
(1)
X1 X40 X20 / X29

24V
24V
GND
GND
L1
L2
L3
MF..
RS+
RS-
MOVIMOT ®
TH1
TH2
13
14
15
W
U
V
MFZ.8
X9 (2)
X40 X29 X20
05128AXX
®
(1) Jumper to supply of MOVIMOT from 24 VDC voltage for MF.. fieldbus module
(factory-cabled)
(2) Connection of hybrid cable

I
Startup of Field Distributor 10
0
1
Configured Factory Please note the new factory settings with MF.../MM../Z.8.:
Setting
2
DIP SWITCH S1:
S1/ 1 2 3 4
..
5 6 7 8 3
RS-485 address
20 Motor protection PWM frequency
ON DC braking
deactivated 16 kHz variable No 4
21 22 23 Motor protection PWM frequency function
OFF 4Q operation
active 4 kHz fix
5
f1 setpoint potentiometer:
6
100
f [Hz]
75 7
5 6
f1
50
8
25
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pot. position 9
Factory setting 10
02784AEN
The remaining settings are identical with those for standard design of MOVIMOT® (see 11
the section "Startup – Description of MOVIMOT® Control Elements").
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
0
Checking
Connection
Method of
댴 쑶
Connected Motor W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
03636AXX
Internal Wiring of
MOVIMOT®
Inverter in the Field 䉭
Distributor
(1)
X4
댳
24V
TH
R
L
13
L2
L3
15
L1
14
(2)
ϑ (3)
TH
(4)
+24VDC
L2
L3
L1
04956AXX
(1) DIP switch for setting the connection method

Ensure that the connection method of the connected motor
corresponds to the switch setting of the DIP switch.
(2) Observe Enable of rotational direction
(default enables both directions of rotation)
Both directions of Only direction of rotation Only direction of rotation
rotation are enabled CCW is enabled CW is enabled
24V
24V
24V
TH
TH
TH
R
R
L
ϑ ϑ ϑ
TH TH TH
04957AXX
(3) Brake coil via hybrid cable or internal braking resistor

I
MFG11A Keypad for MF.. Fieldbus Interface 10
0
1
10.16 MFG11A Keypad for MF.. Fieldbus Interface
Function The MFG11A keypad is plugged onto an MFZ.. connection module instead of a bus 2
module and allows manual control of a MOVIMOT® drive.
4
MFZ..
MFG11A 8
9
P
STO
10
11
50030AXX 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
I
10 MFG11A Keypad for MF.. Fieldbus Interface
0
Operation
Operation of MFG11A option
Display
Negative display value, e.g. 50 = counterclockwise
Positive display value, e.g. 50 = clockwise
The displayed value refers to the speed entered with f1 setpoint potentiometer.
Example: Display "50" = 50 % of the speed set with setpoint potentiometer.
Caution: With display "0" the drive rotates with fmin.
Increase speed
Reduce speed
Blocking MOVIMOT®
Pressing the key: STOP Display = 0FF
Releasing MOVIMOT®
or
Caution: After release, MOVIMOT® accelerates to the value and direction of rotation saved
last.
rotation from right to 0
left

rotation from left to 0
right
After power-on, the module is always in STOP status (display = OFF). If direction
of rotation is selected with arrow key, the drive (setpoint) starts with 0.

MOVIMOT® Status LED 11
1
11 MOVIMOT® and Bus Diagnostics
11.1 MOVIMOT® Status LED 2
Status LED 6
10
02600AEN
Exploration of The operating and fault messages are signaled by the three-colored LED display.
11
Status LED
LED LED status Operating status Description
Display color 12
– Off Not ready for No 24 V power supply
operation
yellow Flashing at regular Not ready for Self-testing phase or 24 V power supply present,
13
intervals operation but supply voltage not o.k.
yellow Steady light Ready for 24 V power supply and supply voltage o.k.,
operation, but no enable signal 14
but device blocked
green / Flashing with Ready for Communication via RS-485 faulty
yellow changing color operation, 15
but in timeout mode
green Steady light Unit enabled Motor in operation
green Rapid flashing at Current limit active Drive has reached the current limit
16
regular intervals
red Steady light Not ready for
operation
Check 24 VDC power supply
Note that a smoothed direct voltage with low
17
ripple (residual ripple max. 13%) is present.
red 2 x flash, pause Fault 07 DC link voltage too high
18
Fault 01 Overcurrent of output stage
red 3 x flash, pause
Fault 11 Excessive temperature in output stage
red 4 x flash, pause Fault 84 Excessive temperature in motor
19
assignment of motor-frequency inverter incorrect
red 5 x flash, pause Fault 89 Excessive temperature in brake
assignment of motor-frequency inverter incorrect
20
red 6 x flash, pause Fault 06 Supply system – phase fault
red Flashing at regular Fault 90 Assignment of motor – inverter incorrect 21
intervals (e.g. MM03 – DT71D4 쑶)
22
11 MOVIMOT® List of Faults
11.2 MOVIMOT® List of Faults

Fault Cause / Remedy
Timeout of communication (motor A Missing connection ⊥, RS+, RS- between MOVIMOT® and RS-485 master.
comes to a stop without fault code) Check and establish connection, especially ground.
B EMC influence Check shielding of data lines and improve, if necessary.
C Incorrect type (cyclical) with acyclical protocol interval between the individual
messages >1 s with protocol type "cyclical." Decrease message cycle or
select "acyclical."
DC link voltage too small, net off Check power supply lines and power supply voltage for interruptions. Motor starts operating
was recognized again as soon as the power supply voltage reaches standard values.
(motor comes to a stop without fault
code)
Fault code 01 overcurrent of output Short circuit of inverter output.
stage Check the connection between inverter output and motor for short circuit.
Fault code 06 phase fault Check power supply lines for phase fault. Reset fault by switching off 24 VDC supply voltage or
reset via MOVILINK®.
Fault code 07 DC link voltage too A Ramp time too short → Extend ramp time.
large B Faulty connection brake coil/braking resistor
→ Check connection of braking resistor/brake coil and correct, if necessary.
C Incorrect internal resistance of brake coil/braking resistor
→ Check internal resistance or brake coil/braking resistor.
(see the section "Technical Data and Dimension Drawings")
D Thermal overload of braking resistor → Braking resistor incorrectly dimensioned.
Reset fault by switching off 24 VDC supply voltage or reset via MOVILINK®.
Fault code 11 Thermal overload of • Clean heat sink.
output stage or internal unit defect • Lower ambient temperature.
• Prevent heat build-up.
• Reduce drive load.
Fault code 84 Thermal overload of • Lower ambient temperature.
motor • Prevent heat build-up.
• Reduce motor load.
• Increase speed.
• If the fault should occur shortly after the initial enable, check the combination of drive and
MOVIMOT® frequency inverter.
Fault code 89 Thermal overload of • Extend set ramp time.
brake coil or brake coil defective • Brake inspection (see the section "Inspection and Maintenance").
• Contact SEW service department.
• If the fault should occur shortly after the initial enable, check the combination of drive (brake
coil) and MOVIMOT® frequency inverter.
Note: If you require assistance from customer service:

• State the data on the nameplate.
• State type and extent of the fault.
• Indicate when and under which operating conditions the fault occurred.
• State the probable cause.

MOVIMOT® Diagnostics via MDG11A Option 11
1
11.3 MOVIMOT® Diagnostics via MDG11A Option
2
05240AXX
7
• The diagnostic unit must be connected before a fault can occur since the MOVIMOT®
fault messages are not stored and the information is lost upon disconnecting the 24 8
V supply.
• The diagnostic unit may be connected only with a MOVIMOT®.
9
• Connecting the MDG11A to an RS-485 bus with several MOVIMOT® is not allowed.
• The diagnostic unit can be used only if the MOVIMOT® is controlled via terminals.
This requires that the DIP switches S1/1 to S1/4 are set to OFF (= address 0).
10
11
ON
ON
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
13
03125AXX
• Using the diagnostic unit with setpoint setting via RS-485 interface is not 14
permitted.
• Connection according to section "Electrical Installation". 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
11 MOVIMOT® Diagnostics via MDG11A Option
Diagnostics The diagnostic unit can display different information such as operating status, motor
Procedure current, status of input terminals, status of message relay and brake. The selection is
made by pressing the button . If a fault occurs, the fault number is automatically
displayed.
Motor current Brake Relay Terminal R Terminal L Terminal f1/f2
___ o1_ o2_ i1_ i2_ i3_
Operating status
Scrolling through the display
c_
02878AEN
Display Meaning
Operating status --- No communication – no 24 V at MOVIMOT® or RS-485 connection is incorrect (interrupted or
switched cable)
c 0 Not ready – supply voltage is missing, but 24 V are present
c 2 Ready for operation – supply voltage and 24 V are present, but no enable signal at terminal R or
L
c 4 Enabled – motor is turning
Fault codes F01 Short circuit of inverter output
F07 DC link voltage too high
F11 Thermal overload of output stage
F84 Thermal overload of motor or blocked motor
F89 Thermal overload of brake or incorrect internal resistor of brake
F06 Supply system – phase fault
F90 Assignment motor–inverter incorrect (e.g. MM03 – DT71D4 쑶)
Motor current 0...180 Displays percentage of inverter nominal current, from 0% to 180%
Brake o10 Brake closed
o11 Brake open
Relay o20 Inverter not ready for operation (supply voltage is missing or inverter is in "fault" condition, see
Operating States or Fault Codes)
o21 Inverter ready for operation
Terminal R i10 Terminal R = "0"
i11 Terminal R = "1" = CW rotation
Terminal L i20 Terminal L = "0"
i21 Terminal L = "1" = CCW rotation
Terminal f1/f2 i30 Terminal f1/f2 = "0" = setpoint f1 activated
i31 Terminal f1/f2 = "1" = setpoint f2 activated

Fieldbus Diagnostics via MF.. Diagnostics Interface 11
1
11.4 Fieldbus Diagnostics via MF.. Diagnostics Interface
MF.. fieldbus modules contain a diagnostics interface for startup and service. This 2
allows for bus diagnostics using the SEW user software MOVITOOLS.
8
03565AEN
Setpoint and actual values that are exchanged between MOVIMOT® and fieldbus 9
master can easily be diagnosed.
In the fieldbus monitor operating mode "Control," MOVIMOT® can directly be
controlled; see “Bus Monitor in MOVITOOLS” in the section "Technical Data and 10
Dimension Drawings / MWS21A Option for Bus Diagnostics"
11
Structure of The diagnostics interface is located on potential level 0 and, therefore, on the same
Diagnostics potential as the module electronics.
Interface
12
The interface is accessible via a 4-pole RJ11/TAE plug connector. The connector is
located underneath the screwed gland on the module cover.
13
GND RS- RS+ +5V
14
4 321
15
16
02876BXX
17
MWS21A Option The diagnostics interface can be connected to a commercially available PC with a serial
interface (RS-232) using SEW's MOVIMOT® fieldbus diagnostic kit MWS21A (see the 18
section "Technical Data and Dimension Drawings / MWS21A Option for Bus
Diagnostics"). 19
20
21
22
11 Fieldbus Diagnostics via MF.. Diagnostics Interface
Relevant The software MOVITOOLS can be used for diagnosis and control of MOVIMOT® via the
Diagnostics diagnostics interface of the MF.. fieldbus interfaces.
Parameter
Display Values - MOVIMOT® returns the output current as process value.

00. Process
Menu number Parameter name Index Meaning / Implementation
Values
004 Output current [% In] 8321 Output current MOVIMOT®
Display Values - MOVIMOT® status is completely interpreted and displayed on the status display.
01. Status Display
010 Inverter status 8310 Inverter status MOVIMOT®
011 Operating status 8310 Operating status MOVIMOT®
012 Fault status 8310 Fault status MOVIMOT®
Display Values - The digital inputs of fieldbus interface MF.. are shown as optional inputs of MOVIMOT®.
04. Option Binary Since these inputs do not have a direct effect on MOVIMOT®, the terminal assignment
Inputs is set to "no function."
040 Binary inputs DI10 8340 Status of MF.. binary inputs DI 0
046 Binary inputs DI10 to DI17 8348 Status of all binary inputs
Display Values - The digital outputs of fieldbus interface MF.. are shown as optional outputs of
06. Option Binary MOVIMOT®. Since these outputs do not have a direct effect on MOVIMOT®, the
Outputs terminal assignment is set to "no function."
060 Binary outputs DO10 8352 Status of MF.. binary outputs DO 0
061 Binary outputs DO11 8353 Status of MF.. binary outputs DO1
068 Binary outputs DO10 8360 Status of MF.. binary outputs DO 0 and DO 1
to DO17

Fieldbus Diagnostics via MF.. Diagnostics Interface 11
1
Display Values - Information from the unit data is displayed to MOVIMOT® and MF... fieldbus interface
07. Unit Data
2
070 Unit type 8301 Unit type MOVIMOT®
072 Option 1 8362 Unit type option 1 = MF.. Type
074 Firmware option 1 8364 Firmware part number MF.. 3
076 Firmware basic unit 8300 Firmware part number MOVIMOT®
4
Display Values - This menu entry represents all fieldbus data.
09. Bus
5
Diagnostics
090 PD configuration 8451 PD configuration set for MOVIMOT®
091 Fieldbus type 8452 Fieldbus type of MF.. 6
092 Baud rate fieldbus 8453 Baud rate of MF..
093 Address fieldbus 8454 Fieldbus address of MF.. DIP switches 7
094 PO1 setpoint [hex] 8455 PO1 setpoint of fieldbus master to
MOVIMOT®
095 PO2 setpoint[hex] 8456 PO2 setpoint of fieldbus master to 8
MOVIMOT®
096 PO3 setpoint [hex] 8457 PO3 setpoint of fieldbus master to
MOVIMOT® 9
097 PI1 actual value [hex] 8458 PI1 actual value from MOVIMOT® to fieldbus
master
098 PI2 actual value [hex] 8459 PI2 actual value from MOVIMOT® to fieldbus 10
master
099 PI3 actual value [hex] 8460 PI3 actual value from MOVIMOT® to fieldbus
master 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
12 Inspection and Maintenance Intervals
12 Inspection and Maintenance of MOVIMOT®
• Use only original parts in accordance with the valid spare parts list!
• Caution – Danger of burns: Motors can become very hot during operation!
12.1 Inspection and Maintenance Intervals

Interval Unit / unit part What to do?
Depending on the loading characteristics: Brake • Inspect brake (working air gap, brake disc, pressure
Every 2 to 4 years 1) plate, carrier / gearing, pressure rings)
• Extract abraded matter.
Every 10,000 operating hours Motor • Inspect motor (replace ball bearing/oil seal)
• Clean cooling air passages
Varying intervals Motor • Touch up or renew the anti-corrosion coating
(depending on external factors)
1) Wear times are influenced by many factors that can shorten life span. Calculate the required inspection and maintenance intervals
separately in accordance with the project planning documents.

Motor Inspection and Maintenance 12
1
12.2 Motor Inspection and Maintenance
12 2
11
10 3
9 4
5
8
4 7
5 6 6
15
7
3 16
2
1 8
20
19 9
10
18
17
11
14
12
13 13
02575AXX
1 Snap ring 6 Snap ring 11 Ball bearing 16 V-ring 14

2 Oil flinger 7 Ball bearing 12 Equalizing ring 17 Fan
3 Oil seal 8 Snap ring 13 Stator 18 Snap ring
4
5
Screw plug
A-(flange) bearing shield
9
10
Rotor
Nilos-ring
14
15
B-bearing shield
Hexagon head screw
19
20
Fan guard
Housing screw
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
12 Motor Inspection and Maintenance
Motor Inspection 1. Caution: Switch off theMOVIMOT® and prevent unintentional restart
2. Disassemble proximity sensor NV16 / NV26, if installed.
3. Remove flange cover and fan guard (19).
4. Remove hexagon head cap screws (15) from drive end (5) and non-drive end
bearing shields (14), and detach stator (13) from drive end bearing shield.
5. a) Motors with brake:
– Open terminal box cover, remove brake cable from terminals.
– Push the non drive-end bearing shield and brake off the stator and carefully
remove them (drag brake cable by means of trailing wire, if necessary).
b) Pull back stator by approx. 3–4 cm.
6. Visual inspection:
Are there traces of condensation or gear oil inside the stator?
– If not, continue with 9.
– If condensation is present, continue with 7.
– If gear oil is present, the motor must be repaired by a specialized workshop.
7. a) For geared motors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.
b) Motors without gear unit: Remove drive end flange.
c) Remove the rotor (9).
8. Clean and dry the winding, conduct electrical tests
9. Replace the ball bearings (7, 11) (use only approved ball bearings, see Section 301).
10.Replace the oil seal (3) in the drive-end bearing shield.
11.Reseal the stator seat, install motor, brake, etc.
12.Check the gear unit, if applicable (see Gear Unit Operating Instructions).

Inspection and Maintenance of Brake 12
1
12.3 Inspection and Maintenance of Brake
9 2
8
7
6 3
5 4
4
3
2
5
1 6
22 10
21
e 11
10
20
c
b 19 12
a 18
17
16
13
15
14
13 14
12
11
02576AXX 15
1 Motor with brake end shield 10a Stud (3x) 16 Stud (2x)
2
3
Driver
Snap ring
10b
10c
Counter spring
Pressure ring
17
18
Conical coil spring
Setting nut
16
4 Niro washer 10e Hex nut 19 Fan
5 Rubber sealing collar 11 Brake spring 20 Snap ring
6 Annular spring 12 Brake coil body 21 Fan guard 17
7 Brake disc 13 Sealing ring 22 Housing screw
8 Pressure plate 14 Dowel pin
9 Damping plate (only for BMG) 15 Releasing lever with hand lever
18
19
20
21
22
12 Inspection and Maintenance of Brake
Inspecting Brake, 1. Switch off MOVIMOT® and prevent it from unintentional restart.
Adjusting 2. Remove:
Working Air Gap
– Proximity sensor NV16 / NV26, if installed.
– Flange cover or fan guard (21).
3. Move rubber sealing collar (5) (loosen clamp, if necessary), extract abraded matter.
4. Measure the brake disc (7, 7b):
– If brake disc ≤ 9 mm: Replace brake disc (see page 299).
5. Measure the working air gap A (see the following figure)
– with feeler gauge in three places, approx. 120° apart, between pressure plate and
damping plate (9).
02577AXX
6. Tighten the hexagon nut (10e) until working air gap is set correctly (see page 301).
7. Fix the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.

1
Replacing Brake When replacing brake disc, inspect the other dismantled parts and replace them if
Disc necessary.
1. Switch off MOVIMOT® and prevent it from unintentional restart. 2
2. Remove:
– Proximity sensor NV16 / NV26, if installed. 3
– Flange cover or fan guard (21), snap ring (20), and fan (19).
3. Remove rubber sealing collar (5). 4
Remove manual brake release: setting nuts (18), conical coil springs (17), studs (16),
releasing lever (15).
5
4. Loosen hexagon nuts (10e), carefully pull off the coil body (12) (Caution, brake
cable!), and take out the brake springs (11).
5. Remove damping plate (9), pressure plate (8) and brake disc (7, 7b), and clean the 6
brake parts.
6. Install the new brake disc. 7
7. Re-install brake components (except rubber sealing collar, fan and fan guard). Set
working air gap (see page 298, Points 5 to 7).
8
8. With manual brake release (type HF or HR):
Set the floating clearance via the setting nuts between the conical coil springs
(pressed flat) and setting nuts (see the following figure). 9
10
Brake Floating clearance
[mm]
11
BMG 05 - 1 1.5
BMG 2 - BMG4 2
12
01111AXX
13
Important: This floating clearance is necessary so that the pressure plate can 14
move up as the brake lining wears.
9. Fix the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts. 15
Note: 16
• The lockable manual release brake (Type HF) is released if resistance is
encountered when operating the manual release brake screw. 17
• The self-reengaging manual brake release (Type HR) can be opened with normal
hand pressure.
18
Caution: On brake motors with a self-reengaging manual brake release, the lever 19
must be removed after startup / maintenance! A bracket is provided for storing it
on the outside of the motor.
20
21
22
Changing Braking torque can be adjusted in increments (see page 301),

Braking Torque • by installing various brake springs.
• by changing the number of the brake springs.
1. Switch off MOVIMOT® and prevent it from unintentional restart.

2. Remove:
– NV16 / NV26 proximity sensor, flange cover or fan guard (21), snap ring (20) and
fan (19), if available.
3. Remove rubber sealing collar (5).
Remove manual brake release: Setting nuts (18), conical coil springs (17), studs
(16), releasing lever (15).
4. Loosen hex nuts (10e), slide off brake coil body (12) by approximately 50 mm
(Caution, brake cable!).
5. Change or add brake springs (11) (position brake springs symmetrically).
6. Re-install brake components except for rubber sealing collar, fan and fan guard. Set
working air gap (see page 298, Points 5 to 7).
7. For manual brake release:
Set the floating clearance between the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and release
lever via the setting nuts (see the following figure).

[mm]
BMG 05 - 1 1.5
BMG 2 - BMG4 2
01111AXX
Important: This floating clearance is necessary so that the pressure plate can
Note: For repeated assembly, replace the setting nuts (18) and hexagon nuts (10e)
(due to reduced self-locking of nuts)!

Approved Ball Bearing Types 12
1
12.4 Approved Ball Bearing Types
Motor type A-bearing (AC motors, brake motor) B-bearing (foot, flanged or geared motors) 2
Flange-mounted Geared motor Foot- AC motor Brake motor
motor mounted
motor 3
DT 71-80 6204-Z-J 6303-Z-J 6204-Z-J 6203-J 6203-RS-J-C3
DT 90-DV100 6306-Z-J-C3 6205-J 6205-RS-J-C3
4
12.5 Working Air Gap, Brake Braking Torque 5

Brake Motor Working air gap mm Brake torque settings
1)
6
min. max. Braking torque [Nm] Type and number of Spring order numbers
springs
normal red normal red 7
BMG 05 DT 71 5,0 3 -
4,0 2 2
2,5
1,6
-
-
6
4
8
1,2 - 3 135 017 X 135 018 8
BMG 1 DT 80 10
7.5
6
4
-
2
9
6.0 3 3
0,25 0,6
BMG 2 DT 90 20 3 -
16 2 2
10
10 - 6
6.6 - 4
5,0 - 3 135 150 8 135 151 6 11
BMG 4 DV 100 40 6 -
30 4 2
24 3 3 12
1) Observe while checking the working air gap: After a test run, deviations of +/- 0.1 mm may occur due to parallelism tolerances of the
brake disc.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
13 Working Air Gap, Brake Braking Torque
13 MOVI-SWITCH® Safety Instructions
• Never install or operate damaged products. In the event of damage, please

submit a complaint to the transport company immediately.
• In compliance with existing regulations (e.g. EN 60204, VBG 4, DIN-VDE 0100/0113/

0160), only electrical specialists with accident prevention training are permitted to
perform installation, startup, and service work on MOVI-SWITCH®.
• Make sure that preventive measures and protection devices are in accordance
with applicable regulations (e.g. EN 60204 or EN 50178).
– Necessary protective measures: Grounding of MOVI-SWITCH®
• Before removing the terminal box cover, disconnect the MOVI-SWITCH® from
the supply system.
• The terminal box cover must remain closed during operation.
• Mechanical blocking or unit-internal safety functions can cause a motor

standstill. Removing the cause of this problem or performing a reset can result in
the motor re-starting on its own. If this is not permissible for safety reasons: In
case of a malfunction of MOVI-SWITCH®, the unit must be disconnected from
the supply system.
• Caution – Danger of burns: The MOVI-SWITCH® surface temperature can exceed

60 °C during operation!
Intended Usage These MOVI-SWITCH® (geared) motors are intended for industrial equipment. They
conform to valid standards and regulations and meet the requirements of the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.
Technical data and information on approved conditions on site can be found on the
nameplate and in these operating instructions.
These details must be observed!

Working Air Gap, Brake Braking Torque 14
1
14 MOVI-SWITCH® Unit Design
2
1 2 ws rt R bl
RUN
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
50390AXX
10
1 Cable gland 2 x M25 x 1.5
2 M12 connector AVS1, standard coding (connection for control signals) 11
3 Brake control BGW (only with brake motors)
4 Power supply connection (L1, L2, L3)
5 Protective cover for power supply connections
6 MOVI-SWITCH® module 12
7 Screw for connecting protective ground 댷
8 Cable screw fitting M16 x 1.5
9 Cable gland 2 x M25 x 1.5 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
14 Sample Nameplate, Type Designation
14.1 Sample Nameplate, Type Designation
Sample
Nameplate
R27 DT71D4/BMG/TF/Z/MSW
01.3207611303.0014.00 32.47
1380/43 83
0.37 S1 0.76
400 Y 1.16 50
B7 15.190 54 F
230 AC 2.5 BGW1.5
MINER. OEL CLP220 / 2.3l
03572AXX
Sample Type
Designation
R 27 DT 71D4 /BMG /TF /Z /MSW
MOVI-SWITCH®
Motor option Heavy fan
Thermistor sensor
(standard)
Motor option Brake
Motor size and number of poles
Motor series
Gear unit size
Gear unit series

Sample Nameplate, Type Designation 15
1
15 Mechanical Installation of MOVI-SWITCH®
Before You Begin MOVI-SWITCH® may only be installed if: 2
• the entries on the nameplate of the drive match the supply voltage
• the drive is not damaged (no damage resulting from transport or storage)
3
• the following requirements have been properly fulfilled:
– temperature range can be limited by the gear unit, see the gear unit operating
instructions
4
– no oils, acids, gases, vapors, radiation, etc.
5
Installation
Tolerances 6
Shaft end Flanges
Diametric tolerances in accordance with DIN 748 Centering shoulder tolerances in accordance with
• ISO k6 with ∅ ≤ 50mm DIN 42948
• ISO k6 with ∅ > 50mm • ISO j6 with ∅ ≤ 230 mm 7
(Center hole in accordance with DIN 332, shape • ISO j6 with ∅ > 230 mm
DR)
8
Setting up MOVI- • MOVI-SWITCH® may only be mounted or installed in the specified position on a
SWITCH® level, vibration-free and torsionally rigid support structure.
9
• Thoroughly remove any anti-corrosion agents from the shaft ends (use a
commercially available solvent). Do not allow the solvent to penetrate the bearings 10
and shaft seals – this could cause material damage!
• Carefully align MOVI-SWITCH® and driven machine to avoid placing any 11
unacceptable strain on motor shafts (observe permissible overhung load and axial
thrust data!).
• Do not butt or hammer the shaft end. 12
• Use an appropriate cover to protect motors in vertical mounting positions from
objects or fluids entering! 13
• Ensure an unobstructed cooling air supply and that air heated by other devices
cannot be drawn in.
14
• Balance components for subsequent mounting on the shaft with half the key
(outgoing shafts are balanced with half the key). Any condensation drain holes will
be sealed by plastic plugs and should only be opened when necessary. 15
• Open condensation drain holes are not permissible, as this would invalidate higher
classes of enclosure.
16
Installation in • Use suitable screwed cable glands for the supply leads (use reducing adapters if
Damp Areas or in necessary).
17
Open Air • Coat the threads of screwed cable glands and sealing plugs with sealant, and tighten
well – apply another coating of sealant. 18
• Clean the sealing faces of connection box covers well before re-assembly.
• Apply protective coating agent if necessary. 19
Check that the type of enclosure is authorized (refer to the nameplate).
20
21
22
16 Description of Control Signals (M12 Connection)
16 Electrical Installation of MOVI-SWITCH®

16.1 Description of Control Signals (M12 Connection)
PIN Assignmen Function
t
1 24 V Power supply voltage 24 VDC
2 RUN Control signal 24 VDC, high = Start, low = Stop
3 ⊥ Reference potential 0V24
4 OK Checkback ready for operation, 24 VDC,
high = ready for operation, low = overtemperature or no 24 V supply
16.2 MOVI-SWITCH® Connection
MSW
24V RUN OK TF TF
BN WH BK BU
TF
W2 U2 V2
BK BU
U1 V1 W1
4 3
(1)
1 2
BN WH
OK
3 4
(2) PE L1 L2 L3 (CW)
2 1
(L2 L1 L3) (CCW)
RUN 24 VDC
05005AXX
(1) M12 connector AVS1 (standard coding)

(2) M12 socket (standard coding)
CW Clockwise rotation
CCW Counter-clockwise rotation
factory-wired

MOVI-SWITCH® with BGW Brake Control 16
1
16.3 MOVI-SWITCH® with BGW Brake Control
Brake Voltage = 2
Power Supply
Voltage/
(Phase Star 3
Point)
(3) 4
WH BK BU WH RD BU
1RUN 2 ws rt bl 5
BGW 6
MSW
24V RUN OK TF TF 7
BN WH BK BU 8
TF
9
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
BK BU
10
4 3
(1)
1 2 11
BN WH
12
OK
13
3 4
(2) PE L1 L2 L3 (CW) 14
2 1 (L2 L1 L3) (CCW)
15
RUN 24 VDC
05006AXX
16
(3) Brake coil 17
18
factory-wired
19
20
21
22
16 MOVI-SWITCH® with BGW Brake Control
Braking Voltage =
Power Supply
Voltage (Phase-
Phase)
(3)
WH BK BU WH RD BU
1 RUN 2 ws rt bl
BGW
MSW
24V RUN OK TF TF
BN WH BK BU
TF
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
BK BU
4 3
(1)
1 2
BN WH
OK
3 4
(2) PE L1 L2 L3 (CW)
2 1 (L2 L1 L3) (CCW)
RUN 24 VDC
05007AXX

(3) Brake coil
factory-wired

Connection with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11 16
1
16.4 Connection with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11
2
MLK11A
(1) (2)
AS-i - 0V 3
N.C. DI2
4 3 3 4
MSW 1 2 2
5
1
N.C. 4
AS-i + 24 V
(3) N.C.
24V RUN OK TF TF DI3 5
TF
6
WH
BK/BU
BK/RD
7
BK/WH
RD
BU
8
9
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
10
11
12
PE L1 L2 L3 (CW)
(L2 L1 L3) (CCW)
13
05090AXX
(1) AS-i connection

(2) Connection for 2 external sensors 14
(3) Insulated cable end (without function)
15
factory-wired
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
16 Connection with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11 and BGW
16.5 Connection with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11 and BGW
(4) (1) MLK11A

(2)
WH RD BU AS-i - 0V
1 RUN 2 ws N.C. DI2
rt bl
4 3 3 4
5 N.C.
BGW 1 2 2 1
AS-i + 24 V
MSW
(3) N.C.
24V RUN OK TF TF DI3
TF
WH
BK/BU
BK/RD
BK/WH
RD
BU
W2 U2 V2
W2 U2 V2 U1 V1 W1
U1 V1 W1
PE L1 L2 L3 (CW) PE L1 L2 L3 (CW)
(L2 L1 L3) (CCW) (L2 L1 L3) (CCW)
(5) (6)
05016AXX
(1) AS-i connection

(2) Connection for 2 external sensors
(3) Insulated cable end (without function)
(4) Brake coil
(5) Braking voltage = power supply voltage /
(6) Braking voltage = power supply voltage
factory-wired

Connection Example 2 x MOVI-SWITCH® with MF.. Fieldbus Interface 16
1
16.6 Connection Example 2 x MOVI-SWITCH® with MF.. Fieldbus Interface
Connection via Terminals (MF.2. Fieldbus Interface) 2
3
2 3 1 4
1 4 2 3 4
MOVI-SWITCH® 1
2 3 1 4
5
1 4 2 3
6
MOVI-SWITCH® 0
7
GND2
GND2
GND2
V2I24
VO24
VO24
VO24
VO24
DO 0
GND
GND
GND
GND
DO1
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9
GND
GND
GND
24 V
RS+
24 V
RS-
24V
(1)
10
05017AXX
11
(1) Assignment depends on which fieldbus is being used.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
16 Connection Example 2 x MOVI-SWITCH® with MF.. Fieldbus Interface
Connection via The required outputs must be internally jumpered to the sockets used according to the
M12 Connector following figure.
(MF.22 Fieldbus
GND2
GND2
GND2
Interface)
VO24
VO24
VO24
VO24
DO 0
GND
GND
GND
GND
DO1
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
(4)
X20 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1 2
(2)
(1)
(3)
05130AXX
(1) DO0 is connected to PIN2 of socket DI0

(2) DO1 is connected to PIN2 of socket DI2
(only required for connection of 2 MOVI-SWITCH® to an MF.22 bus module)
(3) only required if fieldbus nodes are installed with two 24 V voltage circuits
After the outputs have been jumpered to the input sockets, two MOVI-SWITCH® can be
connected to the M12 sockets DIO and DI2.
Input socket DI1 and output socket DO0 as well as input socket DI3 and output socket
DO1 can no longer be used.
MOVI-SWITCH®
MOVI-SWITCH®
DI1 (DO0) DI3 (DO3) D01

24 V (V024) 24 V (V024)
DI0 DI2 DO0
(1)
DIO GND DI2 GND DO0 GND2
DI1 DI3 DO1
24 V (V024) 24 V (V024)
DI1 GND DI3 GND D01 GND2
05131AXX
(1) cannot be used any longer if 2 MOVI-SWITCH® are connected

I
Startup Information 17
0
1
17 Startup of MOVI-SWITCH®
17.1 Startup Information 2
Before startup ensure that:
• The drive is not damaged or blocked. 3
• All connections have been made correctly.
• The direction of motor/geared motor is correct. 4
• All protective covers are installed correctly.
5
During startup ensure that:
• The motor is running perfectly (no variations in speed, loud noise, etc.). 6
7
Caution: On brake motors with a self-reengaging manual brake release, the lever must
be removed after commissioning! A bracket for the lever is attached to the motor.
8
9
17.2 Starting the Motor
• Apply supply voltage 10
• Caution! The supply potential is permanently present in the terminal box (even
with resting motor).
11
• If supply voltage is present at all times (terminals U1, V1, W1), the drive is switched
on/off by means of a control signal (RUN signal).
12
17.3 Monitoring 13
• The solid state power component of the motor switch and the motor winding are
thermally controlled. 14
• In case of an overload, the MOVI-SWITCH® drive automatically switches off.
• The monitoring status is signaled by a 24 V output (OK signal).
15
• The OK output must be evaluated by a controlling system (e.g. PLC).
• Since a starting command causes the motor to restart automatically after
cooling off, an external restarting lockout must be implemented if an automatic
16
restart should represent a danger to person or equipment.
• By connecting the check-back output (OK signal) with ground potential, switch-on is 17
prevented or the motor is stopped.
• The MOVI-SWITCH® module is protected against power supply overvoltage. 18
19
20
21
22
I
0
17.4 Startup with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A

Outputs
(Function and
Designation)
D0 Start / Stop (RUN) DO 0 / yellow
D1 - DO 1 / yellow
D2 - DO 2 / yellow
D3 Power supply / reset (terminal 24 V) DO 3 / green
Inputs (Function
and Designation)
D0 Message Ready for operation (OK) DI 0 / yellow
D1 - -
LED Display
(1) DI0 DO0 (5)

(2) DI2 DO1 (6)
(3) DI3 DO2 (7)
(4) AS-i DO3 (8)
Power
5070AXX
®
(1) MOVI-SWITCH ready for operation (5) Start (motor turns)
(2) external input DI2 (6) No function
(3) external input DI3 (7) No function
(4) Voltage supply via AS-i system is ok (8) MOVI-SWITCH® voltage supply

I
Startup with AS-i Binary Slave MLK11A 17
0
1
Assigning Slave An AS-i addressing device can be used to assign the slave address. This allows for
Address via simple and network-independent addressing.
Programming The AS-i addressing devices offer the following functions: 2
Device
• Reading an AS-i slave address
• Incremental adjustment of address to new value 3
• New addressing of slaves
• Functional test with output to LCD display 4
The use of an addressing device requires an adapter that fits onto the M12 plug
connector of the MLK module (see the following figure). 5
AS-i -
N.C. 6
4 3
1 2 7
AS-i +
N.C.
05135AXX 8
Example: Every AS-i station is individually addressed (A) and then reintegrated in the
bus (B).
9
A B
10
11
12
13
14
(1)
15
50474AXX
(1) AS-i addressing device

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
18 MOVI-SWITCH® Diagnostics
Problem Possible cause Solution
Drive has incorrect • Incorrect phase sequence • Exchange two phases at the terminal block
direction of rotation
Motor does not run, no • No supply voltage • Inspect the supply lines and correct them
current input • Check and replace line protection fuse
• No control voltage • Check 24 VDC signal (terminal 24 V) and correct
• No enable signal • Check RUN signal (terminal RUN), correct controller fault
• Not ready for operation, OK • No control voltage (terminal 24 V), correct
signal LOW • OK output shorted to ground, correct
• Motor too hot, let motor cool, reduce load
• TF not connected, check connections and correct
Motor hums, high current • Mechanical system is • Mechanical fault corrected
consumption blocked • Brake maintenance according to section "Inspection and
• Brake does not release Maintenance of MOVI-SWITCH®"
• Winding is faulty • Exchange drive
Note: If you require assistance from customer service:

• State the data on the nameplate.
• State type and extent of the fault.
• Indicate when and under which operating conditions the fault occurred.
• State the probable cause.

Inspection and Maintenance Intervals 19
1
19 Inspection and Maintenance of MOVI-SWITCH®
• Use only original parts in accordance with the valid spare parts list!
2
• Caution – Danger of burns: Motors can become very hot during operation!
3
4
19.1 Inspection and Maintenance Intervals
Interval Unit /unit What to do? 5
part
Depending on the loading Brake • Inspect brake (working air gap, brake disc, pressure plate, carrier /
characteristics: gearing, pressure rings). 6
Every 2 to 4 years 1) • Extract abraded matter.
Every 10,000 operating hours Motor • Inspect motor (replace ball bearing/oil seal).
• Clean cooling air passages. 7
Varying intervals Motor • Touch up or renew the anti-corrosion coating.
(depending on external factors)
1) Wear times are influenced by many factors that can shorten life span. Calculate the required inspection and maintenance intervals 8
separately in accordance with the project planning documents.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
19 Inspection and Maintenance Work of the Motor
19.2 Inspection and Maintenance Work of the Motor

Example Motor DFT...MSW..
12
11
10
8
4 7
5 6
15
3 16
2
1
20
19
18
17
14
13
03396AXX
1 Snap ring 6 Snap ring 11 Ball bearing 16 V-ring

2 Oil flinger 7 Ball bearing 12 Equalizing ring 17 Fan
3 Oil seal 8 Snap ring 13 Stator 18 Snap ring
4 Screw plug 9 Rotor 14 B-bearing shield 19 Fan guard
5 A-(flange) bearing shield 10 Nilos-ring 15 Hexagon head screw 20 Housing screw

Inspection and Maintenance Work of the Motor 19
1
Inspecting the 1. Caution: Switch off MOVI-SWITCH® and prevent it from unintentional restart.
Motor 2. If present, remove NV16 / NV26 proximity sensor, remove flange cover or fan guard
(19). 2
3. Remove hexagon head cap screws (15) from drive end (5) and non-drive end
bearing shields (14), and detach stator (13) from drive end bearing shield. 3
4. a) Motors with brake
– Open terminal box cover, remove brake cable from terminals. 4
– Push the non drive-end bearing shield and brake off the stator and carefully
remove them (drag brake cable by means of trailing wire, if necessary).
b) Pull back stator by approx. 3–4 cm. 5
5. Visual inspection:
Are there traces of condensation or gear oil inside the stator? 6
– If not, continue with 9.
– If condensation is present, continue with 7. 7
– If gear oil is present, the motor must be repaired by a specialized workshop.
6. a) For geared motors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.
8
b) Motors without gear unit: Remove drive end flange.
c) Remove the rotor (9)
9
7. Clean and dry the winding, conduct electrical tests
8. Replace the ball bearings (7, 11) (use only approved ball bearings, see page 324).
Replace oil seal (3) in drive end bearing shield. 10
9. Reseal the stator seat, install motor, brake, etc.
10.Check the gear unit, if applicable (see Gear Unit Operating Instructions). 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
19.3 Inspection and Maintenance of Brake

Type BMG 05 - BMG4
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
22
21
e
10
20
c 19
b
a 18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
03397AXX
1 Motor with brake end shield 10a Stud (3x) 16 Stud (2x)
2 Driver 10b Counter spring 17 Conical coil spring
3 Snap ring 10c Pressure ring 18 Setting nut
4 Niro washer 10e Hex nut 19 Fan
5 Rubber sealing collar 11 Brake spring 20 Snap ring
6 Annular spring 12 Brake coil body 21 Fan guard
7 Brake disc 13 Sealing ring 22 Housing screw
8 Pressure plate 14 Dowel pin
9 Damping plate (only for BMG) 15 Releasing lever with hand lever

1
Inspecting Brake, 1. Switch off MOVI-SWITCH® and prevent it from unintentional restart.
Adjusting 2. Remove
Working Air Gap 2
– NV16 / NV26 proximity sensor, if present.
– Flange cover or fan guard (21).
3. Move rubber sealing collar (5) (loosen clamp, if necessary). Extract abraded matter. 3
4. Measure the brake disc (7, 7b):
– If brake disc ≤ 9 mm: Replace brake disc (see page 322). 4
5. Measure the working air gap A (see the following figure)
– with feeler gauge in three places, approx. 120° apart, between pressure plate and 5
damping plate (9).
A 8
10
11
03398AXX 12
6. Tighten the hexagon nut (10e) until working air gap is set correctly (see page 324).
7. Fix the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts. 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Replacing Brake When replacing brake disc, inspect the other removed parts and replace them, if
Disc necessary.
1. Switch off MOVI-SWITCH® and prevent it from unintentional restart.
2. Remove:
– NV16 / NV26 proximity sensor, if present
3. Remove rubber sealing collar (5).
(16), releasing lever (15).
4. Loosen hexagon nuts (10e), carefully pull off the coil body (12) (Caution, brake
cable!), and take out the brake springs (11).
5. Remove damping plate (9), pressure plate (8) and brake disc (7, 7b), and clean the
brake parts.
6. Install the new brake disc.
7. Re-install brake components (except rubber sealing collar, fan and fan guard).
8. Set the working air gap (see page 321, Points 5 to 7).
9. With manual brake release (type HF or HR):
10.Set the floating clearance via the setting nuts between the conical coil springs
(pressed flat) and setting nuts (see the following figure).

[mm]
BMG 05 - 1 1.5
BMG 2 - BMG4 2
01111AXX
Important: This floating clearance is necessary so that the pressure plate can
11.Fix the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
Note:
• The lockable manual release brake (Type HF) is released if resistance is
encountered when operating the manual release brake screw.
• The self-reengaging manual brake release (Type HR) can be opened with normal
hand pressure.
Caution: On brake motors with a self-reengaging manual brake release, the lever
must be removed after startup / maintenance! A bracket is provided for storing it
on the outside of the motor.

1
Changing Braking torque can be adjusted in increments (see page 324)
Braking Torque • by installing various brake springs.
2
• by changing the number of the brake springs.
1. Switch off MOVI-SWITCH® and prevent it from unintentional restart.

3
2. Remove:
– NV16 / NV26 proximity sensor, if present.
4
3. Remove rubber sealing collar (5). 5
(16), releasing lever (15). 6
4. Loosen hex nuts (10e), slide off brake coil body (12) by approximately 50 mm
(Caution, brake cable!).
5. Change or add brake springs (11) (position brake springs symmetrically).
7
6. Re-install brake components except for rubber sealing collar, fan and fan guard. Set
working air gap (see page 321, Points 5 to 7). 8
7. For manual brake release:
Set the floating clearance between the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and release 9
lever via the setting nuts (see the following figure).
10
[mm] 11
BMG 05 - 1 1.5
BMG 2 - BMG4 2 12
01111AXX 13
Important: This floating clearance is necessary so that the pressure plate can 14
15
16
Note: For repeated assembly, replace the setting nuts (18) and hexagon nuts (10e) (due
to reduced self-locking of nuts)!
17
18
19
20
21
22
19 Approved Bearing Types
19.4 Approved Bearing Types

Motor type A-bearing (AC motors, brake motor) B-bearing (foot, flanged or geared motors)
Flange mounted Geared motor Foot AC motor Brake motor
motor mounted
motor
DT 71-80 6204-Z-J 6303-Z-J 6204-Z-J 6203-J 6203-RS-J-C3
DT 90-DV100 6306-Z-J-C3 6205-J 6205-RS-J-C3
19.5 Working Air Gap, Brake Braking Torque

Brake Motor Working air gap
Brake torque settings
mm
Braking Type and number of

Spring order numbers
min.1) max. torque springs
[Nm] normal red normal red
BMG 05 DT 71 5,0 3 -
4,0 2 2
2,5 - 6
1,6 - 4
1,2 - 3 135 017 X 135 018 8
BMG 1 DT 80 10 6 -
7,5 4 2
6,0 3 3
0,25 0,6
BMG 2 DT 90 20 3 -
16 2 2
10 - 6
6,6 - 4
5,0 - 3 135 150 8 135 151 6
BMG 4 DV 100 40 6 -
30 4 2
24 3 3
1) Observe while checking the working air gap: After a test run, deviations of 0.1 mm may occur due to parallelism tolerances of the
brake disc.

Statement of Conformance for MFD2x DeviceNet Interface 20
1
20 Appendix
20.1 Statement of Conformance for MFD2x DeviceNet Interface 2
Device Net Statement of Conformance

3
SOC data as of 3 - 24 - 2000 4

Fill in the blank or X the appropriate box
General Conforms to DeviceNet Specification Volume I - Release 2 Volume II - Release 2 5

Device
Data Vendor Name SEW Eurodrive GmbH
Device Profile Name Vendor Specific 6
Product Name SEW-MOVIMOT-MFD 2x
Product Catalog Number 6
Product Revision 1,01
7
DeviceNet Physical Network Power Consumption (Max) 0,4 A @ 11V dc (worst case)
Conformance Data 8
Connector Style Open-Hardwired Sealed-Mini
Open-Pluggable Sealed-Micro X
9
Isolated Physical Layer Yes
No X
LEDs Supported Module Combo Mod/Net X

10
None Network I/O
MAC ID Setting DIP Switch X Software Settable 11

Other
Default MAC ID 63 12
Communication Rate Setting DIP Switch X Software Settable
Other
13
Communication Rates Supported 125k bit/s X 500k bit/s X
250k bit/s X
14
DeviceNet Device Network Behavior Group 2 Client Group 2 Only Client
Communication Check All That Apply Group 2 Server Group 2 Only Server X
Data Peer-To-Peer Tool (not a Device)
15
UCMM Explicit Message Groups Supported Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
Dynamic I/O Message Groups (Peer to Peer) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
16
Default I/O Data Address Path Input: Class 4 Inst. 64 Attr. 3
Output: Class 4 Inst. 64 Attr. 3 17
Fragmented Explicit Messaging Supported Yes X No
If yes, Acknowledge TimeOut 1000 ms
18
Typical Target Addresses
Consumption Service 16 Class 1 Inst. 1 Attr. 7 19
Production Service 14 Class 1 Inst. 1 Attr. 7
20
1 of 9
03333AXX
21
22
20 Statement of Conformance for MFD2x DeviceNet Interface
DeviceNet Identity Object 0x01

Required Object Class ID Description Get Set Value Limits
Object Attributes Open 1 Revision
Implementation 2 Max instance
X None Supported 3 Number of Instances
4 Optional attributes list
5 Optional services list
6 Max Id of class attributes
7 Max Id of instance attributes
DeviceNet Services Parameter Options
Services Get_Attributes_All
Reset
X None Supported Get_Attribute_Single
Find_Next_Object_instance
Object Instance ID Description Get Set Value Limits
Attributes Open 1 Vendor X =(315)
2 Device type X =(100)
3 Product code X =(6)
4 Revision X =(1.01)
5 Status (bits supported) X
6 Serial number X =(8234590)
7 Product name X SEW-MOVIMOT-MFD 2x
8 State
9 Config. Consistency Value
10 Heartbeat Interval
X Reset 0
X Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Vendor Specific Additions If yes, fill out the Vendor Specific Yes
Additions form on page F-7. No X
X Get indicates attribute value is returned by the Get_Attribute_Single service.

X Set indicates attribute value is written to by the Set_Attribute_Single service. 2 of 9
03334AXX

2
3
DeviceNet Message Router Object 0x02
4
Implementation 4 Optional attribute list
X None Supported 5 Optional service list 5
6 Max ID of class attributes
7 Max ID of instance attributes
6
Get_Attribute_Single 7
X None Supported
Attributes Open 1 Object list
8
2 Maximum connections supported
X None Supported 3 Number of active connections 9
4 Active connections list
10
Get_Attribute_Single
X None Supported 11
Additions form on page F-7. No X 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
X Set indicates attribute value is written to by the Set_Attribute_Single service. 3 of 9 21
03335AXX
22
DeviceNet DeviceNet Object 0x03

Object Attributes Open 1 Revision X =(2)
Implementation None Supported
Services Get_Attribute_Single
X None Supported
Attributes Open 1 MAC ID X =(0..63)
2 Baud rate X =(0..2)
None Supported 3 BOI X =(0)
4 Bus-off counter X X =(0..255)
5 Allocation information X
6 MAC ID switch changed X =(0)
7 Baud rate switch changed X =(0)
8 MAC ID switch value X =(0..63)
9 Baud rate switch value X =(0..2)
Services X Get_Attribute_Single
X Set_Attribute_Single
None Supported X Allocate M/S connection set
X Release M/S connection set

03363AXX

2
DeviceNet Connection Object 0x05 3

4
Implementation X None Supported
Services Reset 5
Create
X None Supported Delete
6
Find_Next_Object_Instance
Object Instance Predefined M/S Connections Peer to Peer Connections Max Instances 7
Complete the Object Instance section Explicit Message X Explicit Message Total
for each Instance type supported. Polled Server Client
Indicate Production trigger, Bit Strobed Dynamic I/O Total 8
Transport type and Transport Change of State Server Client
Class supported for Dynamic I/O. Cyclic
9
Production trigger(s) Cyclic COS App. trig.
Transport type(s) Server X Client
10
Transport class(es) 2 X 3
ID Description Get Set Value Limits
Attributes Open 1 State X 11
2 Instance type X
3 Transport Class trigger X
4 Produced connection ID X
12
5 Consumed connection ID X
6 Initial comm. characteristics X 13
7 Produced connection size X
8 Consumed connection size X
9 Expected packet rate X X =(0..65530) 14
12 Watchdog time-out action X
13 Produced connection path length X
14 Produced connection path X
15
15 Consumed connection path length X
16 Consumed connection path X
16
17 Production inhibit time X =(0)
Services X Reset 17
Delete
Apply_Attributes
18
Vendor Specific Additions If yes, fill out the Vendor Specific Yes 19

20
21
03337AXX
22
DeviceNet Connection Object 0x05

Services Reset
Create
Object Instance Predefined M/S Connections Peer to Peer Connections Max Instances
Complete the Object Instance section Explicit Message Explicit Message Total
for each Instance type supported. Polled X Server Client
Indicate Production trigger, Bit Strobed Dynamic I/O Total

Attributes Open 1 State X
2 Instance type X
6 Initial comm. characteristics X
9 Expected packet rate X X =(0..65530)
Services X Reset
Delete
Apply_Attributes
03338AXX

2
3
Object Attributes Open 1 Revision 4
5
Services Reset
Create
X None Supported Delete 6
7
for each Instance type supported. Polled Server Client 8
Indicate Production trigger, Bit Strobed X Dynamic I/O Total
Class supported for Dynamic I/O. Cyclic 9
Production trigger(s) Cyclic COS App. trig. 10

ID Description Get Set Value Limits 11
2 Instance type X
12
5 Consumed connection ID X 13
14
12 Watchdog time-out action X 15
15 Consumed connection path length X 16
17
Services X Reset
Delete 18
Apply_Attributes
19
03339AXX
22
DeviceNet Register Object 0x07

Implementation
X None Supported
X None Supported
Attributes Open 1 Bad Flag X
2 Direction X
None Supported 3 Size X =(16,48)
4 Data X X
Services X Get_Attribute_Single 8452
None Supported X Set_Attribute_Single

03340AXX

2
3
DeviceNet Parameter Object 0x0F
4
Implementation 2 Max instance X
None Supported 8 Parameter class descriptor X 5
9 Configuration assembly instance X
10 Native language
6
Reset 7
None Supported X Get_Attribute_Single
Restore 8
Save
Object Instance ID Description Get Set Value Limits 9
Attributes Open 1 Parameter value X X =(0..4294967294)
2 Link Path size X
None Supported 3 Link path X
10
4 Descriptor X
5 Data type X 11
6 Data size X =(4)
7 Parameter name string
8 Units string 12
9 Help string
10 Minimum value
11 Maximum value
13
12 Default value
13 Scaling multiplier 14
14 Scaling divisor
15 Scaling base
16 Scaling offset 15
17 Multiplier link
18 Divisor link
19 Base link
16
20 Offset link
21 Decimal precision 17
Services Get_Attribute_All
18
20
03341AXX
22
20.2 Statement of Conformance for MFD3x DeviceNet Interface
SOC data as of 3 - 21 - 2000
Fill in the blank or X the appropriate box
General Conforms to DeviceNet Specification Volume I - Release 2 Volume II - Release 2

Device
Data Vendor Name SEW Eurodrive GmbH
Device Profile Name Vendor Specific
Product Name SEW-MOVIMOT-MFD 3x
Product Catalog Number 5
Product Revision 1,01
DeviceNet Physical Network Power Consumption (Max) 0,4 A @ 11V dc (worst case)
Conformance Data
Connector Style Open-Hardwired Sealed-Mini
Open-Pluggable Sealed-Micro X
Isolated Physical Layer Yes

No X
LEDs Supported Module Combo Mod/Net X

None Network I/O
MAC ID Setting DIP Switch X Software Settable

Other
Default MAC ID 63
Communication Rate Setting DIP Switch X Software Settable

Other
Communication Rates Supported 125k bit/s X 500k bit/s X

250k bit/s X
DeviceNet Device Network Behavior Group 2 Client Group 2 Only Client

Communication Check All That Apply Group 2 Server Group 2 Only Server X
Data Peer-To-Peer Tool (not a Device)
UCMM Explicit Message Groups Supported Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

Dynamic I/O Message Groups (Peer to Peer) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
Default I/O Data Address Path Input: Class 4 Inst. 64 Attr. 3

Output: Class 4 Inst. 64 Attr. 3
Fragmented Explicit Messaging Supported Yes X No

If yes, Acknowledge TimeOut 1000 ms
Typical Target Addresses
Consumption Service 16 Class 1 Inst. 1 Attr. 7
Production Service 14 Class 1 Inst. 1 Attr. 7
1 of 9
03216AXX

2
3
DeviceNet Identity Object 0x01
Object Attributes Open 1 Revision 4
Implementation 2 Max instance
X None Supported 3 Number of Instances
4 Optional attributes list
5
5 Optional services list
6 Max Id of class attributes 6
7 Max Id of instance attributes
7
Reset
X None Supported Get_Attribute_Single 8
Find_Next_Object_instance
Attributes Open 1 Vendor X =(315)
2 Device type X =(100)
3 Product code X =(5) 10
4 Revision X =(1.01)
5 Status (bits supported) X
6 Serial number X =(8234590)
11
7 Product name X SEW-MOVIMOT-MFD 3x
12
8 State
9 Config. Consistency Value
13
10 Heartbeat Interval
Services Get_Attributes_All 14
X Reset 0
X Get_Attribute_Single 15
17
18
19
20
03217AXX
22
DeviceNet Message Router Object 0x02

Implementation 4 Optional attribute list
X None Supported 5 Optional service list
6 Max ID of class attributes
7 Max ID of instance attributes
X None Supported
Attributes Open 1 Object list
2 Maximum connections supported
X None Supported 3 Number of active connections
4 Active connections list
X None Supported

3218AXX

Device Net Statement of Conformance 2
DeviceNet DeviceNet Object 0x03 3

Object Attributes Open 1 Revision X =(2)
Implementation None Supported
4
Services Get_Attribute_Single 5
X None Supported
Attributes Open 1 MAC ID X =(0..63)
2 Baud rate X =(0..2)
None Supported 3 BOI X =(0) 7
4 Bus-off counter X X =(0..255)
5 Allocation information X 8
6 MAC ID switch changed X =(0)
7 Baud rate switch changed X =(0)
8 MAC ID switch value X =(0..63) 9
9 Baud rate switch value X =(0..2)
DeviceNet Services Parameter Options 10
Services X Get_Attribute_Single
None Supported X Allocate M/S connection set 11
X Release M/S connection set
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
03219AXX
22

Services Reset
Create
Complete the Object Instance section Explicit Message X Explicit Message Total

2 Instance type X
Services X Reset
Delete
Apply_Attributes
03220AXX


2
DeviceNet Connection Object 0x05 3

4
Services Reset 5
Create
6
Object Instance Predefined M/S Connections Peer to Peer Connections Max Instances 7
for each Instance type supported. Polled X Server Client
8
Class supported for Dynamic I/O. Cyclic 9
Transport type(s) Server X Client 10
ID Description Get Set Value Limits 11
2 Instance type X
3 Transport Class trigger X 12
13
8 Consumed connection size X 14
15
15 Consumed connection path length X 16
17
Services X Reset
Delete 18
Apply_Attributes
X Set_Attribute_Single 19
21
03221AXX
22

Services Reset
Create
Indicate Production trigger, Bit Strobed X Dynamic I/O Total

2 Instance type X
Services X Reset
Delete
Apply_Attributes
03222AXX

2
DeviceNet Register Object 0x07 3

4
Implementation
X None Supported
DeviceNet Services Parameter Options 5
6
X None Supported
Attributes Open 1 Bad Flag X
7
2 Direction X
None Supported 3 Size X =(16,48) 8
4 Data X X
Services X Get_Attribute_Single 8452
9
None Supported X Set_Attribute_Single
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
03223AXX
22
DeviceNet Parameter Object 0x0F

Implementation 2 Max instance X
None Supported 8 Parameter class descriptor X
9 Configuration assembly instance X
10 Native language
Reset
Restore
Save
Attributes Open 1 Parameter value X X =(0..4294967294)
2 Link Path size X
None Supported 3 Link path X
4 Descriptor X
5 Data type X
6 Data size X =(4)
7 Parameter name string
8 Units string
9 Help string
10 Minimum value
11 Maximum value
12 Default value
13 Scaling multiplier
14 Scaling divisor
15 Scaling base
16 Scaling offset
17 Multiplier link
18 Divisor link
19 Base link
20 Offset link
21 Decimal precision
Services Get_Attribute_All

03224AXX

Revisions Index 21
1
21 Revisions Index
The following additions and changes have been made to the previous edition of the 2
System Manual "Drive System for Decentral Installation" (Documentation number: 0918
1210, Edition: 06/2000), :
• Optimized structure 3
– e.g. function and startup of fieldbus systems are now uniformly arranged in the
Section "Communications Interfaces".
4
• New detailed project planning process and project planning examples
for decentral systems
• Motors with plug connectors
5
– designation for motors with Phoenix Contact plug connectors is now APG 4
instead of APG1 6
– additional data overviews for motors with plug connectors IS and ASA4
• New pre-fabricated cables
– for plug connector AVT1
7
– for plug connector IS and ASA4
• Additional Dimension Drawings 8
– for MOVIMOT® plug connector
– for MOVI-SWITCH® plug connector
– for fieldbus interface MF... without MOVIMOT® 9
– for fieldbus interface MFI23B/MFI33B with rugged line connection
• MOVIMOT® and MOVI-SWITCH® with factory-installed options 10
• Field distributor
– additional technical data for the field distributor 11
– new field distributor combinations
– new table with "Motors for field distributor MF../MM../Z.8." assignments
– MF../MM../Z.8 field distributor in size 2 12
– new connection technology for field distributor
– new option for fieldbus interfaces: MFG11A keypad
– new wiring diagrams for additional fieldbus interfaces / field distributors 13
– expanded chapter on Field Distributor Startup with block diagrams for field
distributors
– expanded installation instructions for field distributor 14
• Fieldbus interfaces
– new Interbus fieldbus interfaces with fiber optic cable and rugged line plug 15
connector (Phoenix Contact)
– new CANopen fieldbus interfaces
– new fieldbus interface with integrated MQ.. control (in preparation) 16
– new chapter: "AS-i-Slaves with Special Functions"
– new example for assigning the AS-I-Slave address by means of a programming
device
17
– (for MOVIMOT® and MOVI-SWITCH®)
– new connection example: 18
"MOVI-SWITCH® with MF.. fieldbus interfaces (connection via M12 connector)"
19
20
21
22
System Manual – Drive System for Decentralized Installation 343
22 Index
22 Index
Numerics Connection technology for field distributor 76
4Q operation 21, 23 Contactor switch contacts 137
Continuation of ring circuit 231
A
Addressing device 206, 315 D
Altitudes 137 Damp locations 126, 305
APG4 73 Data width 220
ASA3 31 Decentralization concepts 92
ASA4 74 DeviceNet address 244
AS-i 45 DeviceNet timeout 255
Assembly of fieldbus interfaces 134 Diagnosis via option MDG11A 289
Assembly of MOVIMOT® geared motors 125 Diagnostics 241, 256, 287
Assembly of MOVIMOT® Options 133 Dimensions MOVIMOT® 24, 25
Assembly of MOVIMOT® retrofit set 127 Dimensions of ASA3 and AVS1 plug connector 43
Assignment of motors/field distributors 69 Dimensions of ASA3, AVT1 plug connector 33
AVT1 31 Dimensions of fieldbus interfaces 56
DIP SWITCH S1 195
B DIP switches 249, 262
Ball bearing types 301, 324 Direction of rotation 316
Baud rate 231, 244, 259 DP configurations 212
Binary control 196
Bit-strobe I/O 248 E
Block check character BCC 272 Earth-leakage circuit-breaker 137
Block diagram, field distributor 280, 281, 282 Electrical installation of MOVI-SWITCH 306
Brake 297, 320 EMC 109, 141
Brake coil 21 Emergency object 267
Brake disc 299, 322
F
Braking resistors 23
f1 setpoint potentiometer 195
Braking torque 301, 323, 324
f2 setpoint switch 195
Broadcast process data processing 248
Fault conditions 266
Bus diagnostics 60, 291
Features of MOVI-SWITCH® 39
Bus monitor 61
Field distributor 62
Bus terminating resistors 209
Fieldbus interface 48
C Fieldbus interfaces 45
Cable glands 111 Floating clearance 322
CANopen connection 180 Function with RS-485 master 270
CANopen timeout 266 Function, DeviceNet 247
CANopen, Function 261 Function, InterBus (fiber optic) 236
Coding process data 275 Function, InterBus interface (copper line) 224
Configuration (project planning) of CANopen master 260 Function, PROFIBUS 211
Configuring InterBus master (project planning) 220
G
Configuring PROFIBUS master 210
Group address 271
Connecting inputs/outputs 188
Group drives 106
Connection example MOVI-SWITCH® with MF.. fieldbus
interface 311 H
Connection of DeviceNet 172 Hybrid cable 84
Connection of MOVIMOT® basic unit 142
Connection of MOVIMOT® Options 143
Connection of pre-fabricated cables 192
344 System Manual – Drive System for Decentralized Installation

Index
22
1
I MFG11A 59, 285
I/O enable 245, 259 Minimum frequency 195
IEC configuration 15 MLG..A 27, 133 2
Input/output byte 211, 247, 261 MLK11A 45, 133
Input/output word 224, 236 MLU..A 26, 133 3
Inspection intervals 317 MLU..A / MLG..A / MLK11A assembly 133
Inspection intervals of MOVIMOT® 294 Motor Data 15, 16
Inspection of MOVIMOT® 294 MOVILINK® unit profile 275 4
®
Installation Guidelines 137 MOVIMOT control elements 195
Installation tolerances 125, 305 MOVIMOT® list of faults 288 5
Installation variants of fieldbus interfaces 50 MOVIMOT® mechanical installation 125
InterBus connection (copper line) 154 MOVIMOT® startup 194
InterBus connection (fiber optic) 166 MOVIMOT® unit design 114
6
InterBus data width 231 MOVI-SWITCH® diagnostics 316
InterBus startup (copper line) 218 MOVI-SWITCH® safety instructions 302 7
InterBus technical data 52, 53 MOVI-SWITCH® dimensions 40
InterBus timeout 240 MOVI-SWITCH® inspection 317
MOVI-SWITCH® maintenance 317
8
Inverter data (IEC) 17
Inverter data (UL) 18, 19 MOVI-SWITCH® operating principle 38
IS(U) 75 MOVI-SWITCH® plug connector 42 9
IT systems 137 MOVI-SWITCH® possible combinations 38
MOVI-SWITCH® technical data 39
L 10
MOVI-SWITCH® unit design 303
LED display 225, 237, 251 MQ.. integrated control 82
Line cross-section 137 MWA21A 29 11
Line fuse protection 137 MWS21A 60
M N 12
Maintenance intervals 317 Nameplate 13, 14
Maintenance intervals of MOVIMOT® 294
Maintenance of MOVIMOT® 294
NEXT/END 231 13
NEXT/END switch 219
Maintenance switch 281, 282
MBG11A 28 O 14
MDG11A 30 Operating MBG11A and MLG..A options 200
Mechanical Installation 125
P 15
Mechanical installation of MOVI-SWITCH® 305
Plug connector 31, 73
Message processing 273
Pre-fabricated cables 32
Message structure 270 16
Process data 211, 224, 236
Metal cable glands 111, 141
Process data description 221
MF.. diagnostics interface 291 17
Process data exchange 267
MF.../MM../Z.8. 67
Process data length 259
MF.../MM../Z.8. combinations 68
Process data width 219, 231 18
MF.../MM../Z.8. dimensions 71
Process input data (PI) 277
MF.../MM../Z.8. function 67
Process output data 276
MF.../Z.3. 62
Product range 7 19
MF.../Z.3. combinations 62
PROFIBUS 48
MF.../Z.3. dimensions 63
MF.../Z.6. 64
PROFIBUS address 208 20
PROFIBUS connection 147
MF.../Z.6. combinations 65
PROFIBUS technical data 51
MF.../Z.6. dimensions 66
Project planning examples 97
21
MF.../Z.6. function 64
Project planning process 87
22
System Manual – Drive System for Decentralized Installation 345

22 Index
Protection devices 138 W

Wiring check 140
R
Working air gap 298, 301, 321, 324
Request message 274
Response message 274 Z
Retrofit kits 35 Z.6. 64
Retrofit set 127
RS-485 address 268
RS-485 interface 20
S
Safety Notes 112
Safety notes for field distributors 113
Sample program 278
Sensor/actuator processing 211, 224, 236
Setpoint stop function 203
Single applications 103
Start character 271
Start pause 271
Startup of CANopen 257
Startup of DeviceNet 243
Startup of field distributor 280
Startup of InterBus (fiber optic) 230
Startup of MOVI-SWITCH® 313
Startup with AS-i binary slave MLK11A 204
Startup with MBG11A or MLG11A option 198
Startup with MWA21A option 201
Startup with RS-485 master 268
Status LED 287
Switch t1 195
System Description 9
System fault 215, 227, 255, 266
T
Technical data of CANopen 55
Technical data of DeviceNet 54
Technical data of MF.../Z.6. 65
Technical data of MF../MM../Z.8. 70
Technical data of MF../Z.3. 63
Timeout 215, 227
Timeout monitoring 271
Type designation 13, 14, 37
U
UL configuration 16
UL-compliant installation 138
Unit design Field distributor 121
Unit design of MF.. fieldbus interfaces 117
User data type 271
346 System Manual – Drive System for Decentralized Installation

Address list
Address list
Germany
Headquarters Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0
Production Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax (0 72 51) 75-19 70
Sales D-76646 Bruchsal http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
Service P.O. Box sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Postfach 3023 · D-76642 Bruchsal
Production Graben SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax (0 72 51) 75-29 70
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf Telex 7 822 276
P.O. Box
Postfach 1220 · D-76671 Graben-Neudorf
Assembly Garbsen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 51 37) 87 98-30
Service (near Hannover) Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42 Fax (0 51 37) 87 98-55
D-30823 Garbsen scm-garbsen@sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box
Postfach 110453 · D-30804 Garbsen
Kirchheim SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 89) 90 95 52-10
(near München) Domagkstraße 5 Fax (0 89) 90 95 52-50
D-85551 Kirchheim scm-kirchheim@sew-eurodrive.de
Langenfeld SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 21 73) 85 07-30
(near Düsseldorf) Siemensstraße 1 Fax (0 21 73) 85 07-55
D-40764 Langenfeld scm-langenfeld@sew-eurodrive.de
Meerane SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 37 64) 76 06-0
(near Zwickau) Dänkritzer Weg 1 Fax (0 37 64) 76 06-30
D-08393 Meerane scm-meerane@sew-eurodrive.de
Technical Offices Augsburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (08 21) 2 27 79-10
Max-von-Laue-Str. 9 Fax (08 21) 2 27 79-50
D-86156 Augsburg tb-augsburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Berlin SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (03 37 62) 22 66 30
Lilienthalstraße 3a Fax (03 37 62) 22 66 36
D-15732 Waltersdorf tb-berlin@sew-eurodrive.de
Bodensee SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 75 51) 92 26-30
Burgbergring 91 Fax (0 75 51) 92 26-56
D-88662 Überlingen tb-bodensee@sew-eurodrive.de
Bremen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (04 21) 3 39 18-0
Kohlhökerstr.48 Fax (04 21) 3 39 18-22
D-28203 Bremen tb-bremen@sew-eurodrive.de
Dortmund SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (02 31) 91 20 50-10
Chemnitzer Straße 130 Fax (02 31) 91 20 50-20
D-44139 Dortmund tb-dortmund@sew-eurodrive.de
Dresden SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (03 51) 2 63 38 - 0
Hauptstraße 32 Fax (03 51) 2 63 38 - 38
D-01445 Radebeul tb-dresden@sew-eurodrive.de
Erfurt SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (03 61) 2 17 09-70
Blumenstraße 70 Fax (03 61) 2 17 09-79
D-99092 Erfurt tb-erfurt@sew-eurodrive.de
Güstrow SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 38 43) 85 57 80
Thünenweg 19 Fax (0 38 43) 85 57 88
D-18273 Güstrow tb-guestrow@sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box
Postfach 1216 · D-18262 Güstrow
Hamburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 40) 29 81 09-60
Wohldorfer Straße 5 Fax (0 40) 29 81 09-70
D-22081 Hamburg tb-hamburg@sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box
Postfach 7610 07 · D-22060 Hamburg
Hannover/Garb- SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 51 37) 87 98-10
sen Alte Ricklinger Str.40-42 Fax (0 51 37) 87 98-50
D-30823 Garbsen tb-hannover@sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box
Postfach 1104 53 · D-30804 Garbsen
02/2002 347
Address list
Germany
Heilbronn SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 71 43) 87 38-0
Zeppelinstraße 7 Fax (0 71 43) 87 38-25
D-74357 Bönnigheim tb-heilbronn@sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box
Postfach 68 · D-74355 Bönnigheim
Herford SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 52 21) 91 41-0
Radewiger Straße 21 Fax (0 52 21) 91 41-20
D-32052 Herford tb-herford@sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box
Postfach 4108 · D-32025 Herford
Karlsruhe SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 72 45) 91 90-10
Ettlinger Weg 2 Fax (0 72 45) 91 90-20
D-76467 Bietigheim tb-karlsruhe@sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box
Postfach 43 · D-76463 Bietigheim
Kassel SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (05 61) 9 51 44-80
Waldauer Weg 80 Fax (05 61) 9 51 44-90
D-34253 Lohfelden tb-kassel@sew-eurodrive.de
Koblenz SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 26 52) 97 13-30
Bahnstraße 17a Fax (0 26 52) 97 13-40
D-56743 Mendig tb-koblenz@sew-eurodrive.de
Lahr SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 78 21) 9 09 99-60
Europastraße 3 Fax (0 78 21) 9 09 99-79
D-77933 Lahr / Schwarzwald tb-lahr@sew-eurodrive.de
Langenfeld SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 21 73) 85 07-10
Siemensstraße 1 Fax (0 21 73) 85 07-50
D-40764 Langenfeld tb-langenfeld@sew-eurodrive.de
Magdeburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (03 92 01) 70 04-1
Burgstraße 7 Fax (03 92 01) 70 04-9
D-39326 Wolmirstedt tb-magdeburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Mannheim SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (06 21) 7 16 83-10
Radeberger Straße 2 Fax (06 21) 7 16 83-22
D-68309 Mannheim tb-mannheim@sew-eurodrive.de
München SEW-EURODRlVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 89) 90 95 51-10
Domagkstraße 5 Fax (0 89) 90 95 51-50
D-85551 Kirchheim tb-muenchen@sew-eurodrive.de
Münster SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (02 51) 4 14 75-11
Von-Vincke-Straße 14 Fax (02 51) 4 14 75-50
D-48143 Münster tb-muenster@sew-eurodrive.de
Nürnberg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (09 11) 98 88 45-0
An der Radrunde 168 Fax (09 11) 98 88 46-0
D-90455 Nürnberg tb-nuernberg@sew-eurodrive.de
Regensburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (09 41) 4 66 68 68
Im Gewerbepark A15 Fax (09 41) 4 66 68 66
D-93059 Regensburg tb-regensburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Rhein-Main SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 61 72) 96 17-0
Niederstedter Weg 5 Fax (0 61 72) 96 17 50
D-61348 Bad Homburg tb-rheinmain@sew-eurodrive.de
Stuttgart SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (07 11) 1 60 72-0
Kernerstraße 6 Fax (07 11) 1 60 72 72
D-70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen tb-stuttgart@sew-eurodrive.de
Ulm SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 73 48) 98 85-0
Hauffstraße 21 Fax (0 73 48) 98 85-90
D-89160 Dornstadt tb-ulm@sew-eurodrive.de
Würzburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (09 31) 2 78 86-60
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 55a Fax (09 31) 2 78 86-66
D-97076 Würzburg-Lengfeld tb-wuerzburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Zwickau / SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co Tel. (0 37 64) 76 06-0
Meerane Dänkritzer Weg1 Fax (0 37 64) 76 06-20
D-08393 Meerane tb-zwickau@sew-eurodrive.de
348 02/2002
Address list
France
Production Haguenau SEW-USOCOME Tel. 03 88 73 67 00
Sales 48-54, route de Soufflenheim Fax 03 88 73 66 00
Service B. P. 185 http://www.usocome.com
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex sew@usocome.com
Assembly Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Tel. 05 57 26 39 00
Sales Parc d’activités de Magellan Fax 05 57 26 39 09
Service 62, avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Lyon SEW-USOCOME Tel. 04 72 15 37 00
Parc d’Affaires Roosevelt Fax 04 72 15 37 15
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
Paris SEW-USOCOME Tel. 01 64 42 40 80
Zone industrielle Fax 01 64 42 40 88
2, rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I’Etang
Technical Offices Alsace Franche- SEW-USOCOME Tel. 03 89 25 91 01
Comté 51, rue de Mulhouse Fax 03 89 25 91 21
F-68210 Balschwiller
Alsace Nord SEW-USOCOME Tel. 03 88 54 74 44
32, rue Jeanne d’Arc Fax 03 88 80 47 62
F-67250 Surbourg
Aquitaine SEW-USOCOME Tel. 05 57 26 39 00
Parc d‘activités de Magellan Fax 05 57 26 39 09
62, avenue de Magellan
B.P.182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Ardennes SEW-USOCOME Tel. 03 83 96 28 04
Lorraine 7, rue de Prény Fax 03 83 96 28 07
F-54000 Nancy
Bourgogne SEW-USOCOME Tel. 03 85 49 92 18
10 rue de la Poste Fax 03 85 49 92 19
F-71350 St. Loup de la Salle
Bretagne Ouest SEW-USOCOME Tel. 02 51 70 54 04
4, rue des Châtaigniers Fax 02 51 70 54 05
F-44830 Brains
Centre Pays de SEW-USOCOME Tel. 02 47 41 33 23
Loire 9, rue des Erables Fax 02 47 41 34 03
F-37540 Saint Cyr sur Loire
Centre SEW-USOCOME Tel. 04 73 64 85 60
Auvergne 17, boulevard de la liberté Fax 04 73 64 85 61
F-63200 Riom
Champagne SEW-USOCOME Tel. 03 25 79 63 24
139, rue Thiers Fax 03 25 79 63 25
F-10120 Saint André les Vergers
Lyon Nord-Est SEW-USOCOME Tel. 04 72 15 37 04
Rue Jacques Tati
Lyon Ouest SEW-USOCOME Tel. 04 72 15 37 04
Rue Jacques Tati
Lyon Sud-Est SEW-USOCOME Tel. 04 75 05 65 95
4, Montée du Pavé Fax 04 75 05 65 96
F-26750 Génissieux
Nord SEW-USOCOME Tel. 03 27 27 07 88
348, rue du Calvaire Fax 03 27 27 24 41
F-59213 Bermerain Cidex 102
Normandie SEW-USOCOME Tel. 02 31 78 99 70
Les Courtillages Hameau de Coupigny Fax 02 31 78 99 72
F-14370 Airan
02/2002 349
Address list
France
Paris Est SEW-USOCOME Tel. 01 64 68 40 50
Résidence Le Bois de Grâce Fax 01 64 68 45 00
2, allée des Souches Vertes
F-77420 Champs sur Marne
Paris Ouest SEW-USOCOME Tel. 01 30 64 46 33
1, rue Matisse Fax 01 30 57 54 86
F-78960 Voisins le Bretonneux
Paris Picardie SEW-USOCOME Tel. 01 39 91 70 52
14, rue des Lavandières Fax 01 39 91 90 40
F-95570 Bouffemont
Paris Sud SEW-USOCOME Tel. 01 60 81 10 56
6. chemin des Bergers Fax 01 60 81 10 57
Lieu-dit Marchais
F-91410 Roinville sous Dourdan
Provence SEW-USOCOME Tel. 04 42 24 90 05
Chemin Les Grands Vallons Fax 04 42 24 90 13
F-13100 St Marc Jaumegarde
Pyrénées SEW-USOCOME Tel. 05 61 08 15 85
271, Lieu-dit Ninaut Fax 05 61 08 16 44
F-31190 Caujac
Sud-Atlantique SEW-USOCOME Tel. 02 40 80 32 23
9, rue des Mésanges Fax 02 40 80 32 13
F-44120 Vertou
Algeria
Technical Office Alger Réducom Tel. 2 82 22 84
16, rue des Frères Zaghnoun Fax 2 82 22 84
Bellevue El-Harrach
16200 Alger
Argentina
Assembly Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A. Tel. (3327) 45 72 84
Sales Centro Industrial Garin, Lote 35 Fax (3327) 45 72 21
Service Ruta Panamericana Km 37,5 sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
1619 Garin
Australia
Assembly Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. (03) 99 33 10 00
Sales 27 Beverage Drive Fax (03) 99 33 10 03
Service Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. (02) 97 25 99 00
9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park Fax (02) 97 25 99 05
New South Wales, 2164 enquires@sew-eurodirve.com.au
Technical Offices Adelaide SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. (08) 82 94 82 77
Unit 1/601 Anzac Highway Fax (08) 82 94 28 93
Glenelg, S.A. 5045 enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Perth SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. (089) 4 78 26 88
105 Robinson Avenue Fax (089) 2 77 75 72
Belmont, W.A. 6104 enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Brisbane SEW-EURODRIVE PTY.LTD. Tel. (07) 32 72 79 00
1 /34 Collinsvale St Fax (07) 32 72 79 01
Rocklea, Queensland, 4106 enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Austria
Assembly Wien SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. (01) 6 17 55 00-0
Sales Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24 Fax (01) 6 17 55 00-30
Service A-1230 Wien http://sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Technical Offices Linz SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. (07 32) 65 51 09-0
Reuchlinstr. 6/3 Fax (07 32) 65 51 09-20
A-4020 Linz sew@linz.sew-eurodrive.at
Graz SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. (0316) 68 57 56-0
Grabenstraße 231 Fax (0316) 68 57 55
A-8045 Graz sew@graz.sew-eurodrive.at
350 02/2002
Address list
Bangladesh
Dhaka Triangle Trade International Tel. 0 08 80-2-8 91 22 46
Bldg-5, Road-2, Sec-3, Fax 0 08 80-2-8 91 33 44
Uttara Model Town
Dhaka-1230 Bangladesh
Belgium
Assembly Brüssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Tel. 0032 (010) 23 13 11
Sales Avenue Eiffel 5 Fax 0032 (010) 2313 36
Service B-1300 Wavre http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Technical Office Vlaanderen CARON-VECTOR S.A. Tel. 0032 (09) 2 27 34 52
Industrieweg 112-114 Fax 0032 (09) 2 27 41 55
B-9032 Gent (Wondelgem)
Bolivia
La Paz LARCOS S. R. L. Tel. 02 34 06 14
Calle Batallon Colorados No.162 Piso 4 Fax 02 35 79 17
La Paz
Brazil
Production Sao Paulo SEW DO BRASIL Tel. (011) 64 60-64 33
Sales Motores-Redutores Ltda. Fax (011) 64 80 33 28
Service Rodovia Presidente Dutra, km 208 http://www.sew.com.br
CEP 07210-000 - Guarulhos - SP sew@sew.com.br
Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request!
Bulgaria
Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GMBH Tel. (92) 9 53 25 65
Bogdanovetz Str.1 Fax (92) 9 54 93 45
BG-1606 Sofia bever@mbox.infotel.bg
Cameroon
Technical Office Douala Electro-Services Tel. 43 22 99
Rue Drouot Akwa Fax 42 77 03
B.P. 2024
Douala
Canada
Assembly Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. (905) 7 91-15 53
Sales 210 Walker Drive Fax (905) 7 91-29 99
Service Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.reynolds@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. (604) 9 46-55 35
7188 Honeyman Street Fax (604) 946-2513
Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2 b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. (514) 3 67-11 24
2555 Rue Leger Street Fax (514) 3 67-36 77
LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9 a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!
Chile
Assembly Santiago de SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE Tel. (02) 6 23 82 03+6 23 81 63
Sales Chile Motores-Reductores LTDA. Fax (02) 6 23 81 79
Service Panamericana Norte No 9261 sewsales@entelchile.net
Casilla 23 - Correo Quilicura
RCH-Santiago de Chile
China
Production Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Tel. (022) 25 32 26 12
Assembly No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA Fax (022) 25 32 26 11
Sales Tianjin 300457 http://www.sew.com.cn
Service
02/2002 351
Address list
China
Technical Offices Beijing SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., LTD Tel. (010) 66 41 20 26
Room 1205/1206, Fax (010) 66 41 10 17
Golden Corner Building, No. 129 beijing@sew.com.cn
Xuanwumen
Xidajie, Xicheng District
Beijing 100031
Chengdu SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjin) Co. Ltd. Tel. 0086-28-6 52 15 60
Room 715, Sichuan International Building Fax 0086-28-5 -52 15 63
No. 206, Shun Cheng Avenue chengdu@sew.com.cn
Chengdu 610015
Fuzhou SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjin) Co. Ltd. Tel. 0086-591-7 50 75 96
Unit D, 15/F, Oriental Hotel Fujian Fax 0086-591-7 50 72 85
Fuzhou 350001 fuzhou@sew.com.cn
Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE Pte.Ltd. Tel. 0086-20-38 78 00 12
Rm 1702, No. 138, Tiyudong Road Fax 0086-20-38 78 00 13
Guangzhou, Guangdong, 510620 guangzhou@sew.com.cn
Jinan SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjin) Co.Ltd. Tel. 0086-531-6 41 26 22
Room 2008-2009, Liang You Fu Lin Hotel Fax 0086-531-6 41 24 30
No. 5, Luo Yuan Avenue jinan@sew.com.cn
Jinan 250063
Kunming SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd Tel. 0871-3 11 36 77
Room 1401 Dong Yuan Business Building No. Fax 0871-3 15 44 54
464 kunming@sew.com.cn
Tuodong Road, Kunming
Yunnan Province 650011
Nanjing SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjing) Co.Ltd. Tel. 0086-25-3 34 67 68
Room 710, Jianda Plaza Fax 0086-25-3 34 68 71
No. 223, North Zhongshan Road nanjing@sew.com.cn
Nanjing 210009
Shanghai SEW-EURODRIVE (TIANJIN) CO., Ltd Tel. 0086-21-64 69 35 34
16/F, E Block, Jinxuan Building Fax 0086-21-64 69 55 32
No. 238 South Dandong Road shanghai@sew.com.cn
Xuhui District
Shanghai 200030
Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd Tel. (024) 22 52 15 96
Shenyang OfficeRoom 0605 Koh Brother Buil- Fax (024) 22 52 15 79
ding shenyang@sew.com.cn
No. 21 Beijing Street
Shenhe District Shenyang City, 110013
Wuhan SEW-Eurodrive (Tianjin) Co.Ltd. Tel. 0086-27-85 71 22 93
Room 911, Tai He Plaza Fax 0086-27-85 71 22 82
Wusheng Road wuhan@sew.com.cn
Wuhan 430033
Xian SEW-EURODRIVE (TIANJIN) CO., Ltd Tel. 0086-29-7 81 13 27
Rm 611, Fan Mei Building Fax 0086-29-7 81 13 27
No. 1 Nan Guan Main Street xian@sew.com.cn
Xian 710068, Shanxi Province
Colombia
Assembly Bogotá SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Tel. (0571) 5 47 50 50
Sales Calle 22 No. 132-60 Fax (0571) 5 47 50 44
Service Bodega 6, Manzana B sewcol@andinet.com
Santafé de Bogotá
Croatia
Sales Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Tel. +385 14 61 31 58
Service PIT Erdödy 4 II Fax +385 14 61 31 58
HR 10 000 Zagreb kompeks@net.hr
Czech Republic
Sales Praha SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O. Tel. 02/20 12 12 34 + 20 12 12 36
Business Centrum Praha Fax 02/20 12 12 37
Luná 591 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
CZ-16000 Praha 6 - Vokovice sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
352 02/2002
Address list
Czech Republic
Technical Offices Brno SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O. Tel. 05/43 25 61 51 + 43 25 61 63
Zvonarka 16 Fax 05/43 25 68 45
CZ-61700 Brno
Hradec Kralove SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O. Tel. (06 02) 41 03 88
Technicka Kancelar - vychodni Cechy Fax (04 56) 89 36 34
Smermova
CZ-53374 Horni Jeleni
Denmark
Assembly Kopenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. 0045 (043) 95 8500
Sales Geminivej 28-30, P.O. Box 100 Fax 0045 (043) 95 8509
Service DK-2670 Greve http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Technical Offices Aarhus SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. 0045 (086) 22 8344
Birkenhaven 45 Fax 0045 (086) 22 8490
DK-8520 Lystrup
Helsingør SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. 0045 (049) 75 5700
Rømøvej 2 Fax 0045 (049) 75 5800
DK-3140 Ålsgårde
Odense SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. 0045 (065) 90 2070
Lindelyvei 29, Nr. Søby Fax 0045 (065) 90 2309
DK-5792 Arslev
Egypt
Cairo Copam Egypt Tel. (02) 2 56 62 99-2 41 06 39
for Engineering & Agencies Fax (02) 2 59 47 57-2 40 47 87
33 EI Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo copam@datum.com.eg
Estonia
Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Tel. 6 59 32 30
Paldiski mnt.125 Fax 6 59 32 31
EE 0006 Tallin
Finland
Assembly Lahti SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. (3) 589 300
Sales Vesimäentie 4 Fax (3) 780 6211
Service FIN-15860 Hollola 2 http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew-eurodrive.fi
Technical Offices Helsinki SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. (3) 589 300
Luutnantinaukio 5C LT2 Fax (9) 566 6311
FIN-00410 Helsinki
Vaasa SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. (3) 589 300
Kauppapuistikko 15 A Fax (6) 312 7470
FIN-65100 Vaasa
Gabon
Technical Office Libreville Electro-Services Tel. 73 40 11
B.P. 1889 Fax 73 40 12
Libreville
Great Britain
Assembly Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. 19 24 89 38 55
Sales Beckbridge Industrial Estate Fax 19 24 89 37 02
Service P.O. Box No.1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Technical Offices London SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. 0 20 84 58 89 49
764 Finchely Road, Temple Fortune Fax 0 20 84 58 74 17
GB-London N.W.11 7TH
Midlands SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. 015 27 87 73 19
5 Sugar Brook court, Fax 015 27 57 52 45
Aston Road,
Bromsgrove, Worcs
B60 3EX
Scotland SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. 0 17 86 47 87 30
Scottish Office Fax 017 86 45 02 23
No 37 Enterprise House
Springkerse Business Park
GB-Stirling FK7 7UF Scotland
02/2002 353
Address list
Greece
Sales Athen Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. 0030 1 04 22 51 34
Service 12, Mavromichali Street Fax 0030 1 04 22 51 59
P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus http://www.boznos.gr
Boznos@otenet.gr
Technical Office Thessaloniki Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. 0030 3 10 70 54 00
Maiandrou 15 Fax 0030 3 10 70 55 15
562 24 Evosmos, Thessaloniki
Hong Kong
Assembly Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Tel. 2-7 96 04 77 + 79 60 46 54
Sales Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Fax 2-7 95-91 29
Service Hong Leong Industrial Complex sew@sewhk.com
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Hungary
Sales Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. Tel. +36 1 437 06 58
Service H-1037 Budapest Fax +36 1 437 06 50
Kunigunda u. 18 sew-eurodrive.voros@matarnet.hu
Iceland
Hafnarfirdi VARMAVERK ehf Tel. (354) 5 65 17 50
Dalshrauni 5 Fax (354) 5 65 19 51
IS - 220 Hafnarfirdi varmaverk@varmaverk.is
India
Assembly Baroda SEW-EURODRIVE India Pvt. Ltd. Tel. 0 265-83 10 86
Sales Plot No. 4, Gidc Fax 0 265-83 10 87
Service Por Ramangamdi · Baroda - 391 243 sew.baroda@gecsl.com
Gujarat
Technical Offices Calcutta SEW EURODRIVE INDIA PVT. LTD. Tel. 0091-33-4 85 39 18
Juthika Apartment, Flat No. B1 Fax 0091-33-4 85 38 26
11/1, Sunny Park sewcal@cal.vsnl.net.in
Calcutta - 700 019
Chennai SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. 044-8 21 44 71
2nd Floor, Hariram Building Fax 044-8 21 44 73
Chennai - 600 006, Tamil Nadu
New Delhi SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. 011-5 61 15 66
303 Kirti Deep, Fax 011-5 51 34 94
2-Nangal Raya Business Centre
New Delhi 110 046
Pune SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. (20) 60 10 54
206, Metro House 7 Fax (20) 63 13 65
Mangaldas Road sewpun@pn2.vsnl.net.in
Pune 411001, Maharashtra
Indonesia
Technical Office Jakarta SEW-EURODRIVE Pte Ltd. Tel. (021) 535-90 66/7
Jakarta Liaison Office, Fax (021) 536-36 86
Menara Graha Kencana
Jl. Perjuangan No. 88, LT 3 B, Kebun Jeruk,
Jakarta 11530
Ireland
Sales Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. Tel. (01) 8 30 62 77
Service 48 Moyle Road Fax (01) 8 30 64 58
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11
Israel
Tel-Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Tel. 03-6 24 04 06
126 Petach-Tikva Rd. Fax 03-6 24 04 02
Tel-Aviv 67012 lirazhandasa@barak-online.net
Italy
Assembly Milano SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. (02) 96 98 01
Sales Via Bernini,14 Fax (02) 96 79 97 81
Service I-20020 Solaro (Milano) sewit@sew-eurodrive.it
354 02/2002
Address list
Italy
Technical Offices Bologna SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. (051) 79 66 60
Via Emilia,172 Fax (051) 79 65 95
I-40064 Ozzano dell’Emilia (Bo)
Caserta SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. (0823) 45 06 11
Viale Carlo III-Parco Matilde A Fax (0823) 42 14 14
I-81020 S. Nicola la Strada (Caserta)
Firenze RIMA Tel. (055) 8 98 58 21 /-22
Via Einstein, 14 Fax (055) 8 98 58 30
I-50013 Campi Bisenzio (Firenze)
Roma Elettromec Tel. (06) 5 92 45 30
Via Castel Rosso, 10 Fax (06) 5 92 45 30
I-00144 Roma
Torino SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. (011) 318 66 06
Corso G. Ferraris,146 Fax (011) 319 0115
I-10129 Torino
Verona SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. (045) 97 77 22
Via P. Sgulmero, 27/A Fax (045) 97 60 79
I-37132 Verona
Ivory Coast
Technical Office Abidjan SICA Tel. 25 79 44
Ste industrielle et commerciale pour l’Afrique Fax 25 84 36
165, Bld de Marseille
B.P. 2323, Abidjan 08
Japan
Assembly Toyoda-cho SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD Tel. (0 53 83) 7 3811-13
Sales 250-1, Shimoman-no, Fax (0 53 83) 7 3814
Service Toyoda-cho, Iwata gun sewjapan@lilac.ocn.ne.jp
Shizuoka prefecture, 438-0818
Technical Offices Fukuoka SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD. Tel. (0 92) 713 69 55
C-go, 5th-floor, Yakuin-Hiruzu-Bldg. Fax (0 92) 713 68 60
1-5-11, Yakuin, Chuo-ku sewkyushu@jasmine.ocn.ne.jp
Fukuoka, 810-0022
Osaka SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD. Tel. (06) 64 44-83 30
B-Space EIRAI Bldg., 3rd Floor Fax (06) 64 44-83 38
1-6-9 Kyoumachibori, sewosaka@crocus.ocn.ne.jp
Nishi-ku, Osaka, 550-0003
Tokyo SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD. Tel. (03) 32 39-04 69
Izumi-Bldg. 5 F Fax (03) 32 39-09 43
3-2-15 Misaki-cho Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo sewtokyo@basil.ocn.ne.jp
101-0061
Korea
Assembly Ansan-City SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. (031) 4 92-80 51
Sales B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate Fax (031) 4 92-80 56
Service Unit 1048-4, Shingil-Dong master@sew-korea.co.kr
Ansan 425-120
02/2002 355
Address list
Korea
Technical Offices Busan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd. Tel. (0 51) 313 48 04
No. 407, Samjoo officetel. Fax (0 51) 313 48 05
116-7, Kamjun-2-dong, Sasang-ku sewpu2@channeli.net
Busan 617-724
Daegu SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd. Tel. (053) 6 50-7111
No.1108 Sungan officete Fax (053) 6 50-7112
l 87-36, Duryu 2-dong, Dalseo-ku sewdaegu@netsgo.com
Daegu 704-712
DaeJeon SEW-Eurodrive KOREA Co., Ltd. Tel. (042) 8 28-64 61
No. 2017, Hongin offictel Fax (042) 8 28-64 63
536-9, Bongmyung-dong, Yusung-ku sewdaejeon@netsgo.com
Daejeon 305-710
Kwangju SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd. Tel. (062) 511-9172
4fl., Shinhyun B/D Fax (062) 511-9174
96-16 Unam-dong, Buk-ku sewkwangju@netsgo.com
Kwangju 500-170
Seoul SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd. Tel. (02) 8 62-80 51
No.1104 Sunkyung officetel Fax (02) 8 62-81 99
106-4 Kuro 6-dong, Kuro-ku sewseoul@netsgo.com
Seoul 152-056
Lebanon
Technical Office Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl Tel. (01) 49 47 86
B. P. 80484 (01) 49 82 72
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut (03) 27 45 39
Fax (01) 49 49 71x
gacar@beirut.com
Luxembourg
Assembly Brüssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Tel. 0032 (010) 23 13 11
Sales Avenue Eiffel 5 Fax 0032 (010) 2313 36
Service B-1300 Wavre http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Macedonia
Sales Skopje SGS-Skopje / Macedonia Tel. (0991) 38 43 90
"Teodosij Sinactaski” 66 Fax (0991) 38 43 90
91000 Skopje / Macedonia sgs@mol.com.mk
Malaysia
Assembly Johore SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD Tel. (07) 3 54 57 07 + 3 54 94 09
Sales No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya Fax (07) 3 5414 04
Service 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor kchtan@pd.jaring.my
West Malaysia
Technical Offices Kota Kinabalu SEW-EURODRIVE Sdn Bhd Tel. 0 88 - 42 47 92
(Kota Kinabalu Branch) Fax 0 88 - 42 48 07
Lot No. 2,1st Floor, Inanam Baru
Phase III, Miles 5.1 /2, Jalan Tuaran, Inanam
89350 Kota Kinabalu
Sabah, Malaysia
Kuala Lumpur SEW-EURODRIVE Sdn. Bhd. Tel. (03) 5 22 96 33
No. 2, Jalan Anggerik Mokara 31/46 Fax (03) 5 22 96 22
Kota Kemuning Seksyen 31 sewpjy@po.jaring.my
40460 Shah Alam
Selangor Darul Ehsan
Penang SEW-EURODRIVE Sdn. Bhd. Tel. (04) 3 99 93 49 + 3 99 98 35
No. 38, Jalan Bawal Fax (04) 3 99 93 48
Kimsar Garden seweurodrive@po.jaring.my
13700 Prai, Penang
Mexico
Tultitlan SEW-EURODRIVE, Sales and Distribution, Tel. 00 52 55 58 88 29 76
S.A.de C.V. Fax 00 52 55 58 88 29 77
Boulevard Tultitlan Oriente #2 "G" scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
Colonia Ex-Rancho de Santiaguito
Tultitlan, Estado de Mexico, Mexico 54900
356 02/2002
Address list
Morocco
Technical Office Casablanca S. R. M. Tel. (02) 61 86 69/61 86 70/61 86 71
Société de Réalisations Mécaniques Fax (02) 62 15 88
5, rue Emir Abdelkader srm@marocnet.net.ma
05 Casablanca
Netherlands
Assembly Rotterdam VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V. Tel. +31 10 44 63 700
Sales Industrieweg 175 Fax +31 10 41 55 552
Service NL-3044 AS Rotterdam http://www.vector-aandrijftechniek.nl
Postbus 10085 info@vector.nu
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam
New Zealand
Assembly Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. 0064-9-2 74 56 27
Sales P.O. Box 58-428 Fax 0064-9-2 74 01 65
Service 82 Greenmount drive sales@sew-eurodrive.co.za
East Tamaki Auckland
Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. 0064-3-3 84 62 51
10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead Fax 0064-3-3 85 64 55
Christchurch sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Technical Office Palmerston SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. 0064-6-3 55 21 65
North C/-Grant Shearman, RD 5, Aronui Road Fax 0064-6-3 55 23 16
Palmerston North sales@sew-eurodrive.co.za
Norway
Assembly Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Tel. 0047 (69) 2410 20
Sales Solgaard skog 71 Fax 0047 (69) 2410 40
Service N-1599 Moss sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Pakistan
Technical Office Karachi SEW-EURODRIVE Pte. Ltd. Tel. 92-21-43 93 69
Karachi Liaison Office A/3,1 st Floor, Telex 92-21-43 73 65
Central Commercial Area
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road
Block7/8, K.C.H.S. Union Ltd., Karachi
Paraguay
Asunción EQUIS S. R. L. Tel. (021) 67 21 48
Avda. Madame Lynchy y Sucre Fax (021) 67 21 50
Asunción
Peru
Assembly Lima SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES Tel. (511) 349-52 80
Sales S.A.C. Fax (511) 349-30 02
Service Los Calderos # 120-124 sewperu@terra.com.pe
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima
Philippines
Technical Office Manila SEW-EURODRIVE Pte Ltd Tel. 0 06 32-8 94 27 52 54
Manila Liaison Office Fax 0 06 32-8 94 27 44
Suite 110, Ground Floor sewmla@i-next.net
Comfoods Building
Senator Gil Puyat Avenue
1200 Makati City
Poland
Sales Lodz SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. (042) 6 77 10 90
ul. Techniczna 3/5 Fax (042) 6 77 10 99
PL-92-519 Lodz http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Technical Office Katowice SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. (032) 2 17 50 26 + 2 17 50 27
ul. Nad Jeziorem 87 Fax (032) 2 27 79 10 + 2 17 74 68 + 2
PL-43-100 Tychy 17 50 26 + 2 17 50 27
Bydgoszcz SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. (052) 3 60 65 90
ul. Fordonska 246 Fax (052) 3 60 65 91
PL-85-959 Bydgoszcz
Szczecinek SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. (094) 3 72 88 20
ul. Mickiewicza 2 pok. 36 Fax (052) 3 72 88 21
PL-78-400 Szczecinek
02/2002 357
Address list
Portugal
Assembly Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Tel. (0231) 20 96 70
Sales Apartado 15 Fax (0231) 20 36 85
Service P-3050-901 Mealhada http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Technical Offices Lisboa Tertir Tel. (021) 9 58 01 98
Edificio Lisboa Fax (021) 9 58 02 45
Gabinete 119 esc.lisboa@sew-eurodrive.pt
P-2615 Alverca do Ribatejo
Porto AV. D. AFONSO HENRIQUES, 1196-9° Tel. (022) 9 35 03 83
Sala 909 - Edificio Acia Fax (022) 9 35 03 84
P- 4450 Matosinhos MobilTel. (351) 09 33 2 55 91 10
esc.porto@sew-eurodrive.pt
Romania
Sales Bucuresti Sialco Trading SRL Tel. (01) 2 30 13 28
Service str. Madrid nr.4 Fax (01) 2 30 71 70
71222 Bucuresti sialco@mediasat.ro
Russia
Sales St. Petersburg ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. (812) 5 35 71 42 + 5 35 04 30
P.O. Box 193 Fax (812) 5 35 22 87
RUS-193015 St. Petersburg sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Technical Office Moskau ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. (095) 2 38 76 11
RUS-113813 Moskau Fax (095) 2 38 04 22
Senegal
Technical Office Dakar SENEMECA Tel. 849 47 70
Mécanique Générale Fax 849 47 71
Km 8, Route de Rufisque senemeca@sentoo.sn
B.P. 3251, Dakar
Singapore
Assembly SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. Tel. 8 62 17 01-705
Sales No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Fax 8 61 28 27
Service Jurong Industrial Estate Telex 38 659
Singapore 638644 sales@sew-eurodrive.com.sg
Slovenia
Sales Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. Tel. 00386 3 490 83 20
Service UI. XIV. divizije 14 Fax 00386 3 490 83 21
SLO – 3000 Celje pakman@siol.net
South Africa
Assembly Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. + 27 11 248 70 00
Sales Eurodrive House Fax +27 11 494 23 11
Service Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads ljansen@sew.co.za
Aeroton Ext. 2
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Capetown SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 21 552 98 20
Rainbow Park Fax +27 21 552 98 30
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Telex 576 062
Montague Gardens dswanepoel@sew.co.za
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town
Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 700 34 51
2 Monaceo Place Fax +27 31 700 38 47
Pinetown dtait@sew.co.za
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
358 02/2002
Address list
South Africa
Technical Offices Nelspruit SEW-EURODRIVE (PTY) LTD. Tel. +27 13 752 80 07
7 Christie Crescent Fax +27 13 752 80 08
Vintonia robermeyer@sew.co.za
P.O.Box 1942
Nelspruit 1200
Port Elizabeth SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LTD. Tel. +27 41 453 03 03
5 b Linsay Road Fax +27 41 453 03 05
Neave Township dswanepoel@sew.co.za
6000 Port Elizabeth
Richards Bay SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LTD. Tel. +27 35 797 38 05
25 Eagle Industrial Park Alton Fax +27 35 797 38 19
Richards Bay dtait@sew.co.za
P.O. Box 458
Richards Bay 3900
Spain
Assembly Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Tel. 9 44 31 84 70
Sales Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 Fax 9 44 31 84 71
Service E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Technical Offices Barcelona Delegación Barcelona Tel. 9 37 16 22 00
Avenida Francesc Maciá 40-44 Oficina 3.1 Fax 9 37 23 30 07
E-08206 Sabadell (Barcelona)
Lugo Delegación Noroeste Tel. 6 39 40 33 48
Apartado, 1003 Fax 9 82 20 29 34
E-27080 Lugo
Madrid Delegación Madrid Tel. 9 16 34 22 50
Gran Via. 48-2° A-D Fax 9 16 34 08 99
E-28220 Majadahonda (Madrid)
Sri Lanka
Colombo 4 SM International (Pte) Ltd Tel. 941-59 79 49
254, Galle Raod Fax 941-58 29 81
Colombo 4, Sri Lanka
Sweden
Assembly Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. 0046 (036) 34 42 00
Sales Gnejsvägen 6-8 Fax 0046 (036) 34 42 80
Service S-55303 Jönköping http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
Box 3100 S-55003 Jönköping info@sew-eurodrive.se
Technical Offices Göteborg SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. 0041 (031) 7 09 68 80
Gustaf Werners gata 8 Fax 0041 (031) 7 09 68 93
S-42131 Västra Frölunda
Malmö SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. 0041 (040) 6 80 64 80
Borrgatan 5 Fax 0041 (040) 6 80 64 93
S-21124 Malmö
Stockholm SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. 0041 (08) 4 49 86 80
Björkholmsvägen 10 Fax 0041 (08) 4 49 86 93
S-14125 Huddinge
Skellefteå SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. 0041 (0910) 71 53 80
Trädgårdsgatan 8 Fax 0041 (0910) 71 53 93
S-93131 Skellefteå
Switzerland
Assembly Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Tel. 0041 (061) 4 17 17 17
Sales Jurastrasse 10 Fax 0041 (061) 4 17 17 00
Service CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
02/2002 359
Address list
Switzerland
Technical Offices Suisse romande André Gerber Tel. 0041 (024) 4 45 38 50
Es Perreyres Fax 0041 (024) 4 45 48 87
1436 Chamblon
Bern Rudolf Bühler Tel. 0041 (032) 6 52 23 39
Allerheiligenstraße 97d Fax 0041 (032) 6 52 23 31
2540 Grenchen
Luzern Beat Lütolf Tel. 0041 (062) 7 56 47 80
Baumacher 11 Fax 0041 (062) 7 56 47 86
6244 Nebikon
Zürich René Rothenbühler Tel. 0041 (052) 3 86 31 50
Nörgelbach 7 Fax 0041 (052) 3 86 3213
8493 Saland
Taiwan (R.O.C.)
Nan Tou Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. 00886-49-255-353
No. 55 Kung Yeh N. Road Fax 00886-49-257-878
Industrial District
Nan Tou 540
Taipei Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. (02) 7 38 35 35
6F-3, No. 267, Sec. 2 Fax (02) 7 36 82 68
Tung Hwa South Road, Taipei Telex 27 245
nestnet@ms6.hinet.net
Thailand
Assembly Chon Buri SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. 0066-38 21 40 22
Sales Bangpakong Industrial Park 2 Fax 0066-38 21 45 31
Service 700/456, Moo.7, Tambol Donhuaroh sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.co.th
Muang District
Chon Buri 20000
Technical Offices Bangkok SEW-EURODRIVE PTE LTD Tel. 00662-717 81 51
Bangkok Liaison Office Fax 00662-717 81 52
TPS Building, Room No. 5/4 sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.co.th
1023, Phattanakarn Road
Klongtan, Phrakanong, Bangkok,10110
Hadyai SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. 0066-74-35 94 41
Hadyai Country Home Condominium Fax 0066-74-35 94 42
59/101 Soi.17/1 sewhdy@ksc.th.com
Rachas-Utid Road.
Hadyai, Songkhla 90110
Khonkaen SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. 0066-43-22 57 45
4th Floor, Kaow-U-HA MOTOR Bldg, Fax 0066-43-32 48 71
359/2, Mitraphab Road. sewkk@cscoms.com
Muang District
Khonkaen 40000
Lampang SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. 0066-54-31 02 41
264 Chatchai Road, sub-tuy, Fax 0066-54-31 02 42
Muang, Lampang 52100 sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.co.th
Tunisia
Technical Office Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service Tel. (1) 43 40 64 + 43 20 29
7, rue Ibn EI Heithem Fax (1) 43 29 76
Z.I. SMMT
2014 Mégrine Erriadh
Turkey
Assembly Istanbul SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. (0216) 4 41 91 63 + 4 41 91 64 + 3
Sales Hareket Sistemleri Sirketi 83 80 14 + 3 83 80 15
Service Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3 Fax (0216) 3 05 58 67
TR-81540 Maltepe ISTANBUL seweurodrive@superonline.com.tr
Technical Office Ankara SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. (0312) 286 80 14
Hareket Sistemleri Sirketi Fax (0312) 286 80 15
Ehlibeyt Mah. Ceyhun Atif Kansu Cad. 12. Sok.
Tepe Apt. No. 7/12
TR-06520 Balgat-Ankara
360 02/2002
Address list
Turkey
Technical Office Izmir SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. (0232) 4 69 62 64
Hareket Sistemleri Ticaret Ltd. Sirketi Fax (0232) 4 33 61 05
1203/11 Sok. No. 4/613
Hasan Atli Is Merkezi
TR-35110 Yenisehir-Izmir
Uruguay
Montevideo SEW-EURODRIVE S. A. Sucursal Uruguay Tel. 0059 82 9018 189
German Barbato 1526 Fax 0059 82 9018 188
CP 11200 Montevideo sewuy@sew-eurodrive.com.uy
USA
Production Greenville SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (864) 4 39 75 37
Assembly 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway Fax Sales (864) 439-78 30
Sales P.O. Box 518 Fax Manuf. (864) 4 39-99 48
Service Lyman, S.C. 29365 Fax Ass. (864) 4 39-05 66
Telex 805 550
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly San Francisco SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (510) 4 87-35 60
Sales 30599 San Antonio St. Fax (510) 4 87-63 81
Service Hayward, California 94544-7101 cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Philadelphia/PA SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (856) 4 67-22 77
Pureland Ind. Complex Fax (856) 8 45-31 79
200 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Dayton SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (9 37) 3 35-00 36
2001 West Main Street Fax (9 37) 4 40-37 99
Troy, Ohio 45373 cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Dallas SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (214) 3 30-48 24
3950 Platinum Way Fax (214) 3 30-47 24
Dallas, Texas 75237 csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!
Venezuela
Assembly Valencia SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A. Tel. +58 (241) 8 32 98 04
Sales Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319 Fax +58 (241) 8 38 62 75
Service Zona Industrial Municipal Norte sewventas@cantv.net
Valencia, Estado Carabobo sewfinanzas@cantv.net
02/2002 361

Sew Motor Eurodriver

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sew Motor Eurodriver

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Edition

Drive System for Decentralized Installation

6 Unit Design .................................................................................................... 114

System Manual – Drive System for Decentralized Installation

14 MOVI-SWITCH® Unit Design......................................................................... 303 67

16 Electrical Installation of MOVI-SWITCH® .................................................... 306

Application hints and useful information.

Additional • MOVIMOT® Catalog

Disposal This product consists of:

6 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

The SEW Product • Geared motors, gear units, and motors 9

• Components for decentralized installation 18

• Mechanical variable speed drives

• Explosion-proof drives in accordance with ATEX 100a

8 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

MF.../Z.3 MF.../Z.6. MF.../MM.../Z.8. 17

10 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

12 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

Motor size, number of poles 11

Design (00 = Standard)

Connection type (3 = 3-phase)

Motor power (15 = 1.5 kW)

14 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

280 – 1400 1/min 댴 3 x 380 – 500 V (400 V) 10

Thermal classification F standard for the drives 21

3.3 MOVIMOT® Motor Data for UL Configuration (Motor according to NEMA)

MM03 - MM15 (380 - 500 V) MM22 - MM30 (380 - 500 V)

280 – 1700 1/min 댴 3 x 380 – 500 V (460 V)

280 – 1700 1/min 댴댴 3 x 200 – 240 V (230 V)

Thermal classification F standard for the drives

16 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

UL configuration with connection voltages of 380 – 500 VAC

18 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

3.5 Integrated RS-485 Interface

20 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

Regenerative MOVIMOT® with input voltage 380 – 500 VAC 9

[c/h] Cycles per hour 18

MOVIMOT® with input voltage 200 – 240 VAC

[c/h] Cycles per hour

22 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

800 400 (2) 12

3.8 Dimension Sheet Foot-Mounted MOVIMOT®

(1) For drives with connection voltages of 380 – 500 VAC

24 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

(1) For drives with connection voltages of 380 – 500 VAC 21

3.10 MOVIMOT® Options

L1 (YE MLU11A / BN MLU21A)

26 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

L1 (YE MLG11A / BN MLG21A)

(1) drilled holes on the rear

28 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

30 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

32 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

3.11 MOVIMOT® with Factory-Installed Options

Important The options can be installed in the following positions:

An ordering example can be found in the section "MOVIMOT® Nameplates, Type

34 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

A Terminal box gasket D Connection cable with right-angle plug G 4 screws

A Terminal box gasket E Cover with inverter G 4 screws

36 System Manual - Drive System for Decentralized Installation

Motor option Thermistor sensor

Motor option Brake

Motor size and number of poles 16

3.14 MOVI-SWITCH® Operating Principle